Table Of Contents

Slot Property Information

C.1  Common Cards

C.1.1  Slot Properties—AIC Card

C.1.2  Slot Properties—AIC-I Card

C.1.3  Slot Properties—AIU

C.1.4  Slot Properties—CMP Module

C.1.5  Slot Properties—CMP-W Module

C.1.6  Slot Properties—CTX-CL600 Module

C.1.7  Slot Properties—CXC Card

C.1.8  Slot Properties—EOI-W Card

C.1.9  Slot Properties—Filler Card

C.1.10  Slot Properties—IOC-W Card

C.1.11  Slot Properties—LSM-W

C.1.12  Slot Properties—MIC-28-3-A and MIC-28-3-B Cards

C.1.13  Slot Properties—OCP Module

C.1.14  Slot Properties—OSCM Module

C.1.15  Slot Properties—OSU-W Card

C.1.16  Slot Properties—PLF Module

C.1.17  Slot Properties—RBU Card

C.1.18  Slot Properties—SCF Card

C.1.19  Slot Properties—SCU Module

C.1.20  Slot Properties—SNH Module

C.1.21  Slot Properties—SNS Modules

C.1.22  Slot Properties—TCC+ Card

C.1.23  Slot Properties—TCC2 Card

C.1.24  Slot Properties—TCC2P Card

C.1.25  Slot Properties—TCC-I Card

C.1.26  Slot Properties—TSC Card

C.1.27  Slot Properties—UDC Module

C.1.28  Slot Properties—Unequipped Slot (ONS 15800 and ONS 15801)

C.1.29  Slot Properties—Unequipped Slot (ONS 15808)

C.1.30  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15327 and ONS 15454 SONET)

C.1.31  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15454 SDH)

C.1.32  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15800 and ONS 15801)

C.1.33  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15808)

C.1.34  Slot Properties—XC Card

C.1.35  Slot Properties—XC10G Card

C.1.36  Slot Properties—XCVT Card

C.1.37  Slot Properties—XC-VXL-10G Card

C.1.38  Slot Properties—XTC Card

C.2  DWDM Cards

C.2.1  Slot Properties—2.5G_DM Card

C.2.2  Slot Properties—2.5G_DMP Card

C.2.3  Slot Properties—2.5G Multirate Transponder Cards

C.2.4  Slot Properties—32DMX

C.2.5  Slot Properties—32DMX_O

C.2.6  Slot Properties—32MUX_O

C.2.7  Slot Properties—32WD-IR Module

C.2.8  Slot Properties—32WSS

C.2.9  Slot Properties—4MD-xx.x

C.2.10  Slot Properties—AD-1B-xx.x

C.2.11  Slot Properties—AD-1C-xx.x

C.2.12  Slot Properties—AD-2C-xx.x

C.2.13  Slot Properties—AD-4B-xx.x

C.2.14  Slot Properties—AD-4C-xx.x

C.2.15  Slot Properties—ADA Card

C.2.16  Slot Properties—BBA Card

C.2.17  Slot Properties—BBA/RBA Card

C.2.18  Slot Properties—BCS-ELH Module

C.2.19  Slot Properties—BCS-LH Module

C.2.20  Slot Properties—Demultiplexer Modules

C.2.21  Slot Properties—IRBA Card

C.2.22  Slot Properties—Multiplexer Unit

C.2.23  Slot Properties—MXP_2.5G_10E Card

C.2.24  Slot Properties—MXP_2.5G_10G Muxponder Card

C.2.25  Slot Properties—OA-ELH Modules

C.2.26  Slot Properties—OAD-8-C Module

C.2.27  Slot Properties—OADM-P4 Card

C.2.28  Slot Properties—OBA-C Module

C.2.29  Slot Properties—OECP Modules

C.2.30  Slot Properties—OEP-C Module

C.2.31  Slot Properties—OP-ELH Modules

C.2.32  Slot Properties—OPA-C Modules

C.2.33  Slot Properties—OPT-BST

C.2.34  Slot Properties—OPT-BST-E

C.2.35  Slot Properties—OPT-PRE

C.2.36  Slot Properties—ORP-ELH Modules

C.2.37  Slot Properties—OSC-CSM

C.2.38  Slot Properties—OSCM

C.2.39  Slot Properties—PRE-L

C.2.40  Slot Properties—PRE-L-IR Card

C.2.41  Slot Properties—TPA Card

C.2.42  Slot Properties—TXP_MR_10E Card

C.2.43  Slot Properties—TXP_MR_10G Card

C.2.44  Slot Properties—WD Card

C.3  Electrical Cards

C.3.1  Slot Properties—DS1-14 Card

C.3.2  Slot Properties—DS1N Card

C.3.3  Slot Properties—DS3-12 Card

C.3.4  Slot Properties—DS3_EC1_48 Card

C.3.5  Slot Properties—DS3E Card

C.3.6  Slot Properties—DS3i Card

C.3.7  Slot Properties—DS3i-N-12 Card

C.3.8  Slot Properties—DS3XM-6 Card

C.3.9  Slot Properties—DS3XM-12 Card

C.3.10  Slot Properties—E1-N-14 Card

C.3.11  Slot Properties—E1-42 Card

C.3.12  Slot Properties—E-1 Card

C.3.13  Slot Properties—EC1-12 Card

C.3.14  Slot Properties—FMEC-E3/DS3 Card

C.4  Ethernet Cards

C.4.1  Slot Properties—CE-100T-8 (ONS 15310)

C.4.2  Slot Properties—CE-100T-8 (ONS 15454 SONET)

C.4.3  Slot Properties—DS-N

C.4.4  Slot Properties—E10/100T-4

C.4.5  Slot Properties—E1000-2

C.4.6  Slot Properties—E1000-2-G

C.4.7  Slot Properties—E100T-12

C.4.8  Slot Properties—E100T-G

C.4.9  Slot Properties—E3-12 Card

C.4.10  Slot Properties—ETH1000

C.4.11  Slot Properties—G1000-2

C.4.12  Slot Properties—G1000-4

C.4.13  Slot Properties—ML-100T-8 Module

C.4.14  Slot Properties—ML100T-12

C.4.15  Slot Properties—ML1000-2

C.5  FC_MR-4 Card

C.5.1  Slot Properties—FC_MR-4 Card

C.6  FMEC Cards

C.6.1  Slot Properties—FMEC-DS1/E1 Card

C.6.2  Slot Properties—FMEC-DS3/E3 Card

C.6.3  Slot Properties—FMEC-E1 Card

C.6.4  Slot Properties—FMEC-E1-120NP Card

C.6.5  Slot Properties—FMEC-STM1E Card

C.6.6  Slot Properties—MIC-A/P Card

C.6.7  Slot Properties—MIC-C/T/P Card

C.7  Multirate Cards

C.7.1  Slot Properties—ASAP_4 Card

C.8  Optical Cards

C.8.1  Slot Properties—OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card

C.8.2  Slot Properties—OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card

C.8.3  Slot Properties—OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card

C.8.4  Slot Properties—OC3 IR 4 1310 Card

C.8.5  Slot Properties—OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card

C.8.6  Slot Properties—OC48 Card

C.8.7  Slot Properties—OC48 IR 1310 Card

C.8.8  Slot Properties—OC48 LR 1550 Card

C.8.9  Slot Properties—OECP-L Modules

C.8.10  Slot Properties—STM-1 Card

C.8.11  Slot Properties—STM-16 Card (ONS 15454 SDH)

C.8.12  Slot Properties—STM-16 Card (ONS 15600 SDH)

C.8.13  Slot Properties—STM-1E-12 Card

C.8.14  Slot Properties—STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card

C.8.15  Slot Properties—STM-64 LH 1550 Card (ONS 15454 SDH)

C.8.16  Slot Properties—STM-64 LR/LH 4 Card (ONS 15600 SDH)

C.9  Transponder Cards

C.9.1  Slot Properties—BT10E-LCxx and BT10E-LLxx Cards

C.9.2  Slot Properties—FEC-LEM Card

C.9.3  Slot Properties—LEM Card

C.9.4  Slot Properties—LEM-10-B1 Card

C.9.5  Slot Properties—LEM-10G-Nxx Card

C.9.6  Slot Properties—LEM-EM-M Card

C.9.7  Slot Properties—LT Card

C.9.8  Slot Properties—RT Card

C.9.9  Slot Properties—RXT Card

C.9.10  Slot Properties—RXT-10G-N Card

C.9.11  Slot Properties—RXT-10H-M Card

C.9.12  Slot Properties—RXT-B1 Monitoring Card

C.9.13  Slot Properties—RXT-FEC Card

C.9.14  Slot Properties—Transmitter Transponder Module

C.9.15  Slot Properties—WCM

C.9.16  Slot Properties—WCM-10G-Nxx

C.9.17  Slot Properties—WCM-FEC

C.9.18  Slot Properties—WCM-EM-Fxx

C.9.19  Slot Properties—WCM-EM-Mxx

C.9.20  Slot Properties—WCM10

Slot Property Information

---

This appendix provides information on the cards supported in CTM. This appendix contains the following sections:

•Common Cards

•DWDM Cards

•Electrical Cards

•Ethernet Cards

•FC_MR-4 Card

•FMEC Cards

•Multirate Cards

•Optical Cards

•Transponder Cards

C.1  Common Cards

This section describes the following common cards supported within CTM:

•Slot Properties—AIC Card

•Slot Properties—AIC-I Card

•Slot Properties—AIU

•Slot Properties—CMP Module

•Slot Properties—CMP-W Module

•Slot Properties—CTX-CL600 Module

•Slot Properties—CXC Card

•Slot Properties—EOI-W Card

•Slot Properties—Filler Card

•Slot Properties—IOC-W Card

•Slot Properties—LSM-W

•Slot Properties—MIC-28-3-A and MIC-28-3-B Cards

•Slot Properties—OCP Module

•Slot Properties—OSCM Module

•Slot Properties—OSU-W Card

•Slot Properties—PLF Module

•Slot Properties—RBU Card

•Slot Properties—SCF Card

•Slot Properties—SCU Module

•Slot Properties—SNH Module

•Slot Properties—SNS Modules

•Slot Properties—TCC+ Card

•Slot Properties—TCC2 Card

•Slot Properties—TCC2P Card

•Slot Properties—TCC-I Card

•Slot Properties—TSC Card

•Slot Properties—UDC Module

•Slot Properties—Unequipped Slot (ONS 15800 and ONS 15801)

•Slot Properties—Unequipped Slot (ONS 15808)

•Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15327 and ONS 15454 SONET)

•Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15454 SDH)

•Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15800 and ONS 15801)

•Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15808)

•Slot Properties—XC Card

•Slot Properties—XC10G Card

•Slot Properties—XCVT Card

•Slot Properties—XC-VXL-10G Card

•Slot Properties—XTC Card

C.1.1  Slot Properties—AIC Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The optional Alarm Interface Controller (AIC) card provides customer-defined alarm input/output (I/O) and supports local and express orderwire.

For the AIC module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Alarm Extenders, Local Orderwire, and Express Orderwire.

C.1.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the AIC that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-1) allows you to view and update AIC identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.1.3  Alarm Extenders Tab

The Alarm Extenders tab allows you view AIC alarm information. The Alarm Extenders tab contains two subtabs:

•External Alarms Subtab

•External Controls Subtab

C.1.1.3.1  External Alarms Subtab

The External Alarms subtab (see Table C-2) allows you to view and update external alarm information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-2 Field Descriptions for the External Alarms Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Number	Displays the alarm input number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the alarm input number.
Alarm Type	Choose an alarm type from the provided list.
Severity	Choose a severity from the list.
Raised When	Choose the contact condition that will trigger the alarm in CTC.
Virtual Wire	To assign the external device to a virtual wire, choose a virtual wire from the list, or choose None if no assignment is required.
Description	Displays a default description that is provided for every enabled external alarm.
Raised	Indicates if an alarm has been raised.
Contact Status	Indicates the current status of the contact.

C.1.1.3.2  External Controls Subtab

The External Controls subtab (see Table C-3) allows you to view and update external controls. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-3 Field Descriptions for the External Controls Subtab 

Field	Description
Control Number	Displays the control number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the control number.
Control Type	Choose a control type from the provided list.
Trigger Type	Choose a trigger type: a local minor, major, or critical alarm; a remote minor, major, or critical alarm; or a virtual wire activation.
Description	Enter a description.
Current State	Displays the current state of the control.
Auto State	Displays the auto state of the control.
Contact Setting	Displays the current contact setting.

C.1.1.4  Local Orderwire Tab

Local Orderwire allows a craftsperson to plug a phoneset into a node and communicate with craftspeople working at other nodes or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse code modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section/line overhead. The AIC allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead channel) orderwire channels on a SONET ring or particular optics facility. Local orderwire also allows communication at regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device. The Local Orderwire tab (see Table C-4) contains the following fields.

Table C-4 Field Descriptions for the Local Orderwire Tab 

Field	Description
Buzzer	The AIC supports a call button on the module front panel which, when pressed, causes all AICs on the orderwire subnetwork to ring. The ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC. There is also a ring LED that mimics the AIC ringer. It flashes when any call button is pressed on the orderwire subnetwork. The call button and ringer LED allow a remote craftsperson to get the attention of craftspeople across the network. If you want to turn on the audible alert (buzzer) for the orderwire, check the Buzzer check box.
4-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm (decibels referenced per milliwatt) by moving the slider to the right or left for the four-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.
2-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the two-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.

C.1.1.5  Express Orderwire Tab

The Express Orderwire tab (see Table C-5) allows you to configure express orderwire settings. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-5 Field Descriptions for the Express Orderwire Tab 

Field	Description
Buzzer	If you want to turn on the audible alert (buzzer) for the orderwire, check the Buzzer check box.
4-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the four-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.
2-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the two-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.2  Slot Properties—AIC-I Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The optional Alarm Interface Controller-International (AIC-I) card provides customer-defined (environmental) alarms and controls and supports local and express orderwire. It provides twelve customer-defined input and four customer-defined input/output contacts. The physical connections are through the backplane wire-wrap pin terminals.

For the AIC-I module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, Alarm Extenders, Local Orderwire, and Express Orderwire.

C.1.2.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the AIC-I that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-6) allows you to view and update AIC-I identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-6 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.2.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-7) allows you to view and update AIC-I card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-7 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Add Extension	Check this check box if you are using the Alarm Expansion Panel (AEP).
Extended Type	The AEP radio button is automatically selected if you checked the Add Extension check box.
Input/Output	Select External Alarm if you use external alarms only; select External Control if you use both external alarms and external controls. Selecting only External Alarm gives you 16 external alarm ports and no external control ports. If you select External control, four of the ports are converted to external control ports, leaving you with 12 external alarm ports.
Station Number	Enter a four-digit station number. The valid range is 0 to 9999.

C.1.2.4  Alarm Extenders Tab

The Alarm Extenders tab allows you view AIC-I alarm information. The Alarm Extenders tab contains two subtabs:

•External Alarms Subtab

•External Controls Subtab

C.1.2.4.1  External Alarms Subtab

The External Alarms subtab (see Table C-8) allows you to view and update external alarm information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-8 Field Descriptions for the External Alarms Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Number	The alarm input number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the alarm input number.
Alarm Type	Choose an alarm type from the provided list.
Severity	Choose a severity from the list.
Raised When	Choose the contact condition that will trigger the alarm in CTC.
Virtual Wire	To assign the external device to a virtual wire, choose a virtual wire from the list, or choose None if no assignment is required.
Description	A default description is provided in this line for every external alarm that is enabled.
Raised	Indicates if an alarm has been raised.
Contact Status	Indicates the current status of the contact.

C.1.2.4.2  External Controls Subtab

The External Controls subtab (see Table C-9) allows you to view and update external controls. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-9 Field Descriptions for the External Controls Subtab 

Field	Description
Control Number	The control number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the control number.
Control Type	Choose a control type from the provided list.
Trigger Type	Choose a trigger type: a local minor, major, or critical alarm; a remote minor, major, or critical alarm; or a virtual wire activation.
Description	Enter a description.
Current State	The current state of the control.
Auto State	The auto state of the control.
Contact Setting	The current contact setting.

C.1.2.5  Local Orderwire Tab

Orderwire allows a craftsperson to plug a phoneset into a node and communicate with craftspeople working at other nodes or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse code modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section/line overhead. The AIC-I allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead channel) orderwire channels on a SONET ring or particular optics facility. Local orderwire also allows communication at regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device. The Local Orderwire tab (see Table C-10) contains the following fields.

Table C-10 Field Descriptions for the Local Orderwire Tab 

Field	Description
Buzzer	The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity, which causes one AIC-I card or all AIC-I cards on the orderwire subnetwork to ring. The ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. If you want to turn on the audible alert (buzzer) for the orderwire, check the Buzzer check box.
4-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the four-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.
2-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the two-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.

C.1.2.6  Express Orderwire Tab

The Express Orderwire tab (see Table C-11) allows you to configure express orderwire settings. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-11 Field Descriptions for the Express Orderwire Tab 

Field	Description
Buzzer	If you want to turn on the audible alert (buzzer) for the orderwire, check the Buzzer check box.
4-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the four-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.
2-Wire Level	If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the two-wire headset that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.3  Slot Properties—AIU

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Alarm Interface Unit (AIU) manages digital and analog inputs from external equipment. It also manages digital outputs that can control external devices. The AIU allows remote control of isolated optical line amplification sites. Each AIU module manages up to 32 digital inputs, eight analog inputs, and 20 digital outputs. The digital inputs are ground-activated and are used to monitor site conditions such as fire alarms, flood warnings, and open doors. The analog inputs are used to remotely monitor voltages from transducers with slow parameter sensors. The digital outputs are used to operate equipment remotely. For example, digital outputs are used to start a generator engine or turn on security lights at a remote site from the network operations center (NOC).

For ONS 15808 AIU, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Analog, Digital Input, and Digital Output.

C.1.3.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the AIU that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the AIU PM Table.

C.1.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-12) allows you to view and update AIU identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-12 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the AIU is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the AIU is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the AIU is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the AIU.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the AIU.
State	Allows you to place the AIU in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the AIU.

C.1.3.3  Analog Tab

The Analog tab (see Table C-13) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the AIU analog voltages. Each AIU module manages up to eight analog inputs. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-13 Field Descriptions for the Analog Tab 

Field	Description
General Analog Input 1-8
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current analog input (in volts) from analog source x.
Voltage High	Sets the high voltage threshold, the alarm severity level, and a description of the alarm.
Voltage Low	Sets the low voltage threshold, the alarm severity level, and a description of the alarm.
Name	Sets the name of the general analog input on which the alarm occurred.

C.1.3.4  Digital Input Tab

The Digital Input tab (see Table C-14) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the AIU digital inputs. Each AIU module manages up to 32 digital inputs. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-14 Field Descriptions for the Digital Input Tab 

Field	Description
General Digital Input 1-32
General Digital Input x	Shows the current alarm status of the general digital input.
Alarm Severity	Sets the alarm severity (critical, major, minor, warning, or not reported).
Name	Sets the name of the general digital input on which the alarm occurred.
Description	Sets a description of the alarm.

C.1.3.5  Digital Output Tab

The Digital Output tab (see Table C-15) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the AIU digital outputs. Each AIU module manages up to 20 digital outputs. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-15 Field Descriptions for the Digital Output Tab 

Field	Description
General Digital Output 1-20
General Digital Output x	Sets the general digital output status to Operated or Released.
Name	Sets the name of the general digital output on which the alarm occurred.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.4  Slot Properties—CMP Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Control and Monitoring Processor (CMP) module monitors and relays commands to the ONS 15808 modules. It also provides an interface to supervisory software such as CTM. The CMP module is able to monitor all modules in the system through the Shelf Control Unit (SCU) module, which connects the internal control buses (CBUS) of all optical subracks in the site. This configuration allows all modules installed at a site to be managed as a unique NE. In sites containing more than one bay, multiple CMP modules are required. One CMP module is required for each bay.

CMP modules shown on this sheet include:

•Control and Monitoring Processor—Master (CMP)

•Control and Monitoring Processor—Slave (CMP-S)

For ONS 15808 CMP modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Statistics.

C.1.4.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the CMP module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table or in the Alarm Browser.

C.1.4.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-16) allows you to view and update CMP module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-16 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the CMP module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the CMP module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the CMP module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the CMP module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
State	Allows you to place the CMP module in service.

C.1.4.3  Statistics Tab

The Statistics tab (see Table C-17) allows you to view memory statistics for the CMP module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-17 Field Descriptions for the Statistics Tab 

Field	Description
Memory
Free disk/flash space	Shows the amount of remaining free disk/flash space, in megabytes.
Percentage of free space	Shows the percentage of remaining free disk/flash space.
Free RAM memory	Shows the amount of free RAM memory, in megabytes.
Percentage of free RAM memory	Shows the percentage of remaining free RAM memory.
RAM largest contiguous block	Shows the largest contiguous block of RAM memory, in megabytes.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.5  Slot Properties—CMP-W Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Control and Monitoring Processor-Master (CMP-W) module is the heart of the management system, controlling all optical and common modules in the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 NE. The CMP-W module collects information about status, alarms, parameters, and actions on the internal control bus (CBUS). The CMP-W module makes NE information available to the local craft terminal and to the element management system.

For the CMP-W module, the Slot Properties pane displays Module View, Identification, and Statistics tabs. Fields on these tabs are described in the following sections.

C.1.5.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the CMP-W module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-click the graphic to open a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.1.5.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-18) allows you to view and update CMP-W module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-18 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the CMP-W module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the CMP-W module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the CMP-W module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the CMP-W module.
Software Version	Displays the NE software version of the agent that it is running.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the module BIOS (future).
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the module board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
State	Allows you to place the CMP-W module in service.

C.1.5.3  Statistics Tab

The Statistics tab (see Table C-19) allows you to view memory statistics for the CMP-W module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-19 Field Descriptions for the Statistics Tab 

Field	Description
Memory
Free disk/flash space	Shows the amount of remaining free disk/flash space, in megabytes.
Percentage of free space	Shows the percentage of remaining free disk/flash space.
Free RAM memory	Shows the amount of free RAM memory, in megabytes.
Percentage of free RAM memory	Shows the percentage of remaining free RAM memory.
RAM largest contiguous block	Shows the largest contiguous block of RAM memory, in megabytes.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.6  Slot Properties—CTX-CL600 Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15310 CL slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The CTX-CL600 card is an unpluggable card on the ONS 15310 CL NE. It has a total of 26 ports that are either mounted or pluggable.

For the CTX-CL600 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Wideband Ports, Broadband Ports, Pluggable Provisioning, DS1, DS3, EC1, Optical, Alarm Extenders, and Info.

C.1.6.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the CTX-CL600 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.1.6.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-20) allows you to view and update CTX-CL600 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-20 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Admin State	Select the designation that drives whether an entity is in service or out of service. The Admin State is the driver for the Service State.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.6.3  Wideband Ports Tab

The Wideband Ports tab (see Table C-21) allows you to view the DS1 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-21 Field Descriptions for the Wideband Ports Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Rate	Displays the rate that the slot is provisioned for.

C.1.6.4  Broadband Ports Tab

The Broadband Ports tab (see Table C-22) allows you to view the DS3 or EC1 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-22 Field Descriptions for the Broadband Ports Tab 

Field	Description
DS3
Port Number	Displays the DS3 port number.
Rate	Displays the rate that the slot is provisioned for.
EC1
Port Number	Displays the EC1 port number.
Rate	Displays the rate that the slot is provisioned for.

C.1.6.5  Pluggable Provisioning Tab

The Pluggable Provisioning tab (see Table C-23) allows you to view and provision pluggable entities; for example, the pluggable port module (PPM) and pluggable I/O module (PIM) and the ports inside these entities. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-23 Field Descriptions for the Pluggable Provisioning Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Admin State	Select the designation that drives whether an entity is in service or out of service. The Admin State is the driver for the Service State.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module and the port number.
Rate	Displays the rate of the port inside the pluggable entity.

C.1.6.5.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision pluggable entities such as the PPM and PIM, and to create the ports inside these entities. Table C-24 describes the fields displayed in the Provision Pluggable dialog box when provisioning a PPM. Table C-25 applies only to the ONS 15600 SONET ASAP_4 card and describes the fields displayed in the Provision Pluggable dialog box when provisioning a PIM. Table C-26 describes the fields displayed in the Provision Pluggable dialog box when creating the ports inside the PPM and PIM.

Table C-24 Field Description for the Provision Pluggable Dialog Box—PPM 

Field	Description
PPM #	Sets the PPM number.
No. of Ports	Sets the number of ports inside the PPM.
PPM Type	Sets the type of PPM.

Table C-25 Field Description for the Provision Pluggable Dialog Box—PIM (ONS 15600 SONET ASAP_4 Card) 

Field	Description
PIM #	Sets the PIM number.
No. of Ports	Sets the number of ports inside the PIM.
PIM Type	Sets the type of PIM.

Table C-26 Field Descriptions for the Provision Pluggable Dialog Box 

Field	Description
PPM	Select the PPM for which you want to create the port.
Port Number	Sets the port number.
Port Rate	Sets the rate of the new port.

C.1.6.6  DS1 Tab

The DS1 tab allows you to view node near-end and far-end performance on a DS1 card to detect possible performance problems. The DS1 tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Electric Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Electric Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•VT Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•VT Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

•Loopback Subtab

•J1 Path Trace Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.1.6.6.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-27) allows you to view and change the line settings of the DS1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-27 Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the DS-1 transmission coding type.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
Send Do Not Use	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Provide Sync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
Provide Sync Message	When checked, enables synchronization status messages, which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management

C.1.6.6.2  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-28) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 15-minute threshold settings of the DS1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-28 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.

C.1.6.6.3  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-29) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 1-day threshold settings of the DS1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-29 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.

C.1.6.6.4  Electric Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Electric Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-30) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 15-minute electrical path threshold settings for the DS1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-30 Field Descriptions for the Electric Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
ESA-P	Displays errored seconds type A-path information.
ESB-P	Displays errored seconds type B-path information.
CSS-P	Displays controlled slip seconds-path information.
SEFS-P	Displays severely errored framing seconds-path information.

C.1.6.6.5  Electric Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Electric Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-31) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 1-day electrical path threshold settings for the DS1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-31 Field Descriptions for the Electric Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
ESA-P	Displays errored seconds type A-path information.
ESB-P	Displays errored seconds type B-path information.
CSS-P	Displays controlled slip seconds-path information.
SEFS-P	Displays severely errored framing seconds-path information.

C.1.6.6.6  STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The STS Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-32) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 15-minute STS information for the DS1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-32 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.1.6.6.7  STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The STS Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-33) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 1-day STS information for the DS1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-33 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.1.6.6.8  VT Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The VT Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-34) displays near- and far-end 15-minute VT threshold information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-34 Field Descriptions for the VT Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
VT Number	Displays VT Number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.
Far End
VT Number	Displays VT Number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.

C.1.6.6.9  VT Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The VT Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-35) displays near- and far-end 1-day VT threshold information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-35 Field Descriptions for the VT Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
VT Number	Displays VT Number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.
Far End
VT Number	Displays VT Number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.

C.1.6.6.10  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-36) allows you to view and update DS1 alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-36 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Pane	Field	Description
Card Profile	Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
	Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
—	Port Number	Displays the port number.
—	Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
—	Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.6.6.11  Loopback Subtab

The Loopback subtab (see Table C-37) allows you to view and update DS1 loopback information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-37 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Subtab 

Field	Description
Line Number	Displays the line number.
Administration State	Allows you to configure the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT)
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Send Code	Allows you to send loopback commands to the far end.
Send AIS on Facility Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the facility loopback.
Send AIS on Terminal Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the terminal loopback.

C.1.6.6.12  J1 Path Trace Subtab

The J1 Path Trace subtab (see Table C-38) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-38  Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.1.6.6.13  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-39) displays customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-39 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number, VT Number	Displays the STS or VT number.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.1.6.7  DS3 Tab

The DS3 tab allows you to view node near-end and far-end performance on a DS3 card to detect possible performance problems. The DS3 tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•PBit Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•PBit Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•CPBit Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•CPBit Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

•Loopback Subtab

•J1 Path Trace Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.1.6.7.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-40) allows you to view and change the line settings of the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-40 Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number for the optical port.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the transmission coding type.
Detected Line Type	Displays the detected line type.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown—The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed—The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service—The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service—The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.

C.1.6.7.2  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-41) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 15-minute threshold settings of the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-41 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line (near-end only).
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line (near-end only).
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only).

C.1.6.7.3  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-42) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 1-day threshold settings of the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-42 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line (near-end only).
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line (near-end only).
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only).

C.1.6.7.4  PBit Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The PBit Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-43) displays near-end 15-minute PBit Path threshold information on the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-43 Field Descriptions for the PBit Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.1.6.7.5  PBit Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The PBit Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-44) displays near- and far-end 1-day PBit Path threshold information on the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-44 Field Descriptions for the PBit Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.1.6.7.6  CPBit Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The CPBit Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-45) displays near- and far-end 15-minute CPBit path threshold information on the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-45 Field Descriptions for the CPBit Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
Port No.	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.1.6.7.7  CPBit Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The CPBit Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-46) displays near- and far-end 1-day CPBit path threshold information on the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-46 Field Descriptions for the CPBit Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
Port No.	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.1.6.7.8  STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The STS Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-47) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 15-minute STS information on the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-47 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.1.6.7.9  STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The STS Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-48) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 1-day STS information on the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-48 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.1.6.7.10  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-49) allows you to view and update DS3 alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-49 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.1.6.7.11  Loopback Subtab

The Loopback subtab (see Table C-50) allows you to view and update DS3 loopback information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-50  Field Descriptions for the Loopback Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Inhibit FE Loopback	When selected, inhibits far-end loopback.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Send AIS on Facility Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the facility loopback.
Send AIS on Terminal Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the terminal loopback.

C.1.6.7.12  J1 Path Trace Subtab

The J1 Path Trace subtab (see Table C-51) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-51  Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.1.6.7.13  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-52) displays customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-52 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.1.6.8  EC1 Tab

The EC1 tab allows you to view node near-end and far-end performance on an EC1 card to detect possible performance problems. The EC1 tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•STS Config Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

•Loopback Subtab

•J1 Path Trace Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.1.6.8.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-53) allows you to view and change the line settings of the DS3 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-53 Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number for the optical port.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC-3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
Line Length (feet)	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. Values are 0 through 225 (default) or 226 through 450.
Rx Equalization	For early EC1 card versions, equalization can be turned off if the line length is short or the environment is extremely cold; Rx Equalization should normally be set to On (checked, default).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown—The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed—The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service—The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service—The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.

C.1.6.8.2  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-54) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 15-minute threshold settings of the EC1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-54 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays failure count-line.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays failure count-line.

C.1.6.8.3  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-55) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 1-day threshold settings of the EC1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-55 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays the unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays the failure count-line.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays the unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays the failure count-line.

C.1.6.8.4  Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Section Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-56) allows you to view and change the near-end 15-minute section threshold information on the EC1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-56 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.1.6.8.5  Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Section Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-57) allows you to view and change the near-end 1-day section threshold information on the EC1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-57 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.1.6.8.6  Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-58) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 15-minute path threshold information on the EC1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-58 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated.
PJCS-Pdet	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds (PJCS) detected on a particular path.
PJCS-Pgen	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds generated for a particular path.
PJC-Diff	Displays the sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated.

C.1.6.8.7  Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-59) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 1-day path threshold information on the EC1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-59 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated.
PJCS-Pdet	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds (PJCS) detected on a particular path.
PJCS-Pgen	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds generated for a particular path.
PJC-Diff	Displays the sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated.
PJCS-Pdet	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds (PJCS) detected on a particular path.
PJCS-Pgen	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds generated for a particular path.
PJC-Diff	Displays the sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.

C.1.6.8.8  STS Config Subtab

The STS Config subtab (see Table C-60) allows you to view and change the STS settings of the EC1 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-60 Field Descriptions for the STS Config Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number information.
IPPM Enabled	Check to enable intermediate path performance monitoring (IPPM) and uncheck to disable IPPM.

C.1.6.8.9  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-61) allows you to view and change EC1 alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-61 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.6.8.10  Loopback Subtab

The Loopback subtab (see Table C-62) allows you to view and change EC1 loopback information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-62 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Send AIS on Facility Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the facility loopback.
Send AIS on Terminal Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the terminal loopback.

C.1.6.8.11  J1 Path Trace Subtab

The J1 Path Trace subtab (see Table C-63) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-63 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.1.6.8.12  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-64) displays customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-64 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.1.6.9  Optical Tab

The Optical tab allows you to view node near-end and far-end performance on an optical card to detect possible performance problems. The Optical tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Physical Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Physical Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•STS Config Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

•Loopback Subtab

•Auto Laser Shutdown Subtab

•Protection Subtab

•J1 Path Trace Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.1.6.9.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-65) allows you to view and change the line settings of an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-65 Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC-3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
Provides Sync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
SendDoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown—The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed—The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service—The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service—The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.

C.1.6.9.2  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-66) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 15-minute threshold settings of an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-66 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays unavailable seconds-line information.
FC-L	Failure count-line (FC-L) lists a count of the number of near-end line failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-L failure is declared, or when a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end failure is declared. This failure event ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period where it begins.
PSC	In a 1 + 1 protection scheme for a working card, protection switching count (PSC) is a count of the number of times service switches from a working card to a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the working card. For a protection card, PSC is a count of the number of times service switches to a working card from a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the protection card. The PSC PM is only applicable if revertive line-level protection switching is used. PSC is supported in revertive and nonrevertive modes. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
PSD	Protection switching duration (PSD) applies to the length of time, in seconds, that service is carried on another line. For a working line, PSD is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the protection line. For the protection line, it is a count of the seconds that the line was used to carry service. The PSD PM is only applicable if revertive line-level protection switching is used. PSD is supported in revertive and nonrevertive modes. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
PSC-W	For a working line in a 2-fiber BLSR, protection switching count-working (PSC-W) is a count of the number of times traffic switches away from the working capacity in the failed line and back to the working capacity after the failure is cleared. PSC-W increments on the failed working line and PSC increments on the active protect line. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
PSD-W	For a working line in a 2-fiber BLSR, protection switching duration-working (PSD-W) is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the protection line. PSD-W increments on the failed working line and PSD increments on the active protect line. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays unavailable seconds-line information.
FC-L	Failure count-line (FC-L) lists a count of the number of near-end line failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-L failure is declared, or when a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end failure is declared. This failure event ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period where it begins.

C.1.6.9.3  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-67) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 1-day threshold settings of an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-67 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays unavailable seconds-line information.
FC-L	Failure count-line (FC-L) lists a count of the number of near-end line failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-L failure is declared, or when a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end failure is declared. This failure event ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period where it begins.
PSC	In a 1 + 1 protection scheme for a working card, protection switching count (PSC) is a count of the number of times service switches from a working card to a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the working card. For a protection card, PSC is a count of the number of times service switches to a working card from a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the protection card. The PSC PM is only applicable if revertive line-level protection switching is used. PSC is supported in revertive and nonrevertive modes. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
PSD	Protection switching duration (PSD) applies to the length of time, in seconds, that service is carried on another line. For a working line, PSD is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the protection line. For the protection line, it is a count of the seconds that the line was used to carry service. The PSD PM is only applicable if revertive line-level protection switching is used. PSD is supported in revertive and nonrevertive modes. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
PSC-W	For a working line in a 2-fiber BLSR, protection switching count-working (PSC-W) is a count of the number of times traffic switches away from the working capacity in the failed line and back to the working capacity after the failure is cleared. PSC-W increments on the failed working line and PSC increments on the active protect line. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
PSD-W	For a working line in a 2-fiber BLSR, protection switching duration-working (PSD-W) is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the protection line. PSD-W increments on the failed working line and PSD increments on the active protect line. Note This parameter is not supported for transponder or muxponder cards.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Displays unavailable seconds-line information.
FC-L	Failure count-line (FC-L) lists a count of the number of near-end line failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-L failure is declared, or when a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end failure is declared. This failure event ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period where it begins.

C.1.6.9.4  Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Section Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-68) allows you to view and change the near-end 15-minute section threshold settings of an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-68 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.1.6.9.5  Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Section Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-69) allows you to view and change the near-end 1-day section threshold settings of an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-69 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.1.6.9.6  Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-70) allows you to view and change near-end 15-minute path threshold information on an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-70 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated.
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PJCS-Pdet	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds (PJCS) detected on a particular path.
PJCS-Pgen	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds generated for a particular path.
PJC-Diff	Displays the sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.

C.1.6.9.7  Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-71) allows you to view and change near-end 1-day path threshold information on an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-71 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated.
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected.
PJCS-Pdet	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds (PJCS) detected on a particular path.
PJCS-Pgen	Indicates the number of pointer justification count seconds generated for a particular path.
PJC-Diff	Displays the sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.

C.1.6.9.8  Physical Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Physical Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-72) allows you to view and change 15-minute physical threshold information on an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-72 Field Descriptions for the Physical Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Pluggable entity number and port number.
LBC-HIGH	Laser bias current maximum. Default is (15 min): 200 percent.
LBC-LOW	Laser bias current minimum. Default is (15 min): 20 percent.
OPT-HIGH	Optical power transmitted maximum. Default is (15 min): 120 percent.
OPT-LOW	Optical power transmitted minimum. Default is (15 min): 80 percent.
OPR-HIGH	Optical power received maximum. Default is (15 min): 200 percent.
OPR-LOW	Optical power received minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
Set OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR) establishes the received power level as 100 percent. If the receiver power decreases, then the OPR percentage decreases to reflect the loss in receiver power. For example, if the receiver power decreases 3 dBm, the OPR decreases 50 percent.

C.1.6.9.9  Physical Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Physical Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-73) allows you to view and change 1-day physical threshold information on an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-73 Field Descriptions for the Physical Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Pluggable entity number and port number.
LBC-HIGH	Laser bias current maximum. Default is (15 min): 200 percent.
LBC-LOW	Laser bias current minimum. Default is (15 min): 20 percent.
OPT-HIGH	Optical power transmitted maximum. Default is (15 min): 120 percent.
OPT-LOW	Optical power transmitted minimum. Default is (15 min): 80 percent.
OPR-HIGH	Optical power received maximum. Default is (15 min): 200 percent.
OPR-LOW	Optical power received minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
Set OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR) establishes the received power level as 100 percent. If the receiver power decreases, then the OPR percentage decreases to reflect the loss in receiver power. For example, if the receiver power decreases 3 dBm, the OPR decreases 50 percent.

C.1.6.9.10  STS Config Subtab

The STS Config subtab (see Table C-74) allows you to view and change the STS settings of an optical card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-74  Field Descriptions for the STS Config Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number information.
IPPM Enabled	Check to enable IPPM and uncheck to disable IPPM.
XC Loopback	Displays the cross-connect loopback status.

C.1.6.9.11  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-75) allows you to view and change optical card alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-75  Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.1.6.9.12  Loopback Subtab

The Loopback subtab (see Table C-76) allows you to view and change optical card loopback information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-76 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Send AIS on Facility Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the facility loopback.
Send AIS on Terminal Loopback	When selected, sends AIS on the terminal loopback.

C.1.6.9.13  Auto Laser Shutdown Subtab

The Auto Laser Shutdown subtab (see Table C-77) allows you to view and update optical card auto laser shutdown (ALS) parameters. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-77 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
ASL Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.1.6.9.14  Protection Subtab

The Protection subtab (see Table C-78) allows you to view and update protection group information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-78 Field Descriptions for the Protection Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.1.6.9.15  J1 Path Trace Subtab

The J1 Path Trace subtab (see Table C-79) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-79 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.1.6.9.16  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-80) displays customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-80 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.1.6.10  Alarm Extenders Tab

The Alarm Extenders tab allows you to view CTX-CL600 alarm information. The Alarm Extenders tab contains two subtabs:

•External Alarms Subtab

•External Controls Subtab

C.1.6.10.1  External Alarms Subtab

The External Alarms subtab (see Table C-81) allows you to view and update external alarm information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-81 Field Descriptions for the External Alarms Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Number	The alarm input number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the alarm input number.
Alarm Type	Choose an alarm type from the provided list.
Severity	Choose a severity from the list.
Raised When	Choose the contact condition that will trigger the alarm in CTC.
Virtual Wire	To assign the external device to a virtual wire, choose a virtual wire from the list, or choose None if no assignment is required.
Description	A default description is provided in this line for every external alarm that is enabled.
Raised	Indicates if an alarm has been raised.
Contact Status	Indicates the current status of the contact.

C.1.6.10.2  External Controls Subtab

The External Controls subtab (see Table C-82) allows you to view and update external controls. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-82 Field Descriptions for the External Controls Subtab 

Field	Description
Control Number	The control number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the control number.
Control Type	Choose a control type from the provided list.
Trigger Type	Choose a trigger type: a local minor, major, or critical alarm; a remote minor, major, or critical alarm; or a virtual wire activation.
Description	Enter a description.
Current State	The current state of the control.
Auto State	The auto state of the control.
Contact Setting	The current contact setting.

C.1.6.11  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-83) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the CTX-CL600 module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-83 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.7  Slot Properties—CXC Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15600 SONET and ONS 15600 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

For the CXC, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.7.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the CXC card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.7.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-84) allows you to view and update CXC identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-84 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.8  Slot Properties—EOI-W Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module alarm thresholds and severities.

The ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 External Orderwire Interface (EOI-W) module provides an isolated interface between the Line Service Modem (LSM-W) module and an external orderwire terminal. All orderwire signals are transmitted from the LSM-W module to the EOI-W module. The EOI-W module provides two isolated, bidirectional, 64-kbps voice channels through the service line for the orderwire.

For EOI-W modules, the Slot Properties pane displays Module View and Identification tabs.

C.1.8.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the EOI-W that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms also display when you move the mouse over the graphic.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.1.8.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-85) allows you to view and update the EOI-W identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-85 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the EOI-W is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the EOI-W is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the EOI-W is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the EOI-W.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the EOI-W module.
State	Allows you to place the EOI-W module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.9  Slot Properties—Filler Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15600 SONET and ONS 15600 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. For the Filler module, the Slot Properties pane displays the Module View tab.

C.1.9.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the Filler card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add a card.

C.1.10  Slot Properties—IOC-W Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module alarm thresholds and severities.

ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 Input/Output Card (IOC-W) modules protect NEs by reporting indications from externally sensed equipment and housekeeping alarms. Alarms reported include AC power, DC power, fire, flood, open doors, and so on. The IOC-W module also permits remote control of isolated optical line amplifier (OLA) sites.

For IOC-W modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Analog, Digital Input, and Digital Output.

C.1.10.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the IOC-W module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.1.10.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-86) allows you to view and update IOC-W identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-86 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the IOC-W is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the IOC-W is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the IOC-W is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the IOC-W.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the SCC version number.
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the IOC-W.
State	Allows you to place the IOC-W in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the IOC-W.

C.1.10.3  Analog Tab

The Analog tab (see Table C-87) allows you to assign high and low voltage thresholds and alarm severities for eight analog inputs. The tab contains the following fields for each analog input.

Table C-87 Field Descriptions for the Analog Tab 

Field	Description
General Analog Input 1-8
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current voltage of the analog input.
Voltage High	Use the fields in this row to view or set the high voltage threshold (in volts), the alarm severity level, and a description for the analog input.
Voltage Low	Use the fields in this row to view or set the low voltage threshold (in volts), the alarm severity level, and a description for the analog input.
Name	Allows you to specify the name of the IOC-W module for which you want to view or provision analog inputs.

C.1.10.4  Digital Input Tab

The Digital Input tab (see Table C-88) allows you to assign the alarm input levels for up to 32 digital devices. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-88 Field Descriptions for the Digital Input Tab 

Field	Description
General Digital Input 1-32
General Digital Input	Displays the general input level for the digital input (read-only).
Alarm Severity	Sets the severity for alarms that occur for the digital input.
Name	Displays the name entered by the user for the digital input.
Description	Displays the description entered by the user for the digital input.

C.1.10.5  Digital Output Tab

The Digital Output tab (see Table C-89) allows you to assign the alarm output levels for up to 20 digital devices. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-89 Field Descriptions for the Digital Output Tab 

Field	Description
General Digital Output 1-20
General Digital Output	Displays the general output level for the digital output.
Name	Displays the name entered by the user for the digital output.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.11  Slot Properties—LSM-W

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 Line Service Modem (LSM-W) module is a bidirectional optical module that operates at an E1 line rate (2.048 Mbps). It transports the optical service channel (OSC), which carries telemetry, supervision, user-defined information, and orderwire between ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-1.

Figure C-1 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Line Service Modem Module

For the LSM-W module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, and Output Power.

C.1.11.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the LSM-W module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.1.11.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-90) allows you to view and update LSM-W module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-90 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the LSM-W is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the LSM-W is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the LSM-W is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the LSM-W.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the LSM-W.
State	Allows you to place the LSM-W in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the LSM-W.

C.1.11.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-91) allows you to view and assign performance monitoring thresholds for the temperature of the east and west lasers of the LSM-W module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-91 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
East Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of East Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for East Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for East Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
West Laser 2 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of West Laser 2.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for West Laser 2 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for West Laser 2 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.1.11.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-92) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the line service east and west laser current levels of the LSM-W module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-92 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
East Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the East Laser 1 current.
Low	Sets the low current threshold for East Laser 1 (in milliamperes [mA]) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high current threshold for East Laser 1 (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
West Laser 2 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the West Laser 2 current.
Low	Sets the low current threshold for West Laser 2 (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high current threshold for West Laser 2 (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.1.11.5  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-93) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the LSM-W module east and west laser output power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-93 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
East Laser 1 Output Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current output power of East Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low output power threshold for East Laser 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high output power threshold East Laser 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
West Laser 2 Output Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current output power of West Laser 2.
Low	Sets the low output power threshold for West Laser 2 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high output power threshold for West Laser 2 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.12  Slot Properties—MIC-28-3-A and MIC-28-3-B Cards

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The MIC-28-3-A and MIC-28-3-B cards are the Mechanical Interface Cards (MICs). The MICs provide the physical connection points for the DS-1 and DS-3 interfaces on the XTC cards, the redundant power inputs, the alarm inputs and outputs, and the BITS timing inputs and outputs.

For the MIC module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.12.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the MIC that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.12.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-94) allows you to view and update MIC identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-94 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.13  Slot Properties—OCP Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Channel Protection (OCP) module enables 1+1 protection of a generic client optical signal regardless of bit rate, format protocol, and wavelength. To provide this protection, the OCP module is placed at the optical system access point. This means that the module must be connected between the client terminal and the ONS 15808 system transponders to provide path protection. The OCP module can provide channel protection on the physical layer.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-2.

Figure C-2 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Channel Protection Unit

For ONS 15808 OCP modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Config, Input Power, and Optical Power.

C.1.13.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OCP module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OCP PM Table.

C.1.13.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-95) allows you to view and update OCP module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-95 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OCP module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OCP module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OCP module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OCP module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OCP module.
State	Allows you to place the OCP module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OCP module.

C.1.13.3  Config Tab

The Config tab (see Table C-96) allows you to set certain OCP module configuration parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-96 Field Descriptions for the Config Tab 

Field	Description
Unit State	Shows the current status of the unit state and allows you to set the alarm severity level.
Hardware State	Shows the current status of the hardware state and allows you to set the alarm severity level.
Channel Number Protected	Allows you to set the channel number protected.
W/P Line Hold Off Time	Allows you to set the working/protection line hold off time (in milliseconds).
Unit Operation Mode	Allows you to specify Auto or Manual unit operation mode and set the alarm severity level.
Forcing Operation Mode	When Unit Operation Mode is set to Manual, allows you to specify working or protected operation mode.
External Line	When Unit Operation Mode is set to Auto, allows you to enable or disable the external line.
Lock Out of Protection	Allows you to turn the lock out of protection on or off.

C.1.13.4  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-97) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the OCP module lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-97 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power Working Line
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OCP module working line input power (in dBm).
Working Line Threshold	Sets the threshold for the working line input power, in dBm.
Internal Working Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current internal working line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.
External Working Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current external working line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.
Input Power Protection Line
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OCP module protection line input power (in dBm).
Protection Line Threshold	Sets the threshold for the protection line input power, in dBm.
Internal Protection Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current internal protection line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.
External Protection Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current external protection line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.

C.1.13.5  Optical Power Tab

The Optical Power tab (see Table C-98) allows you to view and assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OCP module optical power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-98 Field Descriptions for the Optical Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power from Client Transmitter
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current input power from the client transmitter (in dBm).
Output Power Client Receiver
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current output power from the client receiver (in dBm).
Optical Switch Insertion Loss
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current optical switch insertion loss (in dB). Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.
High	Sets the high threshold for the optical switch insertion loss, in dB, and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.14  Slot Properties—OSCM Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Service Channel Modem (OSCM) module provides each NE with logical and physical interfaces to manage the two-channel, unidirectional optical service channel information. The optical service channel connects all the stations of an optical network or subnetwork and transports general purpose information without affecting user traffic. The primary function of the OSCM module is to manage data subchannels for supervisory and order-wire services and to provide transparent links between each node of the network or user-defined functions. The OSCM module transports data in each direction by using a single optical wavelength (1620 nm) running on the same fiber pair as the optical payload channels.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-3.

Figure C-3 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Service Channel Modem

For ONS 15808 OSCM modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Performance, Current, and Output Power.

C.1.14.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OSCM module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OSCM PM Table.

C.1.14.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-99) allows you to view and update OSCM module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-99 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OSCM module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OSCM module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OSCM module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OSCM module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OSCM module.
State	Allows you to place the OSCM module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OSCM module.

C.1.14.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-100) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OSCM module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-100 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
East Laser Temperature 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of the east laser (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
West Laser Temperature 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of the west laser (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.1.14.4  Performance Tab

The Performance tab (see Table C-101) allows you to view performance information for the OSCM module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-101 Field Descriptions for the Performance Tab 

Field	Description
Number of Collisions
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current number of collisions.
Number of Transmitted Bytes
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current number of transmitted bytes.

C.1.14.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-102) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OSCM module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-102 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
East Laser Current 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the east laser current (in mA).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the east laser current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the east laser current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
West Laser Current 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the west laser current (in mA).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the west laser current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the west laser current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.1.14.6  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-103) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OSCM module laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-103 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
East Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current output power of the east laser (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the east laser output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the east laser output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
West Output Power 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current output power of the west laser (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the west laser output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the west laser output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.15  Slot Properties—OSU-W Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Switch Unit (OSU-W) module enables 1+1 protection of a generic client optical signal regardless of bit rate, format protocol, and wavelength. To provide this protection, the OSU-W module is placed at the optical system access point. This means that the module must be connected between the client terminal and the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 system transponders to provide path protection. The OSU-W module can provide channel protection on the physical layer, for SDH and SONET traffic as well as for unprotected traffic such as IP, ATM, and plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH).

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-4.

Figure C-4 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Optical Switch Unit

For ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 OSU-W modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Config, Input Power, and Optical Power.

C.1.15.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OSU-W module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OSU PM Table.

C.1.15.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-104) allows you to view and update OSU-W module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-104 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OSU-W module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the OSU-W module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OSU-W module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OSU-W module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OSU-W module.
State	Allows you to place the OSU-W module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the OSU-W module.

C.1.15.3  Config Tab

The Config tab (see Table C-105) allows you to set certain OSU-W module configuration parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-105 Field Descriptions for the Config Tab 

Field	Description
Unit State	Shows the current status of the unit state and allows you to set the alarm severity level.
Hardware State	Shows the current status of the hardware state and allows you to set the alarm severity level.
Channel Number Protected	Allows you to set the channel number that is protected by this OSU-W module.
W/P Line Hold Off Time	Allows you to set the working/protection line hold-off time (in milliseconds).
Unit Operation Mode	Allows you to specify Auto or Manual unit operation mode and set the alarm severity level.
Forcing Operation Mode	When Unit Operation Mode is set to Manual, allows you to specify working or protected operation mode.
External Line	When Unit Operation Mode is set to Auto, allows you to enable or disable the external line.
Lock Out of Protection	Allows you to turn the lockout of protection on or off.

C.1.15.4  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-106) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the OSU-W module lasers.The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-106 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power Working Line
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OSU-W module working line input power in (dBm).
Working Line Threshold	Sets the threshold for the working line input power (in dBm).
Internal Working Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current internal working line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.
External Working Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current external working line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.
Input Power Protection Line
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OSU-W module protection line input power (in dBm).
Protection Line Threshold	Sets the threshold for the protection line input power (in dBm).
Internal Protection Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current internal protection line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.
External Protection Line State	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current external protection line state and lets you set the alarm severity level.

C.1.15.5  Optical Power Tab

The Optical Power (see Table C-107) tab allows you to view and assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OSU-W module optical power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-107 Field Descriptions for the Optical Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power from Client Transmitter
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current input power from the client transmitter (in dBm).
Output Power Client Receiver
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current output power from the client receiver (in dBm).
Optical Switch Insertion Loss
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current optical switch insertion loss (in decibels [dB]). Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.
High	Sets the high threshold for the optical switch insertion loss (in dB) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.16  Slot Properties—PLF Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Power Line Filter (PLF) module is a line conditioner and filtering module. CTM does not directly manage the PLF; rather, the Shelf Control Unit (SCU) monitors the PLF module. The PLF has the following functions:

•Manages one of the two independent input power supply voltages

•Provides redundant power capability

•Provides a single ON/OFF switch to turn off module output voltage

•Protects against polarity inversion of input voltage, input over-voltage greater than 75 V, input under-voltage less than 36 V, and inrush current surges

For ONS 15808 PLF modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.16.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the PLF module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table or in the Alarm Browser.

C.1.16.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-108) allows you to view and update PLF module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-108 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the PLF module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the PLF module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the PLF module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the PLF module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the PLF module.
State	Allows you to place the PLF module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.17  Slot Properties—RBU Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module.

The Router Bridge Unit (RBU) provides redundant telemetry lines for the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 system. RBUs are connected to the Ethernet interface by Line Service Modem (LSM-W) modules and are placed at the end link of terminal sites.

For the RBU, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.17.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the RBU that is installed in the slot. Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module.

C.1.17.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-109) allows you to view and update RBU identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-109 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the RBU is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the RBU is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the RBU is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the RBU.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.18  Slot Properties—SCF Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Subrack Common Functions (SCF) module powers and monitors ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 fans, including the BAT1 and BAT2 external power supplies and the filtered power that is supplied to the internal power bus. The SCF module also manages the internal control bus extension, summarizes the alarm status of the optical subrack, and tests LEDs on all modules in the optical subrack.

For the SCF module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Fan, DCC, and BAT. Descriptions of fields displayed on these tabs are provided in the following sections.

C.1.18.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the SCF module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the SCF PM Table.

C.1.18.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-110) allows you to view and update SCF identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-110 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the SCF module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the SCF module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the SCF module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack where the SCF module is installed.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the SCF module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the SCC number.
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the SCF module.
State	Allows you to place the SCF module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the SCF module.

C.1.18.3  Fan Tab

The Fan tab (see Table C-111) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds to up to four fans that are powered by the SCF. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-111 Field Descriptions for the Fan Tab 

Field	Description
Fan Current 1 to 4
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current fan threshold.
Low	Sets the low fan current threshold (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high fan current threshold (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.1.18.4  DCC Tab

The DCC tab (see Table C-112) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds to the data communications channel (DCC) converter, which is powered by the SCF module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-112 Field Descriptions for the DCC Tab 

Field	Description
DCC Converter
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the threshold of the DCC converter.
Low	Sets the low DCC converter threshold (in volts) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high DCC converter threshold (in volts) and the alarm severity level.

C.1.18.5  BAT Tab

The BAT tab (see Table C-113) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds to the Battery Management (BAT) module, which is powered by the SCF module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-113 Field Descriptions for the BAT Tab 

Field	Description
Battery Control
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the battery threshold.
Low	Sets the low battery control threshold (in volts) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high battery control threshold (in volts) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.19  Slot Properties—SCU Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Shelf Control Unit (SCU) module is installed in every shelf in the system to manage all of the common shelf functions. The front panel of the SCU module has LEDs that indicate the status of the module, fans, and the bay alarms. The SCU module controls the following shelf functions:

•Monitor the power supply and fan status

•Monitor the local shelf input voltage

•Extend the control bus (CBUS) to other shelves

•LED test of all shelf modules

•B-alarm relay and LED management

•Alarm memory and acknowledgment

For ONS 15808 SCU modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Fan, DCC, and BAT.

C.1.19.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the SCU module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the SCU PM Table.

C.1.19.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-114) allows you to view and update SCU module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-114 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the SCU module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the SCU module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the SCU module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the SCU module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the SCU module.
State	Allows you to place the SCU module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the SCU module.

C.1.19.3  Fan Tab

The Fan tab (see Table C-115) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the four SCU module fan currents. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-115 Field Descriptions for the Fan Tab 

Field	Description
Fan Current 1-4
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current (in mA) for fan x.
Low	Sets the fan current low threshold, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the fan current high threshold, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.1.19.4  DCC Tab

The DCC tab (see Table C-116) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the SCU module DCC converter. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-116 Field Descriptions for the DCC Tab 

Field	Description
DCC Converter
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current voltage of the DCC converter.
Low	Sets the low voltage for the DCC converter and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high voltage for the DCC converter and the alarm severity level.

C.1.19.5  BAT Tab

The BAT tab (see Table C-117) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the SCU module battery. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-117 Field Descriptions for the BAT Tab 

Field	Description
Battery Control
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current voltage of the SCU module battery.
Low	Sets the low voltage for the SCU module battery and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high voltage for the SCU module battery and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.20  Slot Properties—SNH Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Supervision Network Hub (SNH) module is an Ethernet hub that provides the following functions:

•Interconnection between the protect NE and the working NE through UTP/STP cable (10BASE-T interface)

•Element management interface and local craft terminal interface through UTP/STP cable (10BASE-T interface)

For ONS 15808 SNH modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.20.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the SNH module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table or in the Alarm Browser.

C.1.20.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-118) allows you to view and update SNH module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-118 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the SNH module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the SNH module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the SNH module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the SNH module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the SNH module.
State	Allows you to place the SNH module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.21  Slot Properties—SNS Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Supervision Network Switch (SNS) module is an eight-port Ethernet switch that provides protection to the supervisory data communications network (DCN) in a redundant system. The SNS module provides the following functions:

•DCN domain partitioning

•Interconnection between the protect NE and the working NE through UTP/STP cable (10BASE-T interface)

•Element management interface through the UTP/STP cable (10BASE-T interface)

For ONS 15808 SNS modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.21.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the SNS module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table or in the Alarm Browser.

C.1.21.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-119) allows you to view and update SNS module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-119 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the SNS module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the SNS module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the SNS module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the SNS module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the SNS module.
State	Allows you to place the SNS module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.22  Slot Properties—TCC+ Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Timing Communication and Control+ (TCC+) card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET data communications channel (DCC) termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15327 and ONS 15454. The TCC+ also ensures that the system maintains Telcordia timing requirements.

For the TCC+ module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.22.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the TCC+ that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.1.22.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-120) allows you to view and update TCC+ identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-120 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.23  Slot Properties—TCC2 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control (TCC2) performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SDH section overhead (SOH) data communication channel/generic communication channel (DCC/GCC) termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454 SDH. The TCC2 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3E (ITU-T G.813) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system. The TCC2 card can work with the XC10G, XC-VXL-10G, or XC-VXL-2.5G cross-connect cards. It requires Software Release 4.0.0 or later.

For the TCC2 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Info.

C.1.23.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the TCC2 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.23.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-121) allows you to view and update TCC2 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-121 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.23.3  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-122) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the TCC2 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-122 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.24  Slot Properties—TCC2P Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control Plus (TCC2P) card is an enhanced version of the TCC2 card. The primary enhancements are Ethernet security features and 64K composite clock BITS timing.

The TCC2P card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.

---

Note The TCC2P card requires Software Release 4.0.0 or later.

---

For the TCC2P module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Info.

C.1.24.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the TCC2P that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.24.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-123) allows you to view and update TCC2P identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-123 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	Displays the administration state. The state can either be Unlocked or Locked, Maintenance.
Service State	Displays the service state. It can be: •Locked-Disabled •Locked-Enabled •Unlocked-Disabled •Unlocked-Enabled
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.24.3  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-124) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the TCC2P card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-124 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.25  Slot Properties—TCC-I Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Timing Communication and Control-International (TCC-I) Card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET data communications channel (DCC) termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454 SDH. The TCC-I also ensures that the system maintains Telcordia timing requirements.

For the TCC-I module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.25.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the TCC-I that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.1.25.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-125) allows you to view and update TCC-I identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-125 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for; for example, TCC+ or TCC-I.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot, for example, TCC+ or TCC-I.
HW Part No	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
HW Hardware Revision	Displays the card revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.26  Slot Properties—TSC Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15600 SONET or ONS 15600 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The timing and shelf controller (TSC) card performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15600. The TSC card monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two building integrated timing supply (BITS) interfaces for frequency accuracy.

For the TSC module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.26.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the TSC card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.26.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-126) allows you to view and update TSC identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-126 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.27  Slot Properties—UDC Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The User Data Channel (UDC) module provides an isolated interface toward the Optical Service Channel Modem (OSCM) and an external orderwire terminal to provide two isolated, bidirectional data channels (64 kbps) that can transport voice signals through the service line. An orderwire terminal uses these two data channels to carry two voice signals between sites.

For ONS 15808 UDC modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.1.27.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the UDC module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table or in the Alarm Browser.

C.1.27.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-127) allows you to view and update UDC module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-127 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the UDC module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the UDC module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the UDC module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the UDC module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the UDC module.
State	Allows you to place the UDC module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.28  Slot Properties—Unequipped Slot (ONS 15800 and ONS 15801)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 subrack slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Unequipped slots are slots that have been provisioned for an ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module but do not have the module installed. Unequipped slots display the following tabs: Slot View and Identification.

C.1.28.1  Slot View Tab

The Slot View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the unequipped slot displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the slot. Normally, unequipped slots show zero alarms; however, if there is a board mismatch or a missing replaceable unit, the alarm counters indicate one outstanding alarm.

C.1.28.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-128) displays the slot identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-128 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the slot is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801).
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the slot is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack where the slot is installed.
Slot ID	Displays the slot number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.29  Slot Properties—Unequipped Slot (ONS 15808)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 subrack slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Unequipped slots are slots that have been provisioned for an ONS 15808 module but do not have the module installed. Unequipped slots display two tabs, Slot View and Identification.

C.1.29.1  Slot View Tab

The Slot View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15808 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the unequipped slot displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the slot. Normally unequipped slots show zero alarms; however, if there is a board mismatch or a missing replaceable unit, the alarm counters indicate one outstanding alarm.

C.1.29.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-129) displays the slot identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-129 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the slot is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808).
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the slot is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack where the slot is installed.
Slot ID	Displays the slot number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.30  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15327 and ONS 15454 SONET)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET subrack slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Unprovisioned slots are slots that are not polled by the TCC. Unprovisioned slots display one tab, Module View.

C.1.30.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. When the slot contains a module, moving the mouse pointer over the slot displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the slot. The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). For unprovisioned slots, a blank slot graphic is displayed.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.31  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15454 SDH)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH subrack slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Unprovisioned slots are slots that are not polled by the TCC. Unprovisioned slots display one tab, Module View.

C.1.31.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. When the slot contains a module, moving the mouse pointer over the slot displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the slot. The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). For unprovisioned slots, a blank slot graphic is displayed.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.32  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15800 and ONS 15801)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 subrack slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Unprovisioned slots are slots that are not polled by the Control and Monitoring Processor (CMP-W) module. The Slot Properties pane for unprovisioned slots displays the following tabs: Slot View and Identification.

C.1.32.1  Slot View Tab

The Slot View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. When the slot contains a module, moving the mouse pointer over the slot displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the slot. For unprovisioned slots, a blank slot graphic is displayed.

C.1.32.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-130) displays the slot identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-130 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the slot is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801).
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the slot is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack where the slot is installed.
Slot ID	Displays the slot number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.33  Slot Properties—Unprovisioned Slot (ONS 15808)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 subrack slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Unprovisioned slots are slots that are not polled by the control and monitoring processor (CMP). Unprovisioned slots display two tabs, Slot View and Identification.

C.1.33.1  Slot View Tab

The Slot View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15808 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. When the slot contains a module, moving the mouse pointer over the slot displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the slot. For unprovisioned slots, a blank slot graphic is displayed.

C.1.33.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-131) displays the slot identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-131 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the slot is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808).
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the slot is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack where the slot is installed.
Slot ID	Displays the slot number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.34  Slot Properties—XC Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 Cross-Connect (XC) card performs port-to-port time-division multiplexing (TDM), STS switching, and can terminate 288 STSs, or 144 STS cross-connections. Each STS cross-connection uses two STS ports on the XC card STS matrix.

For the XC module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Protection.

C.1.34.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the XC that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.1.34.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-132) allows you to view and update XC identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-132 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.34.3  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-133) allows you to view and update XC protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-133 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
State of Slot x	Displays the state of the selected slot and of the companion XC slot.
Switch	Click to switch the selected slot from its current state to the other states.
Lock	Click to lock the selected slot into its current state.
Unlock	Click to unlock the current slot from its current state.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.35  Slot Properties—XC10G Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH cross-connect cards establish connections and perform time division switching (TDS) at the STS-1 level between ONS 15454 traffic cards. The ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH 10 Gigabit Cross-Connect (XC10G) card cross-connects STS-12, STS-48, and STS-192 signal rates. The XC10G provides a maximum of 1152 STS-1 cross-connections. Any STS-1 on any port can be connected to any other port, which means that the STS cross-connections are nonblocking.

For the XC10G module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Protection, and Info.

C.1.35.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the XC10G that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.35.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-134) allows you to view and update XC10G identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-134 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.35.3  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-135) allows you to view and update XC10G protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-135 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
State of Slot x	Displays the state of the selected slot and of the companion XC10G slot.
Switch	Click to switch the selected slot from its current state to the other states.
Lock	Click to lock the selected slot into its current state.
Unlock	Click to unlock the current slot from its current state.

C.1.35.4  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-136) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the XC10G card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-136 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.36  Slot Properties—XCVT Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 Cross-Connect Virtual Tributary (XCVT) performs port-to-port time-division multiplexing (TDM), STS and VT1.5 switching, and can terminate 288 STSs, or 144 STS cross-connections. (Each STS cross-connection uses two STS ports on the cross-connect card STS matrix.)

For the XCVT module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Protection.

C.1.36.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the XCVT that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.1.36.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-137) allows you to view and update XCVT identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-137 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.36.3  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-138) allows you to view and update XCVT protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-138 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
State of Slot x	Displays the state of the selected slot and of the companion XCVT slot.
Switch	Click to switch the selected slot from its current state to the other states.
Lock	Click to lock the selected slot into its current state.
Unlock	Click to unlock the current slot from its current state.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.37  Slot Properties—XC-VXL-10G Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The XC-VXL-10G card cross-connects E-1, E-3, DS-3, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, and STM-64 signal rates. The XC-VXL-10G provides a maximum of 384 x 384 VC-4 nonblocking cross-connections, 384 x 384 VC-3 nonblocking cross-connections, or 2016 x 2016 VC-12 nonblocking cross-connections. It is designed for 10-Gbps solutions.

For the XC-VXL-10G module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Protection.

C.1.37.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the XC-VXL-10G that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.1.37.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-139) allows you to view and update XC-VXL-10G identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-139 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.37.3  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-140) allows you to view and update XC-VXL-10G protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-140 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
State of Slot x	Displays the state of the selected slot and of the companion XC-VXL-10G slot.
Switch	Click to switch the selected slot from its current state to the other states.
Lock	Click to lock the selected slot into its current state.
Unlock	Click to unlock the current slot from its current state.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.1.38  Slot Properties—XTC Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Integrated Cross-Connect, Timing, and Control (XTC) cards perform system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET data communications channel (DCC) termination, system fault detection, and cross-connect maintenance and management for the ONS 15327. The XTC cards also provide the circuitry for the DS-1 and DS-3 interfaces and ensure the system maintains Telcordia timing requirements. An XTC card is required to operate the ONS 15327 and can be used in a redundant or nonredundant configuration.

For the XTC module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, DS1, DS3, STS-1 Path, VT1.5 Path, Alarm Extenders, Protection, and J1 Path Trace.

C.1.38.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the XTC that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.1.38.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-141) allows you to view and update XTC identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-141 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.1.38.3  DS1 Tab

The DS1 tab (see Table C-142) allows you to view and update XTC DS1 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-142 Field Descriptions for the DS1 Tab 

Subfield	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the port number: •1 to 14 (XTC-14) •1 to 28 (XTC-28-3)
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the port. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Line Type	Defines the line framing type as ESF (Extended Super Frame), D4, or unframed.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the DS-1 transmission coding type. Values are: •AMI—Alternate Mark Inversion (default) •B8ZS—Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. Values are: •0-131 (default) •132-262 •263-393 •394-524 •525-655
State	Displays the status of the line. Values are: •IS—In Service •IS_AINS—In Service-Auto In Service Soak •OOS—Out of Service •OOS_MT—Out of Service-Maintenance
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The duration of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the port is set in service by the software. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
AINS Soak Count Down	Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number (1 to 14 for XTC-14; 1 to 28 for XTC-28-3)
CV-L	Coding violations-line (near-end only)
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line (near-end only)
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only)
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number (1 to 14 for XTC-14; 1 to 28 for XTC-28-3)
CV-L	Coding violations-line (near-end only)
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line (near-end only)
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only)
Electric Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end electrical path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The port number (1 to 14 for XTC-14; 1 to 28 for XTC-28-3)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Far End
Port Number	The port number (1 to 14 for XTC-14; 1 to 28 for XTC-28-3)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
ESA-P	Errored seconds type A-path
ESB-P	Errored seconds type B-path
CSS-P	Controlled slip seconds-path
SEFS-P	Severely errored framing seconds-path
Electric Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end electrical path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The port number (1 to 14 for XTC-14; 1 to 28 for XTC-28-3)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Far End
Port Number	The port number (1 to 14 for XTC-14; 1 to 28 for XTC-28-3)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
ESA-P	Errored seconds type A-path
ESB-P	Errored seconds type B-path
CSS-P	Controlled slip seconds-path
SEFS-P	Severely errored framing seconds-path
Alarm Behavior
Displays alarm profile information.
Loopback
Displays XTC loopback information.
Line Number	The line number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none).
Customer Info
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.1.38.4  DS3 Tab

The DS3 tab (see Table C-143) allows you to view and update XTC DS3 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-143 Field Descriptions for the DS3 Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 3).
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the port. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. Values are: •0 - 225 (default) •226 - 450
State	Displays the status of the line. Values are: •IS—In Service •IS_AINS—In Service-Auto In Service Soak •OOS—Out of Service •OOS_MT—Out of Service-Maintenance
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The duration of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the port is set in service by the software. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
AINS Soak Count Down	Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the card becomes IS automatically. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number (1 to 3)
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number (1 to 3)
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
Alarm Behavior
Displays alarm profile information.
Loopback
Displays XTC loopback information.
Line Number	The line number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none).
Customer Info
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.1.38.5  STS-1 Path Tab

The STS-1 tab (see Table C-144) allows you to view and update XTC STS-1 path information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-144 Field Descriptions for the STS-1 Path Tab 

Field	Description
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end STS-1 path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end STS-1 path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.1.38.6  VT1.5 Path Tab

The VT1.5 Path tab (see Table C-145) allows you to view and update XTC VT1.5 path information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-145 Field Descriptions for the VT1.5 Path Tab 

Field	Description
Threshold 15 Minutes STS Term
Displays near- and far-end STS-1 terminal threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Threshold 1 Day STS Term
Displays near- and far-end STS-1 terminal threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Threshold 15 Minutes VT Term
Displays near- and far-end VT1.5 terminal information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The virtual terminal number
CV-V	Coding violations-VT path
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT path
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT path
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT path
Threshold 1 Day VT Term
Displays near- and far-end VT1.5 terminal information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The virtual terminal number
CV-V	Coding violations-VT path
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT path
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT path
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT path
Customer Info
This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The virtual terminal number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number.
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number.

C.1.38.7  Alarm Extenders Tab

The Alarm Extenders tab allows you view XTC alarm information. The Alarm Extenders tab contains two subtabs:

•External Alarms Subtab

•External Controls Subtab

C.1.38.7.1  External Alarms Subtab

The External Alarms subtab (see Table C-146) allows you to view and update external alarm information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-146 Field Descriptions for the External Alarms Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Number	The alarm input number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the alarm input number.
Alarm Type	Choose an alarm type from the provided list.
Severity	Choose a severity from the list.
Raised When	Choose the contact condition that will trigger the alarm in CTC.
Virtual Wire	To assign the external device to a virtual wire, choose a virtual wire from the list, or choose None if no assignment is required.
Description	A default description is provided in this line for every external alarm that is enabled.
Raised	Indicates if an alarm has been raised.
Contact Status	Indicates the current status of the contact.

C.1.38.7.2  External Controls Subtab

The External Controls subtab (see Table C-147) allows you to view and update external controls. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-147 Field Descriptions for the External Controls Subtab 

Field	Description
Control Number	The control number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the control number.
Control Type	Choose a control type from the provided list.
Trigger Type	Choose a trigger type: a local minor, major, or critical alarm; a remote minor, major, or critical alarm; or a virtual wire activation.
Description	Enter a description.
Current State	The current state of the control.
Auto State	The auto state of the control.
Contact Setting	The current contact setting.

C.1.38.8  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-148) allows you to view and update XTC protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-148 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.1.38.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-149) allows you to view and update J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-149 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2  DWDM Cards

This section describes the following DWDM cards supported within CTM:

•Slot Properties—2.5G_DM Card

•Slot Properties—2.5G_DMP Card

•Slot Properties—2.5G Multirate Transponder Cards

•Slot Properties—32DMX

•Slot Properties—32DMX_O

•Slot Properties—32MUX_O

•Slot Properties—32WD-IR Module

•Slot Properties—32WSS

•Slot Properties—4MD-xx.x

•Slot Properties—AD-1B-xx.x

•Slot Properties—AD-1C-xx.x

•Slot Properties—AD-2C-xx.x

•Slot Properties—AD-4B-xx.x

•Slot Properties—AD-4C-xx.x

•Slot Properties—ADA Card

•Slot Properties—BBA Card

•Slot Properties—BBA/RBA Card

•Slot Properties—BCS-ELH Module

•Slot Properties—BCS-LH Module

•Slot Properties—Demultiplexer Modules

•Slot Properties—IRBA Card

•Slot Properties—Multiplexer Unit

•Slot Properties—MXP_2.5G_10E Card

•Slot Properties—MXP_2.5G_10G Muxponder Card

•Slot Properties—OA-ELH Modules

•Slot Properties—OAD-8-C Module

•Slot Properties—OADM-P4 Card

•Slot Properties—OBA-C Module

•Slot Properties—OECP Modules

•Slot Properties—OEP-C Module

•Slot Properties—OP-ELH Modules

•Slot Properties—OPA-C Modules

•Slot Properties—OPT-BST

•Slot Properties—OPT-BST-E

•Slot Properties—OPT-PRE

•Slot Properties—ORP-ELH Modules

•Slot Properties—OSC-CSM

•Slot Properties—OSCM

•Slot Properties—PRE-L

•Slot Properties—PRE-L-IR Card

•Slot Properties—TPA Card

•Slot Properties—TXP_MR_10E Card

•Slot Properties—TXP_MR_10G Card

•Slot Properties—WD Card

C.2.1  Slot Properties—2.5G_DM Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 2.5G-DM card is capable of translating client input GE, FICON, 1G & 2G Fiber Channel, and IBM GDPS optical signal into an optical signal with an optical frequency on the 100-GHz spacing frequency grid according to ITU-T G.692. The datamux cards are GR-253 and G.957 compliant. This card supports 8 client interfaces utilizing SFP technology. 32 ITU wavelengths are supported. Each card supports tunability over 4 wavelengths. This card is supported in both the 15454 SONET and 15454 SDH platforms.

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-5.

Figure C-5 Cisco ONS 15454 2.5G-DM Module

For the 2.5G-DM module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, PPM, Line, Loopback, Auto Laser Shutdown, Optical Thresh, Alarm Behavior, Protection, GFP, and Info.

---

Note The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

---

C.2.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the 2.5G_DM that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-150) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DM identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-150 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

C.2.1.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-151) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-151 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Wavelength	Identifies the wavelengths associated with the DWDM side optical transmitter. You can set the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength or to further wavelengths in 100 GHz ITU spacing.

C.2.1.4  PPM Tab

The PPM tab (see Table C-152) allows you to view and provision the PPM and the ports inside the PPM. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-152 Field Descriptions for the PPM Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable Port Modules (PPM)
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Number of Ports	Displays the number of ports.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
PPM
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.

C.2.1.4.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision PPM and to create the ports inside these entities. See Provision Pluggable Dialog Box for more information.

C.2.1.5  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to configure line information. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, the tab contains the following subtabs:

•Section Trace Subtab

•SONET Subtab

•Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Client Subtab

•RMON Thresholds Subtab

•Distance Extension Subtab

•Enhanced FC/FICON ISL Subtab

---

Note If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, see the SDH Line section. The following information is the same if the payload is SDH in an ONS 15454 SONET NE.

---

C.2.1.5.1  Section Trace Subtab

The Section Trace subtab (see Table C-153) allows you to change the section trace settings for the 2.5G-DM card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-153 Field Descriptions for the Section Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off/None or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Allows you to disable the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Select a transmit length for the trace.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.

C.2.1.5.2  SONET Subtab

The SONET subtab (see Table C-154) allows you to view and change the SONET line settings for the 2.5G-DM module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-154 Field Descriptions for the SONET Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Type	Defines the port.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
SendDoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.

C.2.1.5.3  Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Section Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-155) allows you to view and change 15-minute near-end section thresholds for the 2.5G_DM module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-155 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays Coding violations - section
ES-S	Displays Errored seconds - section
SES-S	Displays Severely errored seconds - section
SEFS-S	Displays Severely errored framing seconds - section

C.2.1.5.4  Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Section Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-156) allows you to view and change 1-day near-end regenerator section thresholds for the 2.5G_DM module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-156 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays Coding violations - section
ES-S	Displays Errored seconds - section
SES-S	Displays Severely errored seconds - section
SEFS-S	Displays Severely errored framing seconds - section

C.2.1.5.5  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-157) allows you to view and change 15-minute near- and far-end line thresholds for the 2.5G_DM module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-157 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-L	Coding violations - line
ES-L	Errored seconds - line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line
FC-L	Failure count - line
Far End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-L	Coding violations - line
ES-L	Errored seconds - line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line
FC-L	Failure count - line

C.2.1.5.6  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-158) allows you to view and change 1-day near- and far-end line thresholds for the 2.5G_DM module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-158 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-L	Coding violations - line
ES-L	Errored seconds - line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line
FC-L	Failure count - line
Far End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-L	Coding violations - line
ES-L	Errored seconds - line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line
FC-L	Failure count - line

C.2.1.5.7  Client Subtab

The Client subtab (see Table C-159) allows you to provision PPM parameters for the 2.5G_DM card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-159 Field Descriptions for the Client Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Data Rate	Displays the supported rate of the client signal.

C.2.1.5.8  RMON Thresholds Subtab

The RMON Thresholds tab (see Table C-160) allows you to view RMON thresholds for the 2.5G_DM module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-160 Field Descriptions for the RMON Thresholds Subtab 

Field	Description
Show all RMON Thresholds	If checked, shows all RMON thresholds.
Index Number	Displays the optical port number.
Slot	Displays the slot.
Port	Displays the port.
Variable	Displays the Ethernet threshold variable. The variable depends on the card type.
Alarm Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold alarm type. Values are Rising, Falling, or Rising and Falling.
Sample Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample type. Values are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of any time period.
Sample Period (sec)	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample period, in seconds.
Rising Thresh	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the rising threshold and the entry generates an event.
Falling Thresh	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the falling threshold and the entry generates an event.

C.2.1.5.9  Distance Extension Subtab

The Distance Extension subtab (see Table C-161) allows you to enable the buffer-to-buffer extension between the client and the 2.5G_DM card in order to increase the DWDM distance without affecting the throughput.

Table C-161 Field Descriptions for the Distance Extension Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the port number. •Client interface: 1 to 8 •Trunk: 9
Enable Distance Extension	Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for 1 GFC and up to 800 km for 2 GFC.
Auto Detect Credits	Allows automatic detection of buffer credits for flow control.
Credits Available	(Read-only) Displays the number of credits available.
Autoadjust GFP Buffer Threshold	Allows the threshold of the GFP buffer between two 2.5G_DM cards. This is automatically adjusted.
GFP Buffers Available	Displays the number of GFP buffers available between two 2.5G_DM cards.

C.2.1.5.10  Enhanced FC/FICON ISL Subtab

The Enhanced FC/FICON ISL subtab (see Table C-162) allows you to enable FPGA to drop duplicate frames. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-162 Field Descriptions for the Enhanced FC/FICON ISL Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Maximum Frame Size	Allows you to select the maximum frame size supported by the FICON/FC. Valid range is from 2148 to 2172.

C.2.1.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-163) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DM loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-163 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Displays the name of the port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.2.1.7  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-164) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-164 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.2.1.8  Optical Thresh Tab

The Optical Thresh tab allows you to view and provision optical threshold settings. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•TCA 15 Min Subtab

•TCA 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.1.8.1  TCA 15 Min Subtab

The TCA 15 Min subtab (see Table C-165) allows you to set the thresholds for the 15-minute thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-165 Field Descriptions for the TCA 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.1.8.2  TCA 1 Day Subtab

The TCA 1 Day subtab (see Table C-166) allows you to set the thresholds for the 1-day thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-166 Field Descriptions for the TCA 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.1.8.3  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-167) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-167 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.1.9  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-168) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DM alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-168 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.1.10  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-169) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DM protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-169 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.

C.2.1.11  GFP Tab

The GFP tab allows you to configure line information. The tab contains the RMON Thresholds subtab.

C.2.1.11.1  RMON Thresholds Subtab

The RMON Thresholds subtab (see Table C-170) allows you to view, create, and delete RMON threshold settings for the 2.5G_DM card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-170 Field Descriptions for the RMON Thresholds Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Displays the optical port number.
Slot	Displays the slot.
Port	Displays the port.
Variable	Displays the Ethernet threshold variable. The variable depends on the card type.
Alarm Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold alarm type. Values are Rising, Falling, or Rising and Falling.
Sample Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample type. Values are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of any time period.
Sample Period (sec)	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample period, in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the rising threshold and the entry generates an event.
Falling Threshold	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the falling threshold and the entry generates an event.
Create	Click the Create button to create an RMON threshold.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.2.1.12  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-171) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the 2.5G_DM card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-171 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.2  Slot Properties—2.5G_DMP Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 2.5G-DMP card is capable of translating client input GE, FICON, 1G, 2G Fiber Channel, and IBM GDPS optical signal into an optical signal with an optical frequency on the 100 GHz spacing frequency grid according to ITU-T G.692. The datamux cards are GR-253 and G.957 compliant. This card supports eight client interfaces utilizing SFP technology and protection on the trunk side. 32 ITU wavelengths are supported. Each card supports tunability over four wavelengths. This card is supported in both the ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH platforms.

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-6.

Figure C-6 Cisco ONS 15454 2.5G-DMP Module

For the 2.5G_DMP module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, PPM, Line, Loopback, Auto Laser Shutdown, Optical Thresh, Alarm Behavior, Protection, GFP, and Info.

---

Note Tabs shown depend on whether the NE is a SONET or an SDH node.

---

C.2.2.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the 2.5G_DMP that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-172) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DMP identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-172 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

C.2.2.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-173) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-173 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Wavelength	Identifies the wavelengths associated with the DWDM side optical transmitter. You can set the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength or to further wavelengths in 100 GHz ITU spacing.

C.2.2.4  PPM Tab

The PPM tab (see Table C-174) allows you to view and provision the PPM and the ports inside the PPM. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-174 Field Descriptions for the PPM Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable Port Modules (PPM)
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot. Values are single mode or multimode.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a plugin module ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the plugin module.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this plugin module and its port(s).
PPM
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the plugin type that the port is provisioned for.

C.2.2.4.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision PPM and to create the ports inside these entities. See Provision Pluggable Dialog Box for more information.

C.2.2.5  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to configure line information. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, the tab contains the following subtabs:

•Section Trace Subtab

•SONET Subtab

•Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Client Subtab

•RMON Thresholds Subtab

•Distance Extension Subtab

•Enhanced FC/FICON ISL Subtab

---

Note If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, see the SDH Line section. The following information is the same if the payload is SDH in an ONS 15454 SONET NE.

---

C.2.2.5.1  Section Trace Subtab

The Section Trace subtab (see Table C-175) allows you to change the section trace settings for the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-175 Field Descriptions for the Section Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off/None or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Allows you to disable the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Select a transmit length for the trace.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.

C.2.2.5.2  SONET Subtab

The SONET subtab (see Table C-176) allows you to view and change the SONET line settings for the 2.5G-DMP module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-176 Field Descriptions for the SONET Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).

C.2.2.5.3  Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Section Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-177) allows you to view and change the 15-minute near-end section thresholds of the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-177 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays Coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays Errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays Severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays Severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.2.2.5.4  Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Section Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-178) allows you to view and change the 1-day near-end section thresholds of the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-178 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.2.2.5.5  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-179) allows you to view and change the 15-minute near- and far-end line thresholds of the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-179 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Failure count-line.
Far End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Failure count-line.

C.2.2.5.6  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-180) allows you to view and change the 1-day near- and far-end line thresholds of the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-180 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Failure count-line.
Far End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Failure count-line.

C.2.2.5.7  Client Subtab

The Client subtab (see Table C-181) allows you to provision PPM parameters for the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-181 Field Descriptions for the Client Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Data Rate	Displays the selected supported rate of the client signal.

C.2.2.5.8  RMON Thresholds Subtab

The RMON Thresholds subtab (see Table C-182) allows you to view, create, and delete RMON threshold settings for the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-182 Field Descriptions for the RMON Thresholds Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Displays the optical port number.
Slot	Displays the slot.
Port	Displays the port.
Variable	Displays the Ethernet threshold variable. The variable depends on the card type.
Alarm Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold alarm type. Values are Rising, Falling, or Rising and Falling.
Sample Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample type. Values are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of any time period.
Sample Period (sec)	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample period, in seconds.
Rising Thresholds	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the rising threshold and the entry generates an event.
Falling Thresholds	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the falling threshold and the entry generates an event.
Create	Click the Create button to create an RMON threshold.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.2.2.5.9  Distance Extension Subtab

The Distance Extension subtab (see Table C-183) allows you to enable the buffer-to-buffer extension between the client and the 2.5G_DMP card in order to increase the DWDM distance without affecting the throughput.

Table C-183 Field Descriptions for the Distance Extension Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the port number. •Client Interface: 1 to 8 •Trunk: 9 to 10
Enable Distance Extension	Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for 1 GFC and up to 800 km for 2 GFC.
Auto Detect Credits	Allows automatic detection of buffer credits for flow control.
Credits Available	(Read-only) Displays the number of credits available.
Autoadjust GFP Buffer Threshold	Allows the threshold of the GFP buffer between two 2.5G_DMP cards. This is automatically adjusted.
GFP Buffers Available	Displays the number of GFP buffers available between two 2.5G_DMP cards.

C.2.2.5.10  Enhanced FC/FICON ISL Subtab

The Enhanced FC/RCON ISL subtab (see Table C-184) allows you to enable the FCGA to drop duplicate frames. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-184 Field Descriptions for the Enhanced FC/FICON ISL Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Maximum Frame Size	Allows you to select the maximum frame size supported by the FICON/FC. Valid range is from 2148 to 2172.

C.2.2.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-185) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DMP loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-185 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Displays the name of the port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.2.2.7  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-186) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-186 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.2.2.8  Optical Thresh Tab

The Optical Thresh tab allows you to view and provision optical threshold settings. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•TCA 15 Min Subtab

•TCA 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.2.8.1  TCA 15 Min Subtab

The TCA 15 Min subtab (see Table C-187) allows you to set the thresholds for the 15-minute thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-187 Field Descriptions for the TCA 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.2.8.2  TCA 1 Day Subtab

The TCA 1 Day subtab (see Table C-188) allows you to set the thresholds for the 1-day thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-188 Field Descriptions for the TCA 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.2.8.3  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-189) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-189 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.2.9  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-190) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DMP alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-190 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.2.10  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-191) allows you to view and update 2.5G_DMP protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-191 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.

C.2.2.11  GFP Tab

The GFP tab allows you to configure line information. The tab contains the RMON Thresholds subtab.

C.2.2.11.1  RMON Thresholds Subtab

The RMON Thresholds subtab (see Table C-192) allows you to view, create, and delete RMON threshold settings for the 2.5G_DMP card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-192 Field Descriptions for the RMON Thresholds Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Displays the optical port number.
Slot	Displays the slot.
Port	Displays the port.
Variable	Displays the Ethernet threshold variable. The variable depends on the card type.
Alarm Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold alarm type. Values are Rising, Falling, or Rising and Falling.
Sample Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample type. Values are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of any time period.
Sample Period (sec)	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample period, in seconds.
Rising Thresh	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the rising threshold and the entry generates an event.
Falling Thresh	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the falling threshold and the entry generates an event.
Create	Click the Create button to create an RMON threshold.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.2.2.12  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-193) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the 2.5G_DMP card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-193 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.3  Slot Properties—2.5G Multirate Transponder Cards

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder cards operate on the ITU grid and provide the ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH with enhanced economics in metro DWDM solutions. The multirate transponder cards provide a 2R/3R transponder functionality over a bit rate of 100 Mbps to 2.5Gbps. The cards also provide a single-mode fiber DWDM interface. Multirate transponder cards use pluggable small form factor client interfaces. The cards translate the client input optical signal into an optical signal with an optical frequency on the spacing frequency grid according to ITU-T G.692. The cards are GR-253 and G.957 compliant.

There are two versions of the multirate 2.5G transponder card:

•Multirate 2.5G transponder, nonfiber-protected (TXP_MR_2.5G_xx.x)

•Multirate 2.5G transponder, fiber-protected (TXPP_MR_2.5G_xx.x)

---

Note When using protection groups, only the working port can be provisioned.

---

The card faceplates are shown in Figure C-7 and Figure C-8.

Figure C-7 Cisco ONS 15454 TXP_MR_2.5G_xx.x Module

Figure C-8 Cisco ONS 15454 TXPP_MR_2.5G_xx.x Module

The Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, PPM, Card, OC-N, STM-N, 1G Ethernet/Fiber Channel, OTN, Loopback, Auto Laser Shutdown, Optical Thresh, Alarm Behavior, Protection, and Inventory. The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

C.2.3.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-194) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-194 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.3.3  PPM Tab

The PPM tab (see Table C-195) allows you to view and provision the PPM and the ports inside the PPM. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-195 Field Descriptions for the PPM Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable Port Modules (PPM)
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Number of Ports	Displays the number of ports used by the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the plugin type that the port is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the plugin part number.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the plugin serial number that is unique to each plugin.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the plugin actual equipment type.
Firmware Version	Displays the plugin firmware version.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a plugin module ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the plugin module does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	Displays the status of the plugin module. The plugin module can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Service State	Displays the service state of the plugin module. There are four states: •Unknown—The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed—The plugin module is not installed. •Out of Service—The plugin module is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service—The plugin module is commissioned and carrying traffic.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the plugin module.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this plugin module and its port(s).
PPM
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the plugin type that the port is provisioned for.

C.2.3.3.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision PPM and to create the ports inside these entities. See Provision Pluggable Dialog Box for more information.

C.2.3.4  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-196) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-196 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Termination Mode	Allows you to set the mode of termination. For SONET nodes, the termination mode can be Transparent, multiplexer section (MS), or regeneration section (RS). For SDH nodes, the termination mode can be Line or Section.
Wavelength	Identifies the four wavelengths associated with the DWDM side optical transmitter. You can set the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength or to further wavelengths in 100 GHz ITU spacing.
Regeneration Peer Slot	Allows you to select like cards so that you can configure a regeneration peer group.
Regeneration Group Name	(Optional) Allows you to set the name of the regeneration group.

C.2.3.5  OC-N Tab

The OC-N tab (see Table C-197) allows you to configure OC-N information. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, the tab contains the following subtabs and fields. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, see the STM-N section.

---

Note The following information is the same if the payload is STM-N in an ONS 15454 SONET NE.

---

Table C-197 Field Descriptions for the OC-N Tab 

Field	Description
Section Trace
Port No.	The port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Disables the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Allows you to select a transmit length for the trace. Values are 1 byte or 16 bytes; the default is 16 bytes.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
Line Config
Port No.	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state. The range is 15 minutes to 48 hours.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test). ALS is a laser safety feature defined by ITU G.664. ALS can be provisioned on client and trunk ports for SONET and SDH payload types only.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Section Thresh 15 Min - Near End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-S	Coding violations - section.
ES-S	Errored seconds - section.
SES-S	Severely errored seconds - section.
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds - section.
Section Thresh 1 Day - Near End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-S	Coding violations - section.
ES-S	Errored seconds - section.
SES-S	Severely errored seconds - section.
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds - section.
Line Thresh 15 Min - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds - line.
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line.
CV-L	Coding violations - line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line.
FC-L	Failure count - line.
Line Thresh 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds - line.
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line.
CV-L	Coding violations - line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line.
FC-L	Failure count - line.

C.2.3.6  STM-N Tab

The STM-N tab (see Table C-198) allows you to configure STM-N information. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, the tab contains the following subtabs and fields. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, see the OC-N section.

---

Note The following information is the same if the payload is OC-N in an ONS 15454 SDH NE.

---

Table C-198 Field Descriptions for the STM-N Tab 

Field	Description
Section Trace
Port No.	The port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Disables the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Allows you to select a transmit length for the trace. Values are 1 byte or 16 bytes; the default is 16 bytes.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
Line Config
Port No.	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state. The range is 15 minutes to 48 hours.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test). ALS is a laser safety feature defined by ITU G.664. ALS can be provisioned on client and trunk ports for SONET and SDH payload types only.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
RS Thresh 15 Min - Near End
Port No.	The port number.
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section.
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section.
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section.
BBE-RS	Background block errors - regenerator section.
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section.
RS Thresh 1 Day - Near End
Port No.	The port number.
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section.
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section.
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section.
BBE-RS	Background block errors - regenerator section.
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section.
MS Thresh 15 Min - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number.
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section.
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section.
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section.
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section.
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section.
MS Thresh 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number.
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section.
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section.
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section.
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section.
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section.

C.2.3.7  1G Ethernet/Fiber Channel Tab

The 1G Ethernet/Fiber Channel tab (see Table C-199) allow you to view and configure port settings. Each tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

---

Note Line threshold provisioning is not supported on the 2G fiber channel payload type.

---

Table C-199 Field Descriptions for the 1G Ethernet/Fiber Channel Tabs 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port No.	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
State	The status of the line. Values are in service (IS), out of service (OOS), and out of service - maintenance (OOS_MT).
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Line Thresh 15 Min, Near End (8B10B)
Port No.	The port number.
Valid Packets	A count of received packets that contain nonerrored data code groups that have start and end delimiters.
Invalid Packets	A count of received packets that contain errored data code groups that have start and end delimiters.
Code Group Violations	A count of received code groups that do not contain a start or end delimiter.
Idle Ordered Sets	A count of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
Non Idle Ordered Sets	A count of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
Data Code Groups	A count of received data code groups that do not contain ordered sets.
Line Thresh 1 Day, Near End (8B10B)
Port No.	The port number.
Valid Packets	A count of received packets that contain nonerrored data code groups that have start and end delimiters.
Invalid Packets	A count of received packets that contain errored data code groups that have start and end delimiters.
Code Group Violations	A count of received code groups that do not contain a start or end delimiter.
Idle Ordered Sets	A count of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
Non Idle Ordered Sets	A count of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
Data Code Groups	A count of received data code groups that do not contain ordered sets.

C.2.3.8  OTN Tab

The OTN tab (see Table C-200) allows you to change the line optical transport network (OTN) settings for multirate transponder cards. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

---

Note OTN is supported only for trunk ports.

---

Table C-200 Field Descriptions for the OTN Tab 

Field	Description
G.709 Thresh 15 Min
SM (OTUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end SM optical channel transport unit (OTUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-SM	Background block errors
ES-SM	Errored seconds
SES-SM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end PM optical channel data unit (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-PM	Background block errors
ES-PM	Errored seconds
SES-PM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Failure count
G.709 Thresh 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end SM (OTUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-SM	Background block errors
ES-SM	Errored seconds
SES-SM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end PM (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-PM	Background block errors
ES-PM	Errored seconds
SES-PM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Failure count
FEC Thresh 15 Minutes
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in 15-minute intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in 15-minute intervals.
FEC Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in one-day intervals.
Trail Trace Identifier
Port No.	The port number.
Level	Displays the trail trace identifier level (Section or Path).
Trace Mode	Allows you to set the trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable FDI on TTIM	Allows you to disable forward defect indication (FDI) for trail trace identifier mismatch alarms.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
OTN Line
Port No.	The port number.
G.709 OTN	Disables or enables the G.709 OTN feature.
FEC	Disables or enables forward error correction. Note OTN must be enabled before you can enable FEC.
SF BER	The signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	The signal degrade bit error rate.

C.2.3.9  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-201) allows you to view and update card loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-201 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.2.3.10  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-202) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-202 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.2.3.11  Optical Threshold Tab

The Optical Threshold tab (see Table C-203) allows you to view and update optical threshold information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-203 Field Descriptions for the Optical Threshold Tab 

Field	Description
Warning 15 Min
The Warning 15 Min subtab allows you to provision the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold Note Tx Power High is not supported on trunk ports.
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold Note Tx Power Low is not supported on trunk ports.
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold
Warning 1 Day
The Warning 1 Day subtab allows you to provision the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold Note Tx Power High is not supported on trunk ports.
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold Note Tx Power Low is not supported on trunk ports.
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold
Alarm Threshold
The Alarm Threshold tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold Note Tx Power High is not supported on trunk ports.
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold Note Tx Power Low is not supported on trunk ports.
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold

C.2.3.12  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-204) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-204 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.3.13  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-205) allows you to view and update card protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

---

Note When using protection groups, only the working port can be provisioned.

---

Table C-205 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups. Y-cable (TXP_MR_2.5G) and splitter (TXPP_MR_2.5G) protection groups are supported.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups, such as which port is the protected port and which port is the working port. Also allows you to execute switch commands.
Switch Commands	Allows you to perform a manual switch, perform a forced switch, or clear the existing command switching.
Inhibit Switching	Allows you to inhibit unlock switching, lock out switching, or lock on switching.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.4  Slot Properties—32DMX

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the 32 channel demultiplexer that is selected in the NE Explorer. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 32-Channel Demultiplexer card (32DMX) is a single-slot optical demultiplexer. The card receives an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to 32 100-GHz-spaced channels.

The 32DMX includes these high-level features:

•COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power monitoring.

•DROP ports (1-32): On its output, the 32DMX provides 32 drop ports that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. Each drop port has a photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot 32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop ports on the 32DMX do not have a VOA per channel for optical power regulation.

---

Note The 32DMX card works in conjunction with the 32WSS card to create a software-controlled network element with ROADM functionality.

---

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-9.

Figure C-9 Cisco ONS 15454 32-DMX Module

For the 32DMX module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Channel, Optical Line, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.4.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.4.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-206) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-206 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.4.3  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The Optical Channel tab contains four subtabs:

•Parameters Subtab

•Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.4.3.1  Parameters Subtab

The Parameters subtab (see Table C-207) provides information on the status and directions specified for the optical connectors. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-207 Field Descriptions for the Parameters Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	Displays the status of the channel. Values are: •IS—In Service; able to carry traffic. •OOS_DSBLD—Out of Service-Disabled. Unable to carry traffic. •IS_AINS—In Service-Auto In Service. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried. •OOS_MT—Out of Service-Maintenance. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed. •OOS_OOG—Out of Service-Out of Group. This state is used to place a member circuit out of the group and to stop sending traffic. OOS, OOG applies only to the cross-connects on the end node where the VCAT resides. For intermediate nodes, the cross-connects are OOS, MT.
Service State	Overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted •SWDL—Software download in progress •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change •AINS—Automatic In Service •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-1C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-1C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
AINS Soak (H:M)	(Read-only) Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
Power ADD	Displays the input power of the channel that is in ADD.
Path Value	Select if the path is in use (Active) or not (Stand By) for each channel in ADD.

C.2.4.3.2  Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Warning Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-208) allows you to set the thresholds for the 15-minute thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-208 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.4.3.3  Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Warning Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-209) allows you to set the thresholds for the 1-day thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-209 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.4.3.4  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-210) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-210 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power Add Fail Low	Displays the threshold of power low failure on the add channel port. The crossing of this threshold will generate an alarm of LOS-P.

C.2.4.4  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The Optical Line tab contains four subtabs:

•Parameters Subtab

•Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.4.4.1  Parameters Subtab

The Parameters subtab (see Table C-211) provides information on the status and directions specified for the optical connectors. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-211 Field Descriptions for the Parameters Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. Values are: •IS—In Service; able to carry traffic. •OOS_DSBLD—Out of Service-Disabled. Unable to carry traffic. •IS_AINS—In Service-Auto In Service. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried. •OOS_MT—Out of Service-Maintenance. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed. •OOS_OOG—Out of Service-Out of Group. This state is used to place a member circuit out of the group and to stop sending traffic. OOS, OOG applies only to the cross-connects on the end node where the VCAT resides. For intermediate nodes, the cross-connects are OOS, MT.
Service State	Overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted •SWDL—Software download in progress •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change •AINS—Automatic In Service •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-1C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-1C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
Power ADD	Displays the input power of the channel that is in ADD.
Path Value	Select if the path is in use (Active) or not (Stand By) for each channel in ADD.

C.2.4.4.2  Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Warning Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-212) allows you to set the thresholds for the 15-minute thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-212 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.4.4.3  Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Warning Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-213) allows you to set the thresholds for the 1-day thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-213 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.4.4.4  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-214) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-214 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power Add Fail Low	Displays the threshold of power low failure on the add channel port. The crossing of this threshold will generate an alarm of LOS-P.

C.2.4.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-215) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-215 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Attribute	Displays the object that can be inventoried.
Value	Displays the value of the object that is inventoried.
Units	Displays the Unit of Measure (when applicable) of the object that is inventoried.

C.2.4.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-216) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-216 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Pane	Field	Description
Card Profile	Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
	Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
—	Port Number	Displays the port number.
—	Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
—	Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.5  Slot Properties—32DMX_O

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX_O) card demultiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan.

The 32DMX_O features include:

•AWG that enables channel demultiplexing functions.

•Single-channel ports equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation after demultiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available.

---

Note In contrast, the single-slot 32DMX card does not have VOAs on each drop port for optical power regulation. The 32DMX optical demultiplexer module is used in conjunction with the 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch (32WSS) card in ONS 15454 Multiservice Transport Platform (MSTP) nodes.

---

•Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-10.

Figure C-10 Cisco ONS 15454 32DMX_O Module

For the 32DMX_O module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Channel, Optical Line, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.5.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.5.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-217) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-217 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In_Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.5.3  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab (see Table C-218) allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-218 Field Descriptions for the Optical Channel Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-1C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-1C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.5.4  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-219) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-219 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Status	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.

C.2.5.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-220) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-220 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.

C.2.5.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-221) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-221 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.6  Slot Properties—32MUX_O

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 32-Channel Multiplexer (32MUX_O) card is typically used in hub nodes and provides the multiplexing of 32 channels, spaced at 100 GHz, into one fiber before their amplification and transmission along the line.

The 32MUX_O features include:

•Arrayed waveguide grating (AWG) device that enables full multiplexing functions for the channels.

•Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation prior to multiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available.

•Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation.

•Additional optical monitoring port with 1/99 splitting ratio available.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-11.

Figure C-11 Cisco ONS 15454 32MUX_O Module

For the 32MUX_O module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Channel, Optical Line, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.6.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.6.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-222) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-222 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.6.3  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab (see Table C-223) allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-223 Field Descriptions for the Optical Channel Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-1C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-1C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.6.4  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-224) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-224 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Status	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.

C.2.6.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-225) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-225 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.

C.2.6.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-226) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-226 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.7  Slot Properties—32WD-IR Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module thresholds and alarm severities.

The 32-channel Wavelength Demultiplexer-Infrared band (32WD-IR) module demultiplexes 32 different optical infrared band channels from one optical input. The optical input power is monitored to detect failures. The 32WD-IR module is used in 2.5-Gbps and 10-Gbps ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 systems. It receives infrared-band input from the infrared-band booster amplifier (IRBA-10G module) and demultiplexes the signal into 32 channels at 100-GHz spacing.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-12.

Figure C-12 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 32-Channel Wavelength Demultiplexer

For 32WD-IR modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, and Input Power.

C.2.7.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the slot in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the Receiver Demultiplexer PM Table.

C.2.7.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-227) allows you to view and update wavelength demultiplexer module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-227 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the module.
State	Allows you to place the module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the module.

C.2.7.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-228) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the wavelength demultiplexer module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-228 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Operating Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current operating temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets and displays the Laser 1 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Low Medium	Sets and displays the Laser 1 low medium temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High Medium	Sets and displays the Laser 1 high medium temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets and displays the Laser 1 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.7.4  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-229) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the wavelength demultiplexer module lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-229 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength demultiplexer module input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Input Power 1 in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.8  Slot Properties—32WSS

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the 32 Channels Wavelength Selective Switch (32-WSS) module that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch (32WSS) card performs channel add/drop processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. It has six types of ports:

•ADD RX ports (1-32): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA.

•EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS module in the same network element.

•EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS module within the network element.

•COM TX port: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster card (for example, OPT_BST) for transmission outside of the network element.

•COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier and sends it to the optical splitter.

•DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to the 32DMX card where the channels are further processed and dropped.

---

Note The 32WSS works in conjunction with the 32DMX to implement ROADM functionality.

---

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-13.

Figure C-13 Cisco ONS 15454 32 WSS Module

For the 32-WSS module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Channel, Optical Line, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.8.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.8.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-230) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-230 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.8.3  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The Optical Channel tab contains four subtabs:

•Parameters Subtab

•Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.8.3.1  Parameters Subtab

The Parameters subtab (see Table C-231) provides information on the status and directions specified for the optical connectors. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-231 Field Descriptions for the Parameters Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. Values are: •IS—In Service; able to carry traffic. •OOS_DSBLD—Out of Service-Disabled. Unable to carry traffic. •IS_AINS—In Service-Auto In Service. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried. •OOS_MT—Out of Service-Maintenance. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed. •OOS_OOG—Out of Service-Out of Group. This state is used to place a member circuit out of the group and to stop sending traffic. OOS, OOG applies only to the cross-connects on the end node where the VCAT resides. For intermediate nodes, the cross-connects are OOS, MT.
Service State	Overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted •SWDL—Software download in progress •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change •AINS—Automatic In Service •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-1C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-1C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
AINS Soak (H:M)	(Read-only) Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
Power ADD	Displays the input power of the channel that is in ADD.
Path Value	Select if the path is in use (Active) or not (Stand By) for each channel in ADD.

C.2.8.3.2  Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Warning Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-232) allows you to set the thresholds for the 15-minute thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-232 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.8.3.3  Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Warning Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-233) allows you to set the thresholds for the 1-day thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-233 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.8.3.4  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-234) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-234 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power Add Fail Low	Displays the thresholds of power low failure on the add channel port. The crossing of this threshold will generate an alarm of LOS-P.

C.2.8.4  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The Optical Line tab contains four subtabs:

•Parameters Subtab

•Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.8.4.1  Parameters Subtab

The Parameters subtab (see Table C-235) provides information on the status and directions specified for the optical connectors. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-235 Field Descriptions for the Parameters Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. Values are: •IS—In Service; able to carry traffic. •OOS_DSBLD—Out of Service-Disabled. Unable to carry traffic. •IS_AINS—In Service-Auto In Service. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried. •OOS_MT—Out of Service-Maintenance. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed. •OOS_OOG—Out of Service-Out of Group. This state is used to place a member circuit out of the group and to stop sending traffic. OOS, OOG applies only to the cross-connects on the end node where the VCAT resides. For intermediate nodes, the cross-connects are OOS, MT.
Service State	Overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted •SWDL—Software download in progress •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change •AINS—Automatic In Service •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-1C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-1C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
Power ADD	Displays the input power of the channel that is in ADD.
Path Value	Select if the path is in use (Active) or not (Stand By) for each channel in ADD.

C.2.8.4.2  Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Warning Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-236) allows you to set the thresholds for the 15-minute thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-236 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.8.4.3  Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Warning Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-237) allows you to set the thresholds for the 1-day thresholds crossing alert generation. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-237 Field Descriptions for the Warning Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Low (dBm)	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High (dBm)	Allows you to set the high power settings.

C.2.8.4.4  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-238) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-238 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Optical Connector 1 through Optical Connector 4
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power Add Fail Low	Displays the thresholds of power low failure on the add channel port. The crossing of this threshold will generate an alarm of LOS-P.

C.2.8.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-239) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-239 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Attribute	Displays the object that can be inventoried.
Value	Displays the value of the object that is inventoried.
Units	Displays the Unit of Measure (when applicable) of the object that is inventoried.

C.2.8.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-240) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-240 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.9  Slot Properties—4MD-xx.x

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The four-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer (4MD_xx.x) module is a single-slot card that features interferential filters with Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) and photodiode for each input port. Each VOA is software controlled. The 4MD_xx.x card has ten LC-PC-II optical connectors.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-14.

Figure C-14 Cisco ONS 15454 4MD_xx.x Module

For the 4MD_xx.x module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Channel, Optical Band, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.9.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.9.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-241) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-241 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.9.3  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab (see Table C-242) allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-242 Field Descriptions for the Optical Channel Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold.

C.2.9.4  Optical Band Tab

The Optical Band tab (see Table C-243) allows you to view and update optical band threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-243 Field Descriptions for the Optical Band Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the identifier of the port (and specific channel information, Add, Drop, TX, or RX).
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold.
VOA Degrade High	The high VOA degrade threshold.
VOA Degrade Low	The low VOA degrade threshold.

C.2.9.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-244) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-244 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.

C.2.9.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-245) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-245 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.10  Slot Properties—AD-1B-xx.x

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The AD_1B_xx.x module is a single-slot, one-band OADM filter card that has interferential filters with Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) and photodiode for each output port. Each VOA is software controlled. The AD_1B_xx.x card features six LC-PC-II optical connectors.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-15.

Figure C-15 Cisco ONS 15454 AD_1B_xx.x Module

For the AD_1B_xx.x module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Band, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.10.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.10.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-246) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-246 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.10.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-247) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-247 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Status	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Sets the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Sets the low VOA settings.

C.2.10.4  Optical Band Tab

The Optical Band tab (see Table C-248) allows you to view and update optical band threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-248 Field Descriptions for the Optical Band Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Band	(Read-only) Shows the current optical band setting.
Expected Band	Allows you to set the expected band.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Allows you to set the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low VOA settings.

C.2.10.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-249) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-249 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.

C.2.10.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-250) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-250 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.11  Slot Properties—AD-1C-xx.x

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The AD_1C_xx.x module is a single-slot one-channel OADM filter card that has interferential filters with Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) and photodiode for each input port. Each VOA is software controlled per channel input power. The AD_1C_xx.x card features six LC-PC-II optical connectors.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-16.

Figure C-16 Cisco ONS 15454 AD_1C_xx.x Module

For the AD_1C_xx.x module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Channel, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.11.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.11.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-251) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-251 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.11.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-252) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-252 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Status	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Sets the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Sets the low VOA settings.

C.2.11.4  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab (see Table C-253) allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-253 Field Descriptions for the Optical Channel Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-1C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-1C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Allows you to set the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low VOA settings.

C.2.11.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-254) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-254 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.

C.2.11.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-255) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-255 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.12  Slot Properties—AD-2C-xx.x

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The AD_2C_xx.x module is a single-slot two-channel OADM filter card that has interferential filters with Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) and photodiode for each input port. Each VOA is software controlled per channel input power. The AD_2C_xx.x card features eight LC-PC-II optical connectors.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-17.

Figure C-17 Cisco ONS 15454 AD_2C_xx.x Module

For the AD_2C_xx.x module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Channel, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.12.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.12.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-256) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-256 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.12.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-257) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-257 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Status	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Sets the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Sets the low VOA settings.

C.2.12.4  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab (see Table C-258) allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-258 Field Descriptions for the Optical Channel Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-2C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-2C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Allows you to set the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low VOA settings.

C.2.12.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-259) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-259 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
IL04	The insertion loss between the specified ports.
IL06	The insertion loss between the specified ports.
IL05	The insertion loss between the specified ports.
IL02	The insertion loss between the specified ports.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.

C.2.12.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-260) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-260 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.13  Slot Properties—AD-4B-xx.x

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The AD_4B_xx.x module is a single-slot, four-band OADM filter card that has interferential filters with Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) and photodiode for each output port. Each VOA is software controlled. The AD_4B_xx.x card features twelve LC-PC-II optical connectors.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-18.

Figure C-18 Cisco ONS 15454 AD_4B_xx.x Module

For the AD_4B_xx.x module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Band, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.13.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.13.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-261) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-261 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.13.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-262) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-262 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Status	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Sets the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Sets the low VOA settings.

C.2.13.4  Optical Band Tab

The Optical Band tab (see Table C-263) allows you to view and update optical band threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-263 Field Descriptions for the Optical Band Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Band	(Read-only) Shows the current optical band setting.
Expected Band	Allows you to set the expected band.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Allows you to set the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low VOA settings.

C.2.13.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-264) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-264 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.

C.2.13.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-265) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-265 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.14  Slot Properties—AD-4C-xx.x

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The AD-4C-xx.x module is a single-slot four-channel OADM filter card that has interferential filters with Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) and photodiode for each input port. Each VOA is software controlled per channel input power. The AD_4C_xx.x card features twelve LC-PC-II optical connectors.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-19.

Figure C-19 Cisco ONS 15454 AD_4C_xx.x Module

For the AD_4C_xx.x module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Channel, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.14.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.14.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-266) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-266 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.14.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-267) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-267 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Status	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Sets the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Sets the low VOA settings.

C.2.14.4  Optical Channel Tab

The Optical Channel tab (see Table C-268) allows you to view and update optical channel threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-268 Field Descriptions for the Optical Channel Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state. Note You can only change the state from OOS to OOS_MT or vice versa. All other state transitions are controlled by the NE's software.
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
VOA Mode	(Read-only) Shows the current functional mode of the VOA: constant gain mode, constant power mode, or not in use (N/A).
VOA Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the value of the optical output power going to a VOA when constant power mode is active. Automatic Node Setup (ANS) is the only function that can modify this value.
VOA Attenuation Calib.	Allows you to modify the attenuation value of the VOA, if necessary, when the VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
VOA Power Calib.	Allows you to modify the optical output power to the VOA, if necessary.
VOA Attenuation Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode. ANS and APC are the only functions that can modify this value.
Actual Wavelength	(Read-only) Shows the wavelength specified by the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set manually.
Expected Wavelength	Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. This field is used to preprovision cards. For example, you can specify a generic AD-4C in Slot 15 and set the expected wavelength to 1552.52. The result is AD-4C-52.5. If the actual equipment installed does not match the preprovisioned slot, a Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) occurs.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Alarm Threshold
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure settings.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power settings.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power settings.
VOA Degrade High	Allows you to set the high VOA settings.
VOA Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low VOA settings.

C.2.14.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-269) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-269 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
HW Version	The hardware version number.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.

C.2.14.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-270) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-270 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.15  Slot Properties—ADA Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module thresholds and alarm severities.

ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Add/Drop Amplifier (ADA) modules are used with optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) modules in OADM sites to amplify inserted channels to the level of the line channels.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-20.

Figure C-20 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Add/Drop Amplifier

For ADA modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.2.15.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the Add/Drop Amplifier that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the slot in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the ADA PM Table.

C.2.15.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-271) allows you to view and update Add/Drop Amplifier identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-271 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the Add/Drop Amplifier is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the Add/Drop Amplifier is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the Add/Drop Amplifier is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the Add/Drop Amplifier.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the Add/Drop Amplifier.
State	Allows you to place the Add/Drop Amplifier in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the Add/Drop Amplifier.

C.2.15.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-272) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the Add/Drop Amplifier laser. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-272 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets and displays the Laser 1 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets and displays the Laser 1 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2.
Low	Sets and displays the Laser 2 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets and displays the Laser 2 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.15.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-273) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the Add/Drop Amplifier laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-273 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.15.5  Power Tab

The Power Tab (see Table C-274) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the Add/Drop Amplifier laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-274 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Laser 1 power (in milliwatts [mW]) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 2.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.15.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-275) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the Add/Drop Amplifier lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-275 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Add/Drop Amplifier input power.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Input Power 1 in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Input Power 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Add/Drop Amplifier input power.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Input Power 2 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Input Power 2 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.15.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-276) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the Add/Drop Amplifier output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-276 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current add/drop Output Power 1.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Add/Drop Amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Add/Drop Amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Output Power 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Add/Drop Amplifier Output Power 2.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Add/Drop Amplifier Output Power 2 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Add/Drop Amplifier Output Power 2 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.15.8  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-277) allows you to override the ONS 15800 or the ONS 15801 optical safety protection.

Table C-277 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Protection 1	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifiers to turn on pump laser 1 for a fixed period of time.
Optical Safety Protection 2	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifiers to turn on pump laser 2 for a fixed period of time.
Control Output Power 1	Forces the amplifier to regulate the Optical Output Power 1 value according to the optical output power setpoint.
Control Output Power 2	Forces the amplifier to regulate the Optical Output Power 2 value according to the optical output power setpoint.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.16  Slot Properties—BBA Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module alarm thresholds and severities.

ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 Blue-band Booster Amplifier (BBA) modules amplify the blue-band booster signal and compensate for budget loss at terminal and regeneration sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-21.

Figure C-21 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Blue-Band Booster Amplifier

For BBA modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.2.16.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the BBA module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the BBA PM Table.

C.2.16.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-278) allows you to view and update BBA module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-278 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the BBA module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the BBA module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the BBA module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the BBA module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the BBA module.
State	Allows you to place the BBA module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the BBA module.

C.2.16.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-279) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the BBA laser. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-279 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of the laser.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.16.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-280) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the BBA laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-280 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the laser current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.16.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-281) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the BBA laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-281 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of the laser.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.16.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-282) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the BBA module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-282 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current BBA input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.16.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-283) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the BBA output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-283 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current BBA output power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the BBA output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the BBA output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the BBA output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.16.8  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-284) allows you to override the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-284 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class of a laser on a booster or transmit power amplifier. The classes of power are low, medium, and high. Warning Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking in an ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 NE. A live laser signal is present in the module and in the fiber output ports and optical connectors. The laser is activated when you apply a power class. Do not look directly at the output beams. Caution You should maintain a consistent power class for all amplifiers on the system. Every time you replace an amplifier, you must configure power class before activating the line.
Optical Safety Protection	The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 automatically reduces the laser power to a safe level whenever the data signal is lost. Clicking Execute activates the laser for 5 to 10 seconds, even if an input signal is not present. The override is generally used during system setup or troubleshooting to test the amplifier output.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.17  Slot Properties—BBA/RBA Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Booster amplifiers are used in the receive direction of terminal and regeneration sites to boost the power level of a band-specific signal.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-22.

Figure C-22 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Booster Amplifier

ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 booster amplifier modules shown on this sheet include:

•Blue-band Booster Amplifier-10 Gbps module (BBA-10G)

•Red-band Booster Amplifier-10 Gbps module (RBA-10G)

•Red-band Booster Amplifier-10 Gbps-ETSI module (RBA-10G-E)

---

Note Only the ONS 15801 can manage the RBA-10G-E module. The ONS 15800 does not manage the RBA-10G-E module.

---

For these amplifier modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.2.17.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the amplifier that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the RBA PM Table.

C.2.17.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-285) allows you to view and update amplifier identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-285 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the amplifier is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the amplifier is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the amplifier is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the amplifier.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the amplifier.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the amplifier.
State	Allows you to place the amplifier in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the amplifier.

C.2.17.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-286) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the amplifier laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-286 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the Laser 1 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the Laser 1 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2.
Low	Sets the Laser 2 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the Laser 2 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.17.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-287) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the amplifier laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-287 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the Laser 1 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the Laser 1 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2.
Low	Sets the Laser 2 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the Laser 2 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.17.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-288) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the amplifier Laser 1 and Laser 2 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-288 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 2.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.17.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-289) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the amplifier lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-289 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current amplifier input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.17.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-290) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the amplifier output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-290 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current amplifier Laser 1 output power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the amplifier output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the amplifier output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the amplifier output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.17.8  Action Tab

The Action Tab (see Table C-291) allows you to override the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following actions.

Table C-291 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class of a laser on a booster or transmitter amplifier. The classes of power are low, medium, or high. Warning Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking in an ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 NE. A live laser signal is present in the module and in the fiber output ports and optical connectors. The laser is activated when you apply a power class. Do not look directly at the output beams. Caution You should maintain a consistent power class for all amplifiers on the system. Every time you replace an amplifier, you must configure power class before activating the line.
Optical Safety Protection	The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 automatically reduces the laser power to a safe level whenever the data signal is lost. Clicking Execute activates the laser for 5 to 10 seconds, even if an input signal is not present. The override is generally used during system setup or troubleshooting to test the amplifier output.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.18  Slot Properties—BCS-ELH Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Band Combiner and Splitter Extended Long Haul (BCS-ELH) module combines and separates C-band (long haul configuration), L-band (ELH configuration), and OSC signals. The module also interfaces with the Raman pump and ELH amplifier. The BCS-ELH module allows for a smooth, nontraffic-affecting upgrade to extended long haul implementation.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-23.

Figure C-23 Cisco ONS 15808 Band Combiner and Splitter Extended Long Haul Module

For ONS 15808 BCS-ELH modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Insertion Loss, Input Power, and External Pump Power.

C.2.18.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the BCS-ELH module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the BCS-ELH PM Table.

C.2.18.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-292) allows you to view and update BCS-ELH module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-292 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the BCS-ELH module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the BCS-ELH module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the BCS-ELH module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the BCS-ELH module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the BCS-ELH module.
State	Allows you to place the BCS-ELH module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the BCS-ELH module.

C.2.18.3  Insertion Loss Tab

The Insertion Loss tab (see Table C-293) allows you to view insertion loss data for the BCS-ELH module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-293 Field Descriptions for the Insertion Loss Tab 

Field	Description
External Pump Insertion Loss
External Pump 1	When the Update button is clicked, displays the insertion loss (in dB) for the external pump 1. Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.
External Pump 2	When the Update button is clicked, displays the insertion loss (in dB) for the external pump 2.
Receive Insertion Loss
OSC	When the Update button is clicked, displays the receive insertion loss (in dB) for the OSC.
C Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the receive insertion loss (in dB) for the C band.
L Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the receive insertion loss (in dB) for the L band.
Transmit Insertion Loss
OSC	When the Update button is clicked, displays the transmit insertion loss (in dB) for the OSC.
C Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the transmit insertion loss (in dB) for the C band.
L Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the transmit insertion loss (in dB) for the L band.

C.2.18.4  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-294) allows you to monitor the power coming into the BCS-ELH lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-294 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current BCS-ELH input power (in dBm).

C.2.18.5  External Pump Power Tab

The External Pump Power tab (see Table C-295) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the BCS-ELH module external pump. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-295 Field Descriptions for the External Pump Power Tab 

Field	Description
External Pump 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of the external pump 1 (in mW).
High	Sets the high threshold for the external pump 1, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the external pump 1, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the external pump 1, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
External Pump 2 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of the external pump 2 (in mW).
High	Sets the high threshold for the external pump 2, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the external pump 2, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the external pump 2, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Total External Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the total external pump power (in mW).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.19  Slot Properties—BCS-LH Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Band Combiner and Splitter Long Haul (BCS-LH) module combines and splits the S-band, C-band, L-band signals and bidirectional OSC signals. It contains two independent sections: the band combiner and the band splitter. In the band combiner section, the BCS-LH module combines the S-band, C-band, L-band, and OSC signals and sends them into the common port. A tap port is implemented in this section to monitor the total signal transmitted. In the band splitter section, the BCS-LH module divides incoming signals and sends them to the corresponding optical ports.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-24.

Figure C-24 Cisco ONS 15808 Band Combiner and Splitter Long Haul Module

For ONS 15808 BCS-LH modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Insertion Loss.

C.2.19.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the BCS-LH module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table or in the Alarm Browser.

C.2.19.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-296) allows you to view and update BCS-LH module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-296 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the BCS-LH module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the BCS-LH module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the BCS-LH module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the BCS-LH module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the BCS-LH module.
State	Allows you to place the BCS-LH module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.

C.2.19.3  Insertion Loss Tab

The Insertion Loss tab (see Table C-297) allows you to view insertion loss data for the BCS-LH module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-297 Field Descriptions for the Insertion Loss Tab 

Field	Description
Receive Insertion Loss
OSC	When the Update button is clicked, displays the receive insertion loss (in dB) for the OSC. Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.
S Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the receive insertion loss (in dB) for the S band.
C Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the receive insertion loss (in dB) for the C band.
L Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the receive insertion loss (in dB) for the L band.
Transmit Insertion Loss
OSC	When the Update button is clicked, displays the transmit insertion loss (in dB) for the OSC.
S Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the transmit insertion loss (in dB) for the S band.
C Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the transmit insertion loss (in dB) for the C band.
L Band	When the Update button is clicked, displays the transmit insertion loss (in dB) for the L band.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.20  Slot Properties—Demultiplexer Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Demultiplexer modules demultiplex the 40 odd- and even-numbered C-band channels at 100 GHz spacing. On the receive side, the 40MD-CO-D module demultiplexes the odd-numbered C-band channels; the 40MD-CE-D module demultiplexes the even-numbered C-band channels.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-25.

Figure C-25 Cisco ONS 15808 Demultiplexer

Demultiplexers shown on this sheet include:

•40-channel Demultiplexer unit-C band-Odd channels (40MD-CO-D)

•40-channel Demultiplexer unit-C band-Even channels (40MD-CE-D)

•20-channel Demultiplexer unit-L band-Odd channels (20MD-LO-D)

•20-channel Demultiplexer unit-L band-Even channels (20MD-LE-D)

•8-channel Mux/Demux unit-C band-OADM Application (8MD-C)

For ONS 15808 demultiplexers, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, and Input Power.

C.2.20.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the demultiplexer that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the Demultiplexer PM Table.

C.2.20.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-298) allows you to view and update demultiplexer identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-298 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the demultiplexer is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the demultiplexer is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the demultiplexer is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the demultiplexer.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the demultiplexer.
State	Allows you to place the demultiplexer in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the demultiplexer.

C.2.20.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-299) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the demultiplexer operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-299 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Operating Temperature 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current operating temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Fail Low	Sets the operating temperature fail low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade Low	Sets the operating temperature degrade low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade High	Sets the operating temperature degrade high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Fail High	Sets the operating temperature fail high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Maximum Insertion Loss 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the maximum insertion loss for Laser 1. Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.

C.2.20.4  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-300) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the demultiplexer lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-300 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current demultiplexer input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.21  Slot Properties—IRBA Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module thresholds and alarm severities.

The infrared-band booster amplifier modules are EDFA booster amplifiers that are used in terminal (receive section) and optical line amplification sites in the ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 systems. Infrared-band amplifier modules shown on this sheet include:

•Infrared-band Booster Amplifier (IRBA)

•Infrared-band Booster Amplifier-10 Gbps (IRBA-10G)

•Transmit Power Amplifier-Infrared Band (TPA-IR)

The IRBA is the second amplification stage in the receive section of the infrared band and is positioned directly after the PRE-L-IR amplifier. The IRBA-10G is used in terminal and regeneration sites (both OC-48 and OC-192 bit rates); the IRBA is used in OLA sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-26.

Figure C-26 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Infrared-Band Booster Amplifier

For infrared-band booster amplifier modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, External Pump Power, and Action.

C.2.21.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the amplifier that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the slot in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the IRBA PM Table.

C.2.21.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-301) allows you to view and update amplifier identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-301 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the amplifier is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the amplifier is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the amplifier is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the amplifier.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the amplifier.
State	Allows you to place the amplifier in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the amplifier.

I

C.2.21.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature Tab (see Table C-302) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the amplifier laser. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-302 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets and displays the Laser 1 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets and displays the Laser 1 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2.
Low	Sets and displays the Laser 2 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets and displays the Laser 2 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.21.4  Current Tab

The Current Tab (see Table C-303) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the amplifier laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-303 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.21.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-304) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the amplifier laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-304 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 2.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 2 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.21.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-305) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the amplifier lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-305 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current amplifier input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Input Power 1 in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.21.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-306) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the amplifier output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-306 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current amplifier Output Power 1.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm), and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm), and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm), and the alarm severity level.

C.2.21.8  External Pump Power Tab

The External Pump Power tab (see Table C-307) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the amplifier external pump. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-307 Field Descriptions for the External Pump Power Tab 

Field	Description
Extra Pump 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current external pump power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the external pump power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the external pump power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the external pump power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Extra Pump Activation
Value	Indicates whether the extra pump is currently ON or OFF.

C.2.21.9  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-308) allows you to override the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following actions:

Table C-308 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifiers to turn on the pump lasers for a fixed period of time. When an amplifier, such as a booster, controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class level of the amplifier. The amplifier directly controls the output power. You can select between two ranges (low or high), or you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel signal-to-noise ratio in the fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers in the system.
Output Power Offset	The output power offset is set during installation and represents the offset of the output power.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.22  Slot Properties—Multiplexer Unit

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Multiplexer modules multiplex the 40 odd- and even-numbered C-band channels at 100-GHz spacing. On the transmit side, the 40MD-CO-M module multiplexes the odd-numbered C-band channels; the 40MD-CE-M module multiplexes the even-numbered C-band channels.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-27.

Figure C-27 Cisco ONS 15808 Multiplexer

Multiplexers shown on this sheet include:

•40-channel Multiplexer unit-C band-Odd channels (40MD-CO-M)

•40-channel Multiplexer unit-C band-Even channels (40MD-CE-M)

•20-channel Multiplexer unit-L band-Odd channels (20MD-LO-M)

•20-channel Multiplexer unit-L band-Even channels (20MD-LE-M)

For ONS 15808 multiplexers, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Temperature.

C.2.22.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the multiplexer that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the Multiplexer PM Table.

C.2.22.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-309) allows you to view and update multiplexer identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-309 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the multiplexer is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the multiplexer is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the multiplexer is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the multiplexer.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the multiplexer.
State	Allows you to place the multiplexer in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the multiplexer.

C.2.22.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-310) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the multiplexer operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-310 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Operating Temperature 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current operating temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Fail Low	Sets the operating temperature fail low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade Low	Sets the operating temperature degrade low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade High	Sets the operating temperature degrade high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Fail High	Sets the operating temperature fail high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Maximum Insertion Loss 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the maximum insertion loss for Laser 1. Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.23  Slot Properties—MXP_2.5G_10E Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 2.5-Gbps-10-Gbps Muxponder-100-GHz-Tunable xx.xx-xx.xx (MXP_2.5G_10E) card is a DWDM muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports full optical transparency on the client side. The card multiplexes four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E provides wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5-Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently.

The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up general communication channels (GCC) for data communications, enable forward error correction, or facilitate performance monitoring.

The MXP_2.5G_10E works with Optical Transparent Network (OTN) devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports Optical Data Channel Unit 1 (ODU1) to Optical Channel Transport Unit (OTU2) multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope.

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-28.

Figure C-28 Cisco ONS 15454 MXP-2.5G-10E Module

For the MXP-2.5G-10E module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, PPM, Line, OTN, Loopback, Auto Laser Shutdown, Optical Thresh, Alarm Behavior, Protection, and Info.

---

Note The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

---

C.2.23.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the MXP_2.5G_10E that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.23.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-311) allows you to view and update MXP_2.5G_10E identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-311 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

C.2.23.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-312) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-312 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Termination Mode	Allows you to set the mode of termination.
AIS/Squelch Configuration	Allows you to configure the remote client to squelch or send an AIS signal.
Wavelength	Identifies the wavelengths associated with the DWDM side optical transmitter. You can set the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength or to further wavelengths in 100 GHz ITU spacing.

C.2.23.4  PPM Tab

The PPM tab (see Table C-313) allows you to view and provision the PPM and the ports inside the PPM. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-313 Field Descriptions for the PPM Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable Port Modules
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Actual Equipment Type	The actual card that is installed in the slot.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
PPM
Port	The PPM number and port number
Rate	Displays the port rate.

C.2.23.4.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision PPM and to create the ports inside these entities. See Provision Pluggable Dialog Box for more information.

C.2.23.5  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to configure line settings. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, the tab contains the subtabs and fields in Table C-314. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, the tab contains the subtabs and fields in Table C-315.

---

Note The following information is the same if the payload is SDH in an ONS 15454 SONET NE.

---

Table C-314 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab (SONET) 

Field	Description
Section Trace
Port No.	The port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Disables the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Allows you to select a transmit length for the trace. Values are 1 byte or 16 bytes; the default is 16 bytes.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
SONET Line
Port No.	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state. The range is 15 minutes to 48 hours.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test). ALS is a laser safety feature defined by ITU G.664. ALS can be provisioned on client and trunk ports for SONET and SDH payload types only.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	The port type (SONET or SDH).
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Section Thresh 15 Min - Near End
Port No.	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Thresh 1 Day - Near End
Port No.	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Line Thresh 15 Min - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations -line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Thresh 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Trunk
Port No.	The port number
Port Name	The port name.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).

Table C-315 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab (SDH) 

Field	Description
Trunk
Port No.	The port number
Port Name	The port name.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).

C.2.23.6  OTN Tab

The OTN tab allows you to change the line optical transport network (OTN) settings for MXP_2.5G_10E cards. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•OTN Line Subtab

•G.709 Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•G.709 Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•FEC Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•FEC Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Trail Trace Identifier Subtab

C.2.23.6.1  OTN Line Subtab

The OTN Line subtab (see Table C-316) allows you to view and change the OTN line settings of the MXP-2.5G-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-316 Field Descriptions for the OTN Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
G.709 OTN	Disables or enables the G.709 OTN feature.
FEC	Disables or enables forward error correction. Note OTN must be enabled before you can enable FEC.
Asynch/Synch Mapping	The card can perform multiplexing per ITU-T G.709. The ODUk (client SONET/SDH payload) can be mapped to the Optical Channel (OTUk) either asynchronously (asynch mapping) or synchronously (synch mapping) with this setting.
SF BER	Displays the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Displays the signal degrade bit error rate.

C.2.23.6.2  G.709 Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The G.709 Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-317) displays near- and far-end SM optical channel transport unit (OTUK), and near- and far-end PM optical channel data unit (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes.

Table C-317 Field Descriptions for the G.709 Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
SM (OTUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
SM (OTUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count

C.2.23.6.3  G.709 Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The G.709 Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-318) displays near- and far-end SM optical channel transport unit (OTUK), and near- and far-end PM optical channel data unit (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours.

Table C-318 Field Descriptions for the G.709 Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
SM (OTUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
SM (OTUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count

C.2.23.6.4  FEC Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The FEC Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-319) allows you to view and change the 15-minute FEC threshold information of the MXP-2.5G-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-319 Field Descriptions for the FEC Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays port number information.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in 15-minute intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in 15-minute intervals.

C.2.23.6.5  FEC Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The FEC Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-320) allows you to view and change the 15-minute FEC threshold information of the MXP-2.5G-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-320 Field Descriptions for the FEC Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays port number information.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in 15-minute intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in 15-minute intervals.

C.2.23.6.6  Trail Trace Identifier Subtab

The Trail Trace Identifier subtab (see Table C-321) allows you to provision the trail trace identifier for the MXP-2.5G-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-321 Field Descriptions for the Trail Trace Identifier Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays port number information.
Level	Displays the trail trace identifier level (Section or Path).
Trace Mode	Allows you to set the trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable FDI on TTIM	Allows you to disable forward defect indication (FDI) for trail trace identifier mismatch (TTIM) alarms.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.

C.2.23.7  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-322) allows you to view and update MXP-2.5G-10E loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-322 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Displays the name of the port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.2.23.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-323) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-323 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.2.23.9  Optical Thresh Tab

The Optical Thresh tab allows you to view and provision optical threshold settings. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•TCA 15 Min Subtab

•TCA 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.23.9.1  TCA 15 Min Subtab

The TCA 15 Min subtab (see Table C-324) allows you to view and change the 15-minute TCA settings of the MXP-2.5G-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-324 Field Descriptions for the TCA 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.23.9.2  TCA 1 Day Subtab

The TCA 1 Day subtab (see Table C-325) allows you to view and change the 1-day TCA settings of the MXP-2.5-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-325 Field Descriptions for the TCA 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.23.9.3  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-326) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-326 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.23.10  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-327) allows you to view and update MXP_2.5G_10E alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-327 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.23.11  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-328) allows you to view and update MXP_2.5G_10E protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-328 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.

C.2.23.12  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-329) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the MXP_2.5G_10E card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-329 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.24  Slot Properties—MXP_2.5G_10G Muxponder Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The MXP_2.5G_10G muxponder card provides one intermediate or short range, ITU-T G.707-, ITU-T G.957-, ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper compliant, DWDM MXP_2.5G_10G port. The client port supports 2.5 Gbps and trunk 10 Gbps. The MXP_2.5G_10G has four client ports and one trunk port.

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-29.

Figure C-29 Cisco ONS 15454 MXP_2.5G_10G

For the MXP_2.5G_10G module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, PPM, Line, OTN, Loopback, Auto Laser Shutdown, Optical Thresh, Alarm Behavior, Protection, Inventory, and Info. The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

C.2.24.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the MXP_2.5G_10G that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.24.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-330) allows you to view and update MXP_2.5G_10G identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-330 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.24.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-331) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-331 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Termination Mode	Allows you to set the mode of termination.
Wavelength	Identifies the wavelengths associated with the DWDM side optical transmitter. You can set the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength or to further wavelengths in 100 GHz ITU spacing.

C.2.24.4  PPM Tab

The PPM tab (see Table C-332) allows you to view and provision the PPM and the ports inside the PPM. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-332 Field Descriptions for the PPM Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable Port Modules
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Actual Equipment Type	The actual card that is installed in the slot.
Admin State	Displays the administration state. The state can either be Unlocked or Locked, Maintenance.
Service State	Displays the service state. It can be: •Locked-Disabled •Locked-Enabled •Unlocked-Disabled •Unlocked-Enabled
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
PPM
Port	The PPM number and port number
Rate	Displays the port rate.

C.2.24.4.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision PPM and to create the ports inside these entities. See Provision Pluggable Dialog Box for more information.

C.2.24.5  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to configure line settings. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, the tab contains the subtabs and fields in Table C-333. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, the tab contains the subtabs and fields in Table C-334.

---

Note The following information is the same if the payload is SDH in an ONS 15454 SONET NE.

---

Table C-333 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab (SONET) 

Field	Description
Section Trace
Port No.	The port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Disables the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Allows you to select a transmit length for the trace. Values are 1 byte or 16 bytes; the default is 16 bytes.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
SONET Line
Port No.	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state. The range is 15 minutes to 48 hours.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test). ALS is a laser safety feature defined by ITU G.664. ALS can be provisioned on client and trunk ports for SONET and SDH payload types only.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	The port type (SONET or SDH).
Section Thresh 15 Min - Near End
Port No.	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Thresh 1 Day - Near End
Port No.	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Line Thresh 15 Min - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations -line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Thresh 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line

Table C-334 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab (SDH) 

Field	Description
Section Trace
Port Number	The port number.
Trace Mode	Set the trace mode (Off/None or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Allows you to disable the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Select a transmit length for the trace.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
SDH Line
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
Admin State	Displays the administration state. The state can either be Unlocked or Locked, Maintenance.
Service State	Displays the service state. It can be: •Locked-Disabled •Locked-Enabled •Unlocked-Disabled •Unlocked-Enabled
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	The port type (SONET or SDH).
RS Thresh 15 Minutes - Near End
Displays near-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors - regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section
RS Thresh 1 Day - Near End
Displays near-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors - regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section
MS Thresh 15 Minutes - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section
MS Thresh 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section

C.2.24.6  OTN Tab

The OTN tab (see Table C-335) allows you to change the line optical transport network (OTN) settings for MXP_2.5G_10G cards. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-335 Field Descriptions for the OTN Tab 

Field	Description
OTN Line
Port No.	The port number.
G.709 OTN	Disables or enables the G.709 OTN feature.
FEC	Disables or enables forward error correction. Note OTN must be enabled before you can enable FEC.
SF BER	The signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	The signal degrade bit error rate.
G.709 Thresh 15 Min
SM (OTUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end SM optical channel transport unit (OTUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-SM	Background block errors
ES-SM	Errored seconds
SES-SM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end PM optical channel data unit (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-PM	Background block errors
ES-PM	Errored seconds
SES-PM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Failure count
G.709 Thresh 1 Day
SM (OTUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end SM (OTUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-SM	Background block errors
ES-SM	Errored seconds
SES-SM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end PM (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-PM	Background block errors
ES-PM	Errored seconds
SES-PM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Failure count
FEC Thresh 15 Minutes
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in 15-minute intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in 15-minute intervals.
FEC Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in one-day intervals.
Trail Trace Identifier
Port No.	The port number.
Level	Displays the trail trace identifier level (Section or Path).
Trace Mode	Allows you to set the trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable FDI on TTIM	Allows you to disable forward defect indication (FDI) for trail trace identifier mismatch alarms.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.

C.2.24.7  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-336) allows you to view and update MXP_2.5G_10G loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-336 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Displays the name of the port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none).

C.2.24.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-337) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-337 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.2.24.9  Optical Thresh Tab

The Optical Thresh tab (see Table C-338) allows you to view and provision optical threshold settings. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-338 Field Descriptions for the Optical Thresh Tab

Field	Description
TCA 15 Min
The TCA 15 Min subtab allows you to provision the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold Note Tx Power High is not supported on trunk ports.
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold Note Tx Power Low is not supported on trunk ports.
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold
TCA 1 Day
The TCA 1 Day subtab allows you to provision the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold Note Tx Power High is not supported on trunk ports.
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold Note Tx Power Low is not supported on trunk ports.
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold
Alarm Thresh
The Alarm Thresh tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold Note Tx Power High is not supported on trunk ports.
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold Note Tx Power Low is not supported on trunk ports.
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold

C.2.24.10  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-339) allows you to view and update MXP_2.5G_10G alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-339 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.24.11  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-340) allows you to view and update MXP_2.5G_10G protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-340 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.

C.2.24.12  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-341) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following read-only fields.

Table C-341 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	The port number.
Equipment Type	The equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	The actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part No.	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
HW Revision	The hardware version number of the card.
Serial No.	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	The CLEI code.
Vendor ID/Vendor Name	The ID or name of the vendor.

C.2.24.13  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-342) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the MXP_2.5G_10G module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-342 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.25  Slot Properties—OA-ELH Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Optical Amplifier-Extended Long Haul (OA-ELH) modules are EDFA amplifiers that operate in the L band to support extended long haul (ELH) applications. OA-ELH modules perform preamplification and boosting functions on the complete L-band signals. OA-ELH modules are used in transmit and receive directions for all site types supported by the ONS 15808 (terminal sites, OLA sites, OADM sites, and regeneration sites).

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-30.

Figure C-30 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Amplifier Extended Long Haul

OA-ELH modules shown on this sheet include:

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-Line (OA-ELH--L)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-Transmit (OA-ELH--TX)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-Receive Common (OA-ELH--RC)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-Receive Odd (OA-ELH--RO)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-Receive Even (OA-ELH--RE)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-OADM Receive (OA-ELH--OR)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-OADM Transmit (OA-ELH--OT)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-OADM Add Transmit (OA-ELH--OA)

•Optical Amplifier-ELH Application-L band-OADM Drop Receive (OA-ELH--OD)

For ONS 15808 OA-ELH modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Variable Optical Attenuation, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, External Pump Power, and Action.

C.2.25.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OA-ELH module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OA-ELH PM Table.

C.2.25.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-343) allows you to view and update OA-ELH module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-343 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OA-ELH module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OA-ELH module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OA-ELH module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OA-ELH module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OA-ELH module.
State	Allows you to place the OA-ELH module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OA-ELH module.

C.2.25.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-344) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OA-ELH module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-344 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Fiber Temperature 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Fiber 1 (in degrees Celsius).

C.2.25.4  Variable Optical Attenuation Tab

The Variable Optical Attenuation (VOA) tab (see Table C-345) allows you to view and assign the VOA offset. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-345 Field Descriptions for the Variable Optical Attenuation Tab 

Field	Description
Variable Optical Attenuation 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the VOA value (in dB). The VOA offset is the value required to move the zero attenuation of VOA from the factory-set value to the value required for actual operation in the network.
Low	Sets the VOA low threshold, in dB, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the VOA high threshold, in dB, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.25.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-346) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OA-ELH module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-346 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.25.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-347) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OA-ELH module laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-347 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 (in mW).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 2 (in mW).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 2 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.25.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-348) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the OA-ELH module lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-348 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Laser 1 input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Laser 1 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Input Power 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Laser 2 input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Laser 2 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 2 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.25.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-349) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OA-ELH module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-349 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Laser 1 output power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Output Power 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Laser 2 output power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 2 output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.25.9  External Pump Power Tab

The External Pump Power tab (see Table C-350) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OA-ELH module external pump. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-350 Field Descriptions for the External Pump Power Tab 

Field	Description
External Pump 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of the external pump 1 (in mW).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the external pump 1, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the external pump 1, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the external pump 1, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
External Pump 2 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of the external pump 2 (in mW).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the external pump 2, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the external pump 2, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the external pump 2, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.25.10  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-351) allows you to override the ONS 15808 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-351 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. The optical safety override is used on the line to recover from an automatic shutdown. This command forces the amplifier to turn on the pump lasers for a fixed period of time. When the amplifier controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Power Class 1	Allows you to change the power class level of the first stage amplifier. The amplifier directly controls the output power. You can select between two ranges (low or high); or, you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel S/N in fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers in the system.
Power Class 2	Allows you to change the power class level of the second stage amplifier.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.26  Slot Properties—OAD-8-C Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Add/Drop Unit-Passive 4-Channel-C band (OAD-8-C) module is a two-slot unit used at optical add/drop multiplexing sites on the ONS 15808 system.The module adds and drops up to eight C-band channels at 100 GHz spacing from the 50 GHz grid on the system. The complete add/drop function is achieved by using two OAD modules to accommodate traffic in the two transmission directions.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-31.

Figure C-31 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

For ONS 15808 OAD-8-C modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Insertion Loss, and Power.

C.2.26.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OAD-8-C module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OADM PM Table.

C.2.26.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-352) allows you to view and update OAD-8-C module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-352 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OAD-8-C module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OAD-8-C module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OAD-8-C module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OAD-8-C module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OAD-8-C module.
State	Allows you to place the OAD-8-C module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OAD-8-C module.

C.2.26.3  Insertion Loss Tab

The Insertion Loss tab (see Table C-353) allows you to view insertion loss data for the OAD-8-C module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-353 Field Descriptions for the Insertion Loss Tab Field 

Field	Description
Add Exp Channels Insertion Loss 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current total optical power loss (in dB) caused by the insertion of the add express channels. Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.
Drop Exp Channels Insertion Loss 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current total optical power loss (in dB) caused by the insertion of the drop express channels.
Add Channels Insertion Loss 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current total optical power loss (in dB) caused by the insertion of the add channels.
Drop Channels Insertion Loss 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current total optical power loss (in dB) caused by the insertion of the drop channels.

C.2.26.4  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-354) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OAD-8-C module laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-354 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power Express Channels 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power at the input of the express channel (in dBm). Express channels do not go through the add or drop process.
High	Sets the high threshold for the express channel input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the express channel input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the express channel input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Input Power Add Channels 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power at the input of the add channel (in dBm). Added channels enter from the IN (ADD) port.
High	Sets the high threshold for the add channel input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the add channel input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the add channel input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.27  Slot Properties—OADM-P4 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer-Passive-4 channels (OADM-P4) modules are used at OADM sites operating at 2.5 Gbps with 100-GHz spacing to add and drop a fixed number of channels.

OADM-P4 modules shown on this sheet include:

•Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer-Passive-4 channels (01, 03, 05, 07) module (OADM-P4-B1)

•Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer-Passive-4 channels (02, 04, 06, 08) module (OADM-P4-B2)

•Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer-Passive-4 channels (09, 11, 13, 15) module (OADM-P4-R1)

•Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer-Passive-4 channels (17, 19, 21, 23) module (OADM-P4-R3)

For ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 OADM-P4 modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Temperature.

C.2.27.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OADM-P4 module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OADM PM Table.

C.2.27.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-355) allows you to view and update OADM-P4 module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-355 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OADM-P4 module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the OADM-P4 module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OADM-P4 module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OADM-P4 module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OADM-P4 module.
State	Allows you to place the OADM-P4 module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the OADM-P4 module.

C.2.27.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-356) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OADM-P4 module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-356 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Operating Temperature 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current operating temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Operating Temperature 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the operating temperature of Laser 2.
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.28  Slot Properties—OBA-C Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Booster Amplifier (OBA-C) module is an active, EDFA power amplifier designed to boost the power level of the C-band signals received from the OPA-C module in terminal, OLA, and OADM sites. The OBA-C module can operate correctly with or without the Optical External Pump (OEP-C) module, depending on the configuration and channel count. The OBA-C module is used for both transmitted and received signals in the ONS 15808 system.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-32.

Figure C-32 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Booster Amplifier

OBA-C modules shown on this sheet include:

•Optical Booster Amplifier-C band-Line (OBA-C--L)

•Optical Booster Amplifier-C band-Receiver Odd (OBA-C--RXO)

•Optical Booster Amplifier-C band-Receiver Even (OBA-C--RXE)

•Optical Booster Amplifier-C band-OADM Line (OBA-C--ADL)

•Optical Booster Amplifier-C band-OADM Add Transmitter (OBA-C--ATX)

•Optical Booster Amplifier-C band-OADM Drop Receiver (OBA-C--DRX)

For ONS 15808 OBA-C modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Variable Optical Attenuation, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, External Pump Power, and Action.

C.2.28.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OBA-C module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OBA PM Table.

C.2.28.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-357) allows you to view and update OBA-C identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-357 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OBA-C module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OBA-C module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OBA-C module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OBA-C module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OBA-C module.
State	Allows you to place the OBA-C module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OBA-C module.

C.2.28.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-358) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OBA-C module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-358 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Fiber 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Fiber 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.28.4  Variable Optical Attenuation Tab

The Variable Optical Attenuation (VOA) tab (see Table C-359) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the VOA. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-359 Field Descriptions for the Variable Optical Attenuation Tab 

Field	Description
Variable Optical Attenuation 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the VOA value (in dB). The VOA offset is the value required to move the zero attenuation of VOA from the factory-set value to the value required for actual operation in the network.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the VOA, in dB, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the VOA, in dB, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.28.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-360) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OBA-C module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-360 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.28.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-361) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OBA-C module laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-361 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 (in mW).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 2 (in mW).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 2 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.28.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-362) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the OBA-C module lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-362 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OBA-C module input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.28.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-363) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OBA-C module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-363 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OBA-C module output power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.28.9  External Pump Power Tab

The External Pump Power tab (see Table C-364) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OBA-C module external pump power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-364 Field Descriptions for the External Pump Power Tab 

Field	Description
Extra Pump 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OBA-C module external pump power (in mW).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the external pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the external pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the external pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.28.10  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-365) allows you to override the ONS 15808 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-365 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifiers to turn on the pump lasers for a fixed period of time. When the amplifier, such as a booster, controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class level of the amplifier. The amplifier directly controls the output power. You can select between two ranges (low or high); or, you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel S/N in fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers in the system.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.29  Slot Properties—OECP Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Odd/Even Channel Processor-C band-Active (OECP-C) and Odd/Even Channel Processor-C band-Passive (OECP-C-P) modules are bidirectional multiplexer/demultiplexers. On the transmit side, the OECP-C--P module multiplexes the 40 odd-numbered channel signal and the 40 even-numbered channel signal into a composite 80-channel signal. The channels in the 40-channel signal are spaced at 100 GHz. The channels in the 80-channel composite signal are spaced at 50 GHz. On the receive side, the OECP-C module demultiplexes the composite 80-channel signal into two separate 40-channel OECP-C modules shown on this sheet include:

•Odd/Even Channel Processor-C band-Active (OECP-C)

•Odd/Even Channel Processor-C band-Passive (OECP-C--P)

For ONS 15808 OECP-C modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Temperature.

C.2.29.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OECP-C module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OECP PM Table.

C.2.29.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-366) allows you to view and update OECP-C module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-366 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OECP-C module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OECP-C module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OECP-C module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OECP-C module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OECP-C module.
State	Allows you to place the OECP-C module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OECP-C module.

C.2.29.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-367) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OECP-C module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

---

Note Some points of measure are absent on certain configurations.

---

Table C-367 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Operating Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current operating temperature (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Low Medium	Sets the operating temperature low medium threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High Medium	Sets the operating temperature high medium threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.30  Slot Properties—OEP-C Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Extra Pump Amplifier (OEP-C) module is an active optical extra pump designed to boost the number of channels amplified by the OBA-C module at all transmitting and line sites. The OEP-C module is connected directly to the extra pump (EP) input port of the OBA-C module on transmitting, OADM, and line sites to provide extra pump power to amplify the full-load 80-channel C-band signal.

---

Note The OEP-C module is required when the system is carrying more than 40 channels.

---

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-33.

Figure C-33 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Extra Pump Amplifier

OEP-C modules shown on this sheet include:

•Optical Extra Pump-C band-Line (OEP-C-L)

•Optical Extra Pump-C band-Receiver Odd (OEP-C-RXO)

•Optical Extra Pump-C band-Receiver Even (OEP-C-RXE)

•Optical Extra Pump-C band-OADM (OEP-C-ADL)

For ONS 15808 OEP-C modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Pump Power, Current, and Action.

C.2.30.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OEP-C module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OEP PM Table.

C.2.30.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-368) allows you to view and update OEP-C module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-368 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OEP-C module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OEP-C module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OEP-C module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OEP-C module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OEP-C module.
State	Allows you to place the OEP-C module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OEP-C module.

C.2.30.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-369) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OEP-C module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-369 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.30.4  Pump Power Tab

The Pump Power tab (see Table C-370) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the pump power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-370 Field Descriptions for the Pump Power Tab 

Field	Description
Pump Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the pump power (in mW).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Extra Pump Activation
Value	Indicates whether the extra pump activation is turned ON or OFF.

C.2.30.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-371) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OEP-C module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-371 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.30.6  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-372) allows you to override the ONS 15808 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-372 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifiers to turn on the pump lasers for a fixed period of time. When the amplifier controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class level of the amplifier. The amplifier directly controls the output power. You can select between two ranges (low or high); or, you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel S/N in fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers in the system.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.31  Slot Properties—OP-ELH Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Optical External Pump-Extended Long Haul (OP-ELH) modules are used to boost the pump power of Optical Amplifier-Extended Long Haul (OA-ELH) modules. Each OA-ELH requires the use of an OP-ELH module. OP-ELH modules are made of two optical pump lasers, each pumping one of the two sections of the OA-ELH units.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-34.

Figure C-34 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical External Pump Extended Long Haul Amplifier

OP-ELH modules shown on this sheet include:

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-Line (OP-ELH--L)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-Transmit (OP-ELH--TX)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-Receive Common (OP-ELH--RC)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-Receive Odd (OP-ELH--RO)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-Receive Even (OP-ELH--RE)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-OADM Receive (OP-ELH--OR)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-OADM Transmit (OP-ELH--OT)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-OADM Add Transmit (OP-ELH--OA)

•Optical External Pump-ELH Application-L band-OADM Drop Receive (OP-ELH--OD)

For ONS 15808 OP-ELH modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Pump Power, Current, and Action.

C.2.31.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OP-ELH module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OP-ELH PM Table.

C.2.31.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-373) allows you to view and update OP-ELH module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-373 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OP-ELH module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OP-ELH module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OP-ELH module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OP-ELH module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OP-ELH module.
State	Allows you to place the OP-ELH module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OP-ELH module.

C.2.31.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-374) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OP-ELH module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-374 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.31.4  Pump Power Tab

The Pump Power tab (see Table C-375) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the pump power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-375 Field Descriptions for the Pump Power Tab 

Field	Description
Pump Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the pump 1 power (in mW).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Pump Power 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the pump 2 power (in mW)
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the pump power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Extra Pump Activation
Value	Indicates whether the extra pump activation is turned ON or OFF.

C.2.31.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-376) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OP-ELH module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-376 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.31.6  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-377) allows you to override the ONS 15808 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-377 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override 1	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. The optical safety override is used on the line to recover from an automatic shutdown. This command forces the amplifier to turn on the pump 1 lasers for a fixed period of time. When the amplifier controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Optical Safety Override 2	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifier to switch on the pump 2 lasers for a fixed period of time.
Power Class 1	Allows you to change the power class level of the first amplifier. The amplifier directly controls the output power. You can select between two ranges (low or high); or, you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel S/N in fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers in the system.
Power Class 2	Allows you to change the power class level of the second amplifier.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.32  Slot Properties—OPA-C Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15808 Optical Pre-Amplifier (OPA-C) module is an active, single-stage EDFA power amplifier designed to preamplify all wavelengths in the C-band (80 channels at 50 GHz spacing). (See Figure C-35.) The OPA-C module is used at all ONS 15808 sites for both transmitted and received signals in the ONS 15808 system. On the receiving side, the OPA-C module amplifies the power of the 80-channel C-band signal before it is split into two 40-channel signals. On the transmitting side, the OPA-C module pre-amplifies the 80-channel C-band signal before it is amplified and combined for transmitting.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-35.

Figure C-35 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Preamplifier

OPA modules shown on this sheet include:

•Optical Preamplifier-C band-Line Receiver (OPA-C--LRX)

•Optical Preamplifier-C band-Line Transmitter (OPA-C--LTX)

•Optical Preamplifier-C band-OADM Line Receiver (OPA-C--ADL)

•Optical Preamplifier-C band-OADM Add Transmitter (OPA-C--ATX)

•Optical Preamplifier-C band-OADM Drop Receiver (OPA-C--DRX)

For ONS 15808 OPA-C modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Variable Optical Attenuation, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.2.32.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OPA-C module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OPA PM Table.

C.2.32.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-378) allows you to view and update OPA-C module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-378 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OPA-C module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OPA-C module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OPA-C module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OPA-C module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OPA-C module.
State	Allows you to place the OPA-C module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OPA-C module.

C.2.32.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-379) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OPA-C module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-379 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Fiber 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Fiber 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.32.4  Variable Optical Attenuation Tab

The Variable Optical Attenuation (VOA) tab (see Table C-380) allows you to view the VOA offset. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-380 Field Descriptions for the Variable Optical Attenuation Tab 

Field	Description
Variable Optical Attenuation Offset 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the VOA value (in dB). The VOA offset is the value required to move the zero attenuation of VOA from the factory-set value to the value required for actual operation in the network.

C.2.32.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-381) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OPA-C module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-381 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.32.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-382) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OPA-C module laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-382 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 (in mW).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.32.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-383) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the OPA-C module lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-383 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OPA-C module input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.32.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-384) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the OPA-C module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-384 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current OPA-C module output power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.32.9  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-385) allows you to override the ONS 15808 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-385 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifiers to turn on the pump lasers for a fixed period of time. When the amplifier, such as a booster, controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class level of the amplifier. The amplifier directly controls the output power. You can select between two ranges (low or high); or, you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel S/N in fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers in the system.
Output Power Offset	The Output Power offset is set during installation and represents the offset of the output power.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.33  Slot Properties—OPT-BST

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Booster Amplifier (OPT-BST) module is a single-slot card that has eight LC-PC-II optical connectors. The card features true variable gain, fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt), fast transient suppression, and configurable maximum output power. The OPT-BST card supports optical safety functionality by signal loss detection and alarm, fast power down control, and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-36.

Figure C-36 Cisco ONS 15454 OPT-BST Module

For the OPT-BST module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Amplified Line, Inventory, Alarm Behavior, and Auto Laser Shutdown.

C.2.33.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.33.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-386) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-386 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.33.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-387) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-387 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Thresh
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold. The range for each port is: •Port 1: -40 to 11 dBm •Port 2: -42 to 11 dBm •Port 3: N/A •Port 4: -43 to -2 dBm •Port 5: N/A
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low gain degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade High	Allows you to set the high gain degrade threshold.

C.2.33.4  Optical Amplified Line Tab

The Optical Amplified Line tab (see Table C-388) allows you to view and update optical amplified line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-388 Field Descriptions for the Optical Amplified Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the total optical power going to the amplifier.
Power Calib.	Allows you to manually set the total optical power going to the amplifiers.
Mode	(Read-only) Shows the working mode of the amplifier: control gain or control power.
Gain	(Read-only) The current gain of the amplifiers.
Gain Set Point	The value of the gain that the amplifier must achieve. The value is read-only or numeric depending on the mode setting. When the system is configured as metro core, this field is read-only. When the system is configured as metro access, this field is configurable.
Tilt Reference	(Read-only) This field is set to zero. It represents the default value for the amplifier tilt. In a future software release this value will be managed by APC.
Tilt Calibration	Allows you to manually set the amplifier tilt.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Thresh
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold. The range is -10 to 20 dBm.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold. The range is -10 to 20 dBm.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold. The range is -10 to 20 dBm.
Gain Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low gain degrade threshold. The range is 3 to 22 dBm.
Gain Degrade High	Allows you to set the high gain degrade threshold. The range is 3 to 22 dBm.

C.2.33.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-389) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-389 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.
Units	(Read-only) Displays the unit of the attribute value.

C.2.33.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-390) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-390 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.33.7  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-391) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-391 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Currently Shutdown	Indicates whether the laser is currently shut down.
OSRI	Allows you to turn the OSRI on or off.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.34  Slot Properties—OPT-BST-E

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Enhanced Optical Booster Amplifier (OPT-BST-E) card supports the transmission of 32 channels in the C-band on the ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH platforms. The OPT-BST-E card provides optical amplification in the line where a +1 dBm per channel power in fiber with the full 64-channel grid is required.

Compared to the standard amplifier card (OPT-BST), the enhanced card provides a a higher optical output power, up to a maximum of 20 dBm, to address longer unregenerated distances using the ONS 15454 platform.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-37.

Figure C-37 Cisco ONS 15454 OPT-BST-E Module

For the OPT-BST-E module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Amplified Line, Inventory, Alarm Behavior, and Auto Laser Shutdown.

C.2.34.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.34.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-392) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-392 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.34.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-393) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-393 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Thresh
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold. The range for each port is: •Port 1: -31 to 13 dBm •Port 2: -42 to 11 dBm •Port 3: N/A •Port 4: -43 to -2 dBm •Port 5: N/A
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low gain degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade High	Allows you to set the high gain degrade threshold.

C.2.34.4  Optical Amplified Line Tab

The Optical Amplified Line tab (see Table C-394) allows you to view and update optical amplified line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-394 Field Descriptions for the Optical Amplified Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the total optical power going to the amplifier.
Power Calib.	Allows you to manually set the total optical power going to the amplifiers.
Mode	(Read-only) Shows the working mode of the amplifier: control gain or control power.
Gain	(Read-only) The current gain of the amplifiers.
Gain Set Point	The value of the gain that the amplifier must achieve. The value is read-only or numeric depending on the mode setting. When the system is configured as metro core, this field is read-only. When the system is configured as metro access, this field is configurable.
Tilt Reference	(Read-only) This field is set to zero. It represents the default value for the amplifier tilt. In a future software release this value will be managed by APC.
Tilt Calibration	Allows you to manually set the amplifier tilt.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Thresh
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold. The range is -5 to 23 dBm.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold. The range is -5 to 23 dBm.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold. The range is -5 to 23 dBm.
Gain Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low gain degrade threshold. The range is 10 to 28 dBm.
Gain Degrade High	Allows you to set the high gain degrade threshold. The range is 6 to 24 dBm.

C.2.34.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-395) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-395 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.
Units	(Read-only) Displays the unit of the attribute value.

C.2.34.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-396) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-396 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.34.7  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-397) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-397 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Currently Shutdown	Indicates whether the laser is currently shut down.
OSRI	Allows you to turn the OSRI on or off.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.35  Slot Properties—OPT-PRE

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Pre-Amplifier (OPT-PRE) module is a single-slot card that has six LC-PC-II optical connectors. The card features true variable gain, fast transient suppression, and configurable maximum output power. The OPT_PRE card offers full monitoring and alarm handling capability with configurable thresholds. The card supports optical safety functionality by signal loss detection and alarm, fast power down control, and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-38.

Figure C-38 Cisco ONS 15454 OPT_PRE Module

For the OPT_PRE module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Optical Line, Optical Amplified Line, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.35.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.35.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-398) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-398 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.35.3  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-399) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-399 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Thresh
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low gain degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade High	Allows you to set the high gain degrade threshold.

C.2.35.4  Optical Amplified Line Tab

The Optical Amplified Line tab (see Table C-400) allows you to view and update optical amplified line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-400 Field Descriptions for the Optical Amplified Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a user-defined name. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The port name is blank by default.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Line Direction	Allows you to associate a card with the line direction. Use this field if you have two cards on the same shelf and must designate which one will carry the traffic flow from east to west. The second card will carry traffic from west to east.
Type	(Read-only) Identifies the type of port, such as Input Com, Output Com, Input Line, Output Line, Input OSC, and Output OSC.
Power	(Read-only) Shows the current power level per port.
Power Ref.	(Read-only) Shows the total optical power going to the amplifier.
Power Calib.	Allows you to manually set the total optical power going to the amplifiers.
Mode	(Read-only) Shows the working mode of the amplifier: control gain or control power.
Gain	(Read-only) The current gain of the amplifiers.
Gain Set Point	The value of the gain that the amplifier must achieve. The value is read-only or numeric depending on the mode setting. When the system is configured as metro core, this field is read-only. When the system is configured as metro access, this field is configurable.
Tilt Reference	(Read-only) This field is set to zero. It represents the default value for the amplifier tilt. In a future software release this value will be managed by APC.
Tilt Calibration	Allows you to manually set the amplifier tilt.
DCU Insertion Loss	The dispersion compensation unit (DCU) insertion loss.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Low	Allows you to set the low power threshold.
Power High	Allows you to set the high power threshold.
Alarm Thresh
Port Number	(Read-only) The port number.
Power Failure Low	Allows you to set the low power failure threshold.
Power Degrade High	Allows you to set the high power degrade threshold.
Power Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low power degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade Low	Allows you to set the low gain degrade threshold.
Gain Degrade High	Allows you to set the high gain degrade threshold.

C.2.35.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-401) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-401 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.
Units	(Read-only) Displays the unit of the attribute value.

C.2.35.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-402) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-402 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.36  Slot Properties—ORP-ELH Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Optical Raman Pump-Extended Long Haul (ORP-ELH) modules are used to generate Raman gain effects in the transmission fiber. Two modules are available: ORP-ELH-1 (operating at 1480 nm) and ORP-ELH-2 (operating at 1500 nm). Both modules launch pump power in a counter-propagating direction to generate Raman effects in the transmission fiber. ORP-ELH modules are used in all site types supported by the ONS 15808.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-39.

Figure C-39 Cisco ONS 15808 Optical Raman Pump Extended Long Haul Amplifier

ORP-ELH modules shown on this sheet include:

•Optical Raman Pump-ELH Application-1470 nm-L band (ORP-ELH-1)

•Optical Raman Pump-ELH Application-1490 nm-L band (ORP-ELH-2)

For ONS 15808 ORP-ELH modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Pump Power, Current, and Action.

C.2.36.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the ORP-ELH module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the ORP-ELH PM Table.

C.2.36.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-403) allows you to view and update ORP-ELH module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-403 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the ORP-ELH module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the ORP-ELH module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the ORP-ELH module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the ORP-ELH module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the ORP-ELH module.
State	Allows you to place the ORP-ELH module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the ORP-ELH module.

C.2.36.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-404) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the ORP-ELH module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-404 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.36.4  Pump Power Tab

The Pump Power tab (see Table C-405) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the ORP-ELH module pump power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-405 Field Descriptions for the Pump Power Tab 

Field	Description
Pump Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the pump 1 power (in mW).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the pump 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the pump 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the pump 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Pump Power 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the pump 2 power (in mW)
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the pump 2 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the pump 2 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the pump 2 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
Total Raman Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the total Raman pump power (in mW).

C.2.36.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-406) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the ORP-ELH module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-406 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.2.36.6  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-407) allows you to override the ONS 15808 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-407 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. The optical safety override is used on the line to recover from an automatic shutdown. This command forces the amplifier to turn on the pump lasers for a fixed period of time. When the amplifier controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Power Class 1	Allows you to change the pump class level of the first pump. You can select between two ranges (low or high); or, you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel S/N in fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers and pumps in the system.
Power Class 2	Allows you to change the pump class level of the second pump.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.37  Slot Properties—OSC-CSM

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Service Channel and Combiner/Separator Module (OSC-CSM) is a single-slot card with a 1510-nm OC-3 optical transceiver interface. The OSC-CSM is used to multiplex and demultiplex the service channel to and from the wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) signal. The OSC_CSM features a Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) in the transmit path and a 100BASE-T FE user data channel. The OSC-CSM also distributes the synchronous clock to all NEs on the ring.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-40.

Figure C-40 Cisco ONS 15454 OSC-CSM Module

For the OSC-CSM module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, Optical Line, Inventory, Alarm Behavior, and Auto Laser Shutdown.

C.2.37.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.37.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-408) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-408 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.37.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-409) allows you to view and update line card information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-409 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port No.	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
SD BER	The signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	The signal fail bit error rate.
Type	The port type (SONET or SDH).
PJSTSMon#	The STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to zero, no STS is used.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
Line Thresh 15 Minute - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count - line.
Line Thresh 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Section Thresh 15 Min, Near End
Port No.	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Thresh 1 Day, Near End
Port No.	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.2.37.4  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-410) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-410 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Field	Description
Parameters
Port Number	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Line Direction	The direction of the line (west to east or east to west).
Type	The port type.
Power	The laser power.
VOA Mode	The VOA working mode (constant gain or constant power).
VOA Power Ref	The VOA reference power.
VOA Power Calib	The VOA calibration power.
VOA Attenuation Ref	The VOA reference attenuation.
VOA Attenuation Calib	The VOA calibration attenuation.
Warning Thresh 15 Min
Port Number	The port number.
Power Low	The lower power threshold.
Power High	The upper power threshold.
Warning Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	The port number.
Power Low	The lower power threshold.
Power High	The upper power threshold.
Alarm Thresh
Port Number	The port number.
Power Failure Low	The lower power failure threshold.
Power Degrade High	The upper power degrade threshold.
Power Degrade Low	The lower power degrade threshold.
VOA Degrade High	The upper VOA degrade threshold.
VOA Degrade Low	The lower VOA degrade threshold.

C.2.37.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-411) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-411 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.
Units	(Read-only) Displays the unit of the attribute value.

C.2.37.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-412) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-412 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.37.7  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-413) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-413 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Currently Shutdown	Indicates whether the laser is currently shut down.
OSRI	Allows you to turn the OSRI on or off.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.38  Slot Properties—OSCM

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Service Channel Modem (OSCM) module is a single-slot card with a 1510-nm OC-3 optical transceiver interface. The OSCM features a Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) in the transmit path and a 100BASE-T FE user data channel. The OSCM also distributes the synchronous clock to all NEs on the ring.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-41.

Figure C-41 Cisco ONS 15454 OSCM Module

For the OSCM module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, Optical Line, Inventory, and Alarm Behavior.

C.2.38.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.38.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-414) allows you to view and update card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-414 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.38.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-415) allows you to view and update line card information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-415 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port No.	The port number.
Port Name	The port name.
SD BER	The signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	The signal fail bit error rate.
Type	The port type (SONET or SDH).
PJSTSMon#	The STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to zero, no STS is used.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
Line Thresh 15 Minute - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds - line.
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line.
CV-L	Coding violations - line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line.
FC-L	Failure count - line.
Line Thresh 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Port No.	The port number.
ES-L	Errored seconds - line.
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line.
CV-L	Coding violations - line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds - line.
FC-L	Failure count - line.
Section Thresh 15 Min, Near End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-S	Coding violations - section.
ES-S	Errored seconds - section.
SES-S	Severely errored seconds - section.
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds - section.
Section Thresh 1 Day, Near End
Port No.	The port number.
CV-S	Coding violations - section.
ES-S	Errored seconds - section.
SES-S	Severely errored seconds - section.
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds - section.

C.2.38.4  Optical Line Tab

The Optical Line tab (see Table C-416) allows you to view and update optical line threshold information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-416 Field Descriptions for the Optical Line Tab 

Subtab	Description
Parameters
The Parameters subtab allows you to view and provision the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
Port Name	The port name
Status	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Line Direction	The direction of the line (west to east or east to west)
Type	The port type
Power	The laser power
VOA Mode	The VOA working mode (constant gain or constant power)
VOA Power Ref	The VOA reference power
VOA Power Calib	The VOA calibration power
VOA Attenuation Ref	The VOA reference attenuation
VOA Attenuation Calib	The VOA calibration attenuation
Warning Thresh 15 Min
The Warning Thresh 15 Minutes tab displays the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
Power Low	The lower power threshold
Power High	The upper power threshold
Warning Thresh 1 Day
The Warning 1 Day tab displays the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
Power Low	The lower power threshold
Power High	The upper power threshold
Alarm Threshold
The Alarm Threshold tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
Power Failure Low	The lower power failure threshold
Power Degrade High	The upper power degrade threshold
Power Degrade Low	The lower power degrade threshold
VOA Degrade High	The upper VOA degrade threshold
VOA Degrade Low	The lower VOA degrade threshold

C.2.38.5  Inventory Tab

The Inventory tab (see Table C-417) allows you to view the card inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-417 Field Descriptions for the Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Serial Number	The card serial number that is unique to each card.
IL-REF	The reference insertion loss.
Part Number	The card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Firmware Version	The revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Vendor ID	The ID of the vendor.
Hardware Version	The hardware version number.

C.2.38.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-418) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-418 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.39  Slot Properties—PRE-L

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 Pre-Line Amplifier Module (PRE-L) is used at ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 terminal sites (receive direction), optical line amplification (OLA) sites, optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites, and regeneration sites (receive direction) to preamplify the signal received from the line.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-42.

Figure C-42 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Pre-Line Amplifier

For PRE-L modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.2.39.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the PRE-L that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.2.39.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-419) allows you to view and update PRE-L module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-419 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the PRE-L module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the PRE-L module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the PRE-L module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the PRE-L module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the SCC number.
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the PRE-L module.
State	Allows you to place the PRE-L module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the PRE-L module.

C.2.39.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-420) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the PRE-L module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-420 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.39.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-421) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the PRE-L module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-421 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the PRE-L module laser current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.39.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-422) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the PRE-L module Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-422 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.39.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-423) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the PRE-L module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-423 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current PRE-L module input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.39.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-424) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the PRE-L module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-424 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current PRE-L module red-band output power.
Output Power 1 Red
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the PRE-L red-band output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the PRE-L red-band output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Output Power 1 Blue
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current PRE-L module blue-band output power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the PRE-L module blue-band output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the PRE-L module blue-band output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.39.8  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-425) allows you to override the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following action:

Table C-425 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Protection	The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 automatically reduces the laser power to a safe level whenever the data signal is lost. Clicking Execute activates the laser for 5 to 10 seconds, even if an input signal is not present. The override is generally used during system setup or troubleshooting to test the amplifier output.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.40  Slot Properties—PRE-L-IR Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module thresholds and alarm severities.

The Pre-Line Amplifier-Infrared band (PRE-L-IR) module is an EDFA preamplifier. It is used in the receive section of each site (terminal and OLA) in the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 system where an infrared band is present. The PRE-L-IR is the first amplification stage in the receive section of the infrared band and is positioned directly after the PRE-L amplifier.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-43.

Figure C-43 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Pre-Line Amplifier-Infrared Band

For PRE-L-IR modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.2.40.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the amplifier that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the slot in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the PRE-L-IR PM Table.

C.2.40.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-426) allows you to view and update PRE-L-IR module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-426 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the PRE-L-IR module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the PRE-L-IR module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the PRE-L-IR module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the PRE-L-IR module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the PRE-L-IR module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the PRE-L-IR module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the PRE-L-IR module.
State	Allows you to place the PRE-L-IR module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the PRE-L-IR module.

C.2.40.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-427) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the PRE-L-IR module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-427 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets and displays the Laser 1 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets and displays the Laser 1 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 2.
Low	Sets and displays the Laser 2 low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets and displays the Laser 2 high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.40.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-428) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the PRE-L-IR module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-428 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.40.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-429) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the PRE-L-IR module laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-429 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Laser 2
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 2 current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 2 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.40.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-430) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the PRE-L-IR module lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-430 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current amplifier input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Input Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.40.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-431) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the PRE-L-IR module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-431 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current amplifier Output Power 1.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the amplifier Output Power 1 (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.40.8  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-432) allows you to override the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 optical safety protection. The tab contains the following actions:

Table C-432 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Optical Safety Override	Allows you to bypass the internal and external optical safety interlocks. This command forces the amplifiers to turn on the pump lasers for a fixed period of time. When an amplifier, such as a booster, controls the output power, the safety override command switches the pump laser to the lowest available power level. Warning When you execute the safety override command, a live laser signal is present in the module, fiber output ports, and optical connectors. Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking directly at the module.
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class level of the amplifier. The amplifier directly controls the output power. You can select between two ranges (low or high); or, you can click Continuous and define a value. An improper setting of the amplifier could affect the optical channel signal-to-noise ratio in the fiber at the end of the optical line, or it could affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. You should maintain a consistent power class setting for all amplifiers in the system.
Laser Off Control	Allows you to shut down the laser and lock the amplifier.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.41  Slot Properties—TPA Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module.

Transmit Power Amplifier (TPA) modules amplify multiplexed signals at ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 terminal and regeneration sites. The TPA-B module amplifies the blue channels, and the TPA-R module amplifies the red channels.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-44.

Figure C-44 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Transmit Power Amplifier

The amplifiers shown on this sheet include:

•Transmit Power Amplifier-Blue band (TPA-B)

•Transmit Power Amplifier-Red band (TPA-R)

For TPA modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.2.41.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 transmit power amplifier that is installed in the slot. Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic displays the number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the transmit power amplifier. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the TPA PM Table.

C.2.41.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-433) allows you to view and update transmit power amplifier identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-433 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transmit power amplifier is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the transmit power amplifier is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transmit power amplifier is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the transmit power amplifier.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot where the transmit power amplifier is installed.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transmit power amplifier.
State	Allows you to place the transmit power amplifier in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the transmit power amplifier.

C.2.41.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-434) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the temperature of Laser 1 and Laser 2 of the transmit power amplifier module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-434 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 or Laser 2.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.41.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-435) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the Laser 1 and Laser 2 current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-435 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the transmit power amplifier current.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.41.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-436) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the Laser 1 and Laser 2 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-436 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 or Laser 2.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.41.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-437) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-437 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current input power of the module.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.41.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-438) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transmit power amplifier output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-438 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transmit power amplifier output power.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the transmit power amplifier output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the transmit power amplifier output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the transmit power amplifier output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.2.41.8  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-439) allows you to submit power classification changes and override optical safety protection for the transmit power amplifier. The tab contains the following actions:

Table C-439 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Power Class	Allows you to change the power class of a laser on the transmit power amplifier. The different classes of power are low, medium, or high. Warning Permanent, serious eye damage can result from looking in an ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 NE. A live laser signal is present in the module and in the fiber output ports and optical connectors. The laser is activated when you apply a power class. Do not look directly at the output beams. Caution You should maintain a consistent power class for all amplifiers on the system. Every time you replace an amplifier, you must configure power class before activating the line.
Optical Safety Protection	The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 automatically reduces the laser power to a safe level whenever the data signal is lost. Clicking Execute activates the laser for 5 to 10 seconds, even if an input signal is not present. The override is generally used during system setup or troubleshooting to test the amplifier output.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.42  Slot Properties—TXP_MR_10E Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 10-Gbps Transponder-100-GHz-Tunable xx.xx-xx.xx (TXP_MR_10E) card is a multirate transponder for the ONS 15454 platform. The card is fully backward compatible with the TXT_MR_10G card. It processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side) that is tunable on four wavelength channels (ITU-T 100-GHz grid).

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-45.

Figure C-45 Cisco ONS 15454 TXP-MR-10E Module

For the TXP-MR-10E module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, PPM, Line, OTN, Loopback, Auto Laser Shutdown, Optical Thresh, Alarm Behavior, Protection, and Info.

---

Note The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

---

C.2.42.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the TXP_MR_10E that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.42.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-440) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10E identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-440 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

C.2.42.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-441) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-441 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Termination Mode	Allows you to set the mode of termination.
AIS/Squelch Configuration	Allows you to configure the remote client to squelch or send an AIS signal.
Wavelength	Identifies the wavelengths associated with the DWDM side optical transmitter. You can set the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength or to further wavelengths in 100 GHz ITU spacing.
Regeneration Peer Slot	Allows you to select like cards so that you can configure a regeneration peer group.
Regeneration Group Name	(Optional) Allows you to set the name of the regeneration group.

C.2.42.4  PPM Tab

The PPM tab (see Table C-442) allows you to view and provision the PPM and the ports inside the PPM. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-442 Field Descriptions for the PPM Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable Port Modules (PPM)
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Actual Equipment Type	The actual card that is installed in the slot.
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
PPM
Port	The PPM number and port number
Rate	Displays the port rate.

C.2.42.4.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision PPM and to create the ports inside these entities. See Provision Pluggable Dialog Box for more information.

C.2.42.5  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to configure line information.

If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, the tab contains the following subtabs:

•Section Trace Subtab

•SONET Line Subtab

•Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, the tab contains the following subtabs:

•Section Trace Subtab

•SDH Line Subtab

•RS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•RS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•MS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•MS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

---

Note The following information is the same if the payload is SDH in an ONS 15454 SONET NE.

---

C.2.42.5.1  Section Trace Subtab

The Section Trace subtab (see Table C-443) allows you to change the section trace settings for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-443 Field Descriptions for the Section Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off/None or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Allows you to disable the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Select a transmit length for the trace.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.

C.2.42.5.2  SONET Line Subtab

The SONET Line subtab (see Table C-444) allows you to view and change the SONET line settings of the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-444 Field Descriptions for the SONET Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Send Do Not Use	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Provides Sync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
Enable Sync Msg	When checked, enables synchronization status messages, which allow the node to choose the best timing source.

C.2.42.5.3  Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Section Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-445) allows you to view and change the 15-minute section threshold information for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-445 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.2.42.5.4  Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Section Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-446) allows you to view and change the 1-day section threshold information for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-446 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.2.42.5.5  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-447) allows you to view and change the 15-minute line threshold information for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-447 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays failure count-line.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays failure count-line.

C.2.42.5.6  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-448) allows you to view and change the 1-day line threshold information for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-448 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays failure count-line.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line.
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line.
FC-L	Displays failure count-line.

C.2.42.5.7  Section Trace Subtab

The Section Trace subtab (see Table C-449) allows you to change the section trace settings for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-449 Field Description for the Section Trace Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off/None or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Allows you to disable the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Select a transmit length for the trace.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.

C.2.42.5.8  SDH Line Subtab

The SDH Line subtab (see Table C-450) allows you to view and change the SDH line settings of the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-450 Field Description for the SDH Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.

C.2.42.5.9  RS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The RS Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-451) allows you to view and change the 15-minute regeneration section threshold for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-451 Field Description of the RS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section

C.2.42.5.10  RS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The RS Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-452) allows you to view and change the 1-day regeneration section threshold for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-452 Field Description of the RS Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section

C.2.42.5.11  MS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The MS Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-453) allows you to view and change the 15-minute multiplex section threshold for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-453 Field Description of the MS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section

C.2.42.5.12  MS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The MS Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-454) allows you to view and change the 1-day multiplex section threshold for the TXP-MR-10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-454 Field Description of the MS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section

C.2.42.6  OTN Tab

The OTN tab allows you to change the line optical transport network (OTN) settings for TXP_MR_10E cards. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•OTN Line Subtab

•G.709 Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•G.709 Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•FEC Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•FEC Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Trail Trace Identifier Subtab

C.2.42.6.1  OTN Line Subtab

The OTN Line subtab (see Table C-455) allows you to view and change the OTN line settings of the TXP_MR_10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-455 Field Descriptions for the OTN Line Subtab 

Field	Description
G.709 OTN	Disables or enables the G.709 OTN feature.
FEC	Disables or enables forward error correction. Note OTN must be enabled before you can enable FEC.
Asynch/Synch Mapping	The card can perform multiplexing per ITU-T G.709. The ODUk (client SONET/SDH payload) can be mapped to the Optical Channel (OTUk) either asynchronously (asynch mapping) or synchronously (synch mapping) with this setting.
SF BER	The signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	The signal degrade bit error rate.

C.2.42.6.2  G.709 Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The G.709 Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-456) displays near- and far-end SM optical channel transport unit (OTUK), and near- and far-end PM optical channel data unit (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes.

Table C-456 Field Descriptions for the G.709 Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
SM (OTUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
SM (OTUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count

C.2.42.6.3  G.709 Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The G.709 Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-457) displays near- and far-end SM optical channel transport unit (OTUK), and near- and far-end PM optical channel data unit (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours.

Table C-457 Field Descriptions for the G.709 Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
SM (OTUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
SM (OTUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-SM	Displays the background block errors
ES-SM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-SM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count
PM (ODUK) Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
BBE-PM	Displays the background block errors
ES-PM	Displays the errored seconds
SES-PM	Displays the severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Displays the unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Displays the failure count

C.2.42.6.4  FEC Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The FEC Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-458) allows you to view and change the 15-minute FEC threshold values of the TXP_MR_10E card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-458 Field Descriptions for the FEC Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays port number information.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in 15-minute intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in 15-minute intervals.

C.2.42.6.5  FEC Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The FEC Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-459) allows you to view and change the 15-minute FEC threshold values of the TXP_MR_10E card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-459 Field Descriptions for the FEC Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays port number information.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in 15-minute intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in 15-minute intervals.

C.2.42.6.6  Trail Trace Identifier Subtab

The Trail Trace Identifier subtab (see Table C-460) allows you to provision the trail trace identifier for the TXP_MR_10E card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-460 Field Descriptions for the Trail Trace Identifier Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays port number information.
Level	Displays the trail trace identifier level (Section or Path).
Trace Mode	Allows you to set the trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable FDI on TTIM	Allows you to disable forward defect indication (FDI) for trail trace identifier mismatch (TTIM) alarms.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.

C.2.42.7  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-461) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10E loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-461 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Displays the name of the port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.2.42.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-462) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-462 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.2.42.9  Optical Thresh Tab

The Optical Thresh tab allows you to view and provision optical threshold settings. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•TCA 15 Min Subtab

•TCA 1 Day Subtab

•Alarm Thresh Subtab

C.2.42.9.1  TCA 15 Min Subtab

The TCA 15 Min subtab (see Table C-463) allows you to view and change the 15-minute TCA settings of the TXP_MR_10E card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-463 Field Descriptions for the TCA 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.42.9.2  TCA 1 Day Subtab

The TCA 1 Day subtab (see Table C-464) allows you to view and change the 1-day TCA settings of the TXP_MR_10E card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-464 Field Descriptions for the TCA 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.42.9.3  Alarm Thresh Subtab

The Alarm Thresh subtab (see Table C-465) allows you to select the thresholds for the generations of alarms. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-465 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Thresh Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Laser Bias High (%)	Displays the upper laser bias threshold.
Rx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper receive power threshold.
Rx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower receive power threshold.
Tx Power High (dBm)	Displays the upper transmit power threshold.
Tx Power Low (dBm)	Displays the lower transmit power threshold.

C.2.42.10  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-466) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10E alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-466 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.42.11  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-467) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10E protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-467 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.

C.2.42.12  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-468) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the TXP_MR_10E card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-468 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.43  Slot Properties—TXP_MR_10G Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 10-Gbps Transponder-100-GHz-Tunable xx.xx-xx.xx card (TXP_MR_10G) processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one 10-Gbps port per card that can be provisioned for an STM64/OC-192 short reach (1310nm) signal, compliant with ITU-T G.707, G.709, ITU-T G.691, Telcordia GR-253-CORE, or to 10 GE BASE-LR, compliant to IEEE 802.3

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-46.

Figure C-46 Cisco ONS 15454 TXP_MR_10G Module

For the TXP_MR_10G module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, OTN, Loopback, Auto Laser Shutdown, Optical Thresh, Alarm Behavior, SONET Line, SDH Line, Ether Line, and Protection. The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

C.2.43.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the TXP_MR_10G that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.2.43.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-469) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10G identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-469 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Vendor ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.2.43.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-470) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-470 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Payload Type	Allows you to set the type of payload.
Termination Mode	Allows you to set the mode of termination.
Wavelength	Identifies the wavelengths associated with the DWDM side optical transmitter. You can set the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength or to further wavelengths in 100 GHz ITU spacing.
Regeneration Peer Slot	Allows you to select like cards so that you can configure a regeneration peer group.
Regeneration Group Name	(Optional) Allows you to set the name of the regeneration group.

C.2.43.4  OTN Tab

The OTN tab (see Table C-471) allows you to change the line optical transport network (OTN) settings for TXP_MR_10G cards. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-471 Field Descriptions for the OTN Tab 

Field	Description
G.709 Thresh 15 Min
SM (OTUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end SM optical channel transport unit (OTUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-SM	Background block errors
ES-SM	Errored seconds
SES-SM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end PM optical channel data unit (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-PM	Background block errors
ES-PM	Errored seconds
SES-PM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Failure count
G.709 Thresh 1 Day
SM (OTUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end SM (OTUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-SM	Background block errors
ES-SM	Errored seconds
SES-SM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-SM	Unavailable seconds
FC-SM	Failure count
PM (ODUK) Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end PM (ODUK) threshold information received during the past 24 hours. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	The port number
BBE-PM	Background block errors
ES-PM	Errored seconds
SES-PM	Severely errored seconds
UAS-PM	Unavailable seconds
FC-PM	Failure count
FEC Thresh 15 Minutes
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in 15-minute intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in 15-minute intervals.
FEC Thresh 1 Day
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Bit Errors Corrected	Displays the bit errors corrected in one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable Words	Displays the uncorrectable words in one-day intervals.
Trail Trace Identifier
Port No.	The port number.
Level	Displays the trail trace identifier level (Section or Path).
Trace Mode	Allows you to set the trace mode (Off or Manual).
Disable FDI on TTIM	Allows you to disable forward defect indication (FDI) for trail trace identifier mismatch (TTIM) alarms.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string. The trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
OTN Line
Port No.	The port number.
G.709 OTN	Disables or enables the G.709 OTN feature.
FEC	Disables or enables forward error correction. Note OTN must be enabled before you can enable FEC.
SF BER	The signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	The signal degrade bit error rate.

C.2.43.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-472) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10G loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-472 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Displays the name of the port.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.2.43.6  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-473) allows you to view and update the automatic laser shutdown parameters information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-473 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 60 to 200 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the recovery laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 100 to 2,000 seconds for client ports and 200 to 2,000 seconds for trunk ports.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.2.43.7  Optical Thresh Tab

The Optical Thresh tab (see Table C-474) allows you to view and provision optical threshold settings. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-474 Field Descriptions for the Optical Thresh Tab 

Field	Description
Warning 15 Min
The Warning 15 Minutes subtab allows you to provision the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold
Warning 1 Day
The Warning 1 Day subtab allows you to provision the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold
Alarm Threshold
The Alarm Threshold tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
Tx Power High	Displays the upper transmit power threshold
Tx Power Low	Displays the lower transmit power threshold
Rx Power High	Displays the upper receive power threshold
Rx Power Low	Displays the lower receive power threshold
Laser Bias High	Displays the upper laser bias threshold

C.2.43.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-475) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10G alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-475 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.2.43.9  SONET Line Tab

The SONET Line tab (see Table C-476) allows you to configure SONET line information. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, the tab contains the following subtabs and fields. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, see the SDH Line section.

---

Note The following information is the same if the payload is SDH in an ONS 15454 SONET NE.

---

Table C-476 Field Descriptions for the SONET Line Tab 

Field	Description
Section Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end SONET line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end SONET line threshold information received during the past 24 hours. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Section Trace
Allows you to change the section trace settings for TXP_MR_10G cards. Select a trace and click Modify to open the Modify Trace window.
Port Number	The port number
Trace Mode	Allows you to set the trace mode (Off/None or Manual)
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Allows you to disable the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected
Transmit Length	Select a transmit length for the trace
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.

C.2.43.10  SDH Line Tab

The SDH Line tab (see Table C-477) allows you to configure SDH line information. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SDH NE, the tab contains the following subtabs and fields. If the card is installed in an ONS 15454 SONET NE, see the SONET Line section.

---

Note The following information is the same if the payload is SONET in an ONS 15454 SDH NE.

---

Table C-477 Field Descriptions for the SDH Line Tab 

Field	Description
Section Trace
Port Number	The port number.
Trace Mode	The trace mode (Off/None or Manual).
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S	Allows you to disable the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) when the path Trace Identifier Mismatch Section (TIM-S) alarm is detected.
Transmit Length	Select a transmit length for the trace.
Current Transmit String	Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
Current Expected String	Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
Current Received String	(Read-only) Displays the current received string.
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
RS Threshold 15 Minutes - Near End
Displays near-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors - regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section
RS Threshold 1 Day - Near End
Displays near-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks - regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds - regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors - regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds - regenerator section
UAS-RS	Unavailable seconds - regenerator section
MS Threshold 15 Minutes - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section
MS Threshold 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-MS	Errored seconds - multiplexer section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds - multiplexer section
EB-MS	Errored blocks - multiplexer section
BBE-MS	Background block errors - multiplexer section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds - multiplexer section

C.2.43.11  Ether Line Tab

The Ether Line tab (see Table C-478) allows you to configure Ethernet line information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-478 Field Descriptions for the Ether Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter a port name.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Incoming MAC Address	Allows you to edit the incoming MAC address.
Max Frame	Allows you to configure the maximum frame size, 1548 or Jumbo.
Thresholds
Index Number	Displays the index number.
Slot	Displays the slot.
Port	Displays the port.
Variable	Displays the Ethernet threshold variable. The variable depends on the card type.
Alarm Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold alarm type. Values are Rising, Falling, or Rising and Falling.
Sample Type	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample type. Values are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of any time period.
Sample Period	Displays the Ethernet threshold sample period, in seconds.
Rising Thresh	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the rising threshold and the entry generates an event.
Falling Thresh	Displays a count of the number of times an alarm entry crosses the falling threshold and the entry generates an event.

C.2.43.12  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-479) allows you to view and update TXP_MR_10G protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-479 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.
Switch Commands	Allows you to perform a manual switch, perform a forced switch, or clear the existing command switching.
Inhibit Switching	Allows you to inhibit unlock switching, lock out switching, or lock on switching.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.2.44  Slot Properties—WD Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 wavelength demultiplexer (WD) modules are used to demultiplex signals in the receive direction at ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 terminal, regeneration, and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-47.

Figure C-47 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Wavelength Demultiplexer

Wavelength demultiplexer modules shown on this sheet include:

•8-channel Wavelength Demultiplexer-Blue band module (8WD-B)

•24-channel Wavelength Demultiplexer-Red band module (24WD-R)

•24-channel Wavelength Demultiplexer-Low Loss-Red band module (24WD-LLR)

For these modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Temperature. Fields on these tabs are described in the following sections.

C.2.44.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the wavelength demultiplexer module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.2.44.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-480) allows you to view and update wavelength demultiplexer module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-480 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the module.
State	Allows you to place the module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the module.

C.2.44.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-481) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength demultiplexer module temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-481  Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Action Button	Description
Operating Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for the module (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
Low Medium	Sets the low medium average temperature threshold for the module (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High Medium	Sets the high medium average temperature threshold for the module (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for the module (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3  Electrical Cards

This section describes the following electrical cards supported within CTM:

•Slot Properties—DS1-14 Card

•Slot Properties—DS1N Card

•Slot Properties—DS3-12 Card

•Slot Properties—DS3_EC1_48 Card

•Slot Properties—DS3E Card

•Slot Properties—DS3i Card

•Slot Properties—DS3i-N-12 Card

•Slot Properties—DS3XM-6 Card

•Slot Properties—DS3XM-12 Card

•Slot Properties—E1-N-14 Card

•Slot Properties—E1-42 Card

•Slot Properties—E-1 Card

•Slot Properties—EC1-12 Card

•Slot Properties—FMEC-E3/DS3 Card

C.3.1  Slot Properties—DS1-14 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS1-14 card provides 14 Telcordia-compliant GR-499 DS-1 ports. Each port operates at 1.544 Mbps over a 100-ohm twisted-pair copper cable.

For the DS1 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, VT, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.3.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS1 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-482) allows you to view and update DS1 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-482 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.1.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-483) allows you to view and update DS1 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-483 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 14).
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate. Values are: •1E-3 •1E-4 (default) •1E-5
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate. Values are: •1E-5 •1E-6 •1E-7 (default) •1E-8 •1E-9
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type. Values are: •D4 (default) •ESF—Extended Super Frame •Unframed
Line Coding	Allows you to define the DS1-14 transmission coding type. Values are: •AMI—Alternate Mark Inversion (default) •B8ZS—Bipolar 8-zero Substitution
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. Values are: •0-131 (default) •132-262 •263-393 •394-524 •525-655
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The duration of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the port is set in service by the software. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
AINS Soak Count Down	Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays 15-minute near- and far-end optical line threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 14).
CV-L	Coding violations-line (near-end only). Default is 13340.
ES-L	Errored seconds-line. Default is 65.
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line (near-end only). Default is 10.
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only). Default is 10.
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays 1-day optical line threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 14).
CV-L	Coding violations-line (near-end only). Default is 133400.
ES-L	Errored seconds-line. Default is 648.
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line (near-end only). Default is 100.
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only). Default is 10.
Path Threshold 1 Day
Near End
Displays the following near-end 1-day path threshold information.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 14).
CV-P	Coding violations-path.
ES-P	Errored seconds-path.
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path.
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path.
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path.
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path.
Far End
Displays the following far-end 1-day path threshold information.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 14).
CV-P	Coding violations-path.
ES-P	Errored seconds-path.
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path.
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path.
ESA-P	Errored seconds type A-path.
ESB-P	Errored seconds type B-path.
CSS-P	Controlled slip seconds-path.
SEFS-P	Severely errored framing seconds-path.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Near End
Displays the following near-end 15-minute path threshold information.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 14).
CV-P	Coding violations-path.
ES-P	Errored seconds-path.
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path.
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path.
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path.
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path.
Far End
Displays the following far-end 15-minute path threshold information.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 14).
CV-P	Coding violations-path.
ES-P	Errored seconds-path.
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path.
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path.
ESA-P	Errored seconds type A-path.
ESB-P	Errored seconds type B-path.
CSS-P	Controlled slip seconds-path.
SEFS-P	Severely errored framing seconds-path.

C.3.1.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-484) allows you to view and update DS1 synchronous transport signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-484 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end 15-minute STS information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Coding violations-path. Default is 15.
ES-P	Errored seconds-path. Default is 12.
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path. Default is 3.
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path. Default is 10.
FC-P	Failure count-path. Default is 10.
STS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end 1-day STS information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Coding violations-path. Default is 125.
ES-P	Errored seconds-path. Default is 100.
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path. Default is 7.
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path. Default is 10.
FC-P	Failure count-path. Default is 10.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number.
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number.
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number.

C.3.1.5  VT Tab

The VT tab (see Table C-485) allows you to view and update DS1 virtual tributary information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-485 Field Descriptions for the VT Tab 

Field	Description
VT Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end 15-minute VT threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The VT number.
CV-V	Coding violations-VT path. Default is 15.
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT path. Default is 12.
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT path. Default is 3.
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT path. Default is 10.
VT Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end 1-day VT threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The VT number.
CV-V	Coding violations-VT path. Default is 125.
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT path. Default is 100.
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT path. Default is 7.
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT path. Default is 10.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The VT number.
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number.
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number.

C.3.1.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-486) allows you to view and update DS1 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-486 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 14).
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.3.1.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-487) allows you to view and update DS1 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-487 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.1.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-488) allows you to view and update DS1 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-488 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.1.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-489) allows you to view and update J1 Path Trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-489 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.2  Slot Properties—DS1N Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS1N transmux card can accept up to six DS-3 signals and convert each signal to 28 VT1.5s. Conversely, the card can take 28 T-1s and multiplex them into a channeled C-bit or M23 framed DS-3. Unlike the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 cards, the DS1N allows circuit mapping at the VT level.

For the DS1N module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, VT, Loopback, Protection, and Alarm Behavior.

C.3.2.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS1N that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.3.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-490) allows you to view and update DS1N identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-490 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.2.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-491) allows you to view and update DS1N optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-491 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the DS-1N transmission coding type.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
BLSR Ext. Byte	Select an alternate BLSR byte. Choices are Z2, E2, or F1.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays optical line threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end path threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AIS-P	Alarm indication signal-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AIS-P	Alarm indication signal-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path

C.3.2.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-492) allows you to view and update DS1N Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-492 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays STS information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
STS Threshold 1 Day
Displays STS information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number
J1 Path Trace
Displays J1 path trace information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
VC Number	Displays the VC number
Expected String	Displays the current expected string
Received String	Displays the current received string
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual)
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received

C.3.2.5  VT Tab

The VT tab (see Table C-493) allows you to view and update DS1N virtual tributary information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-493 Field Descriptions for the VT Tab 

Field	Description
VT Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near and far-end VT threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The VT number
CV-V	Coding violations-VT layer
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT layer
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT layer
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT layer
VT Threshold 1 Day
Displays near and far-end VT threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The VT number
CV-V	Coding violations-VT layer
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT layer
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT layer
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT layer

C.3.2.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-494) allows you to view and update DS1N loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-494 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.3.2.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-495) allows you to view and update DS1N protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-495 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.2.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-496) allows you to view and update DS1N alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-496 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Displays a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the DS1N port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.3  Slot Properties—DS3-12 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS3-12 cards (DS3-12, DS3N-12) provide 12 Telcordia-compliant GR-499 DS-3 ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm 728A or equivalent coaxial span. The DS3N-12 supports the same features as the DS3-12 but can also provide 1:N protection (where N is less than or equal to 5).

For the DS-3 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, and Alarm Behavior.

C.3.3.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS-3 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-497) allows you to view and update DS-3 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-497 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.3.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-498) allows you to view and update DS-3 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-498 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 12).
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal-line; number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	•Errored seconds-line
SES-L	•Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	•Loss of signal-line; number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects

C.3.3.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-499) allows you to view and update DS-3 synchronous transport signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-499 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
STS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.3.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-500) allows you to view and update DS-3 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-500 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.3.3.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-501) allows you to view and update DS-3 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-501 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.3.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-502) allows you to view and update DS-3 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-502 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.4  Slot Properties—DS3_EC1_48 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS3_EC1_48 card is a high-density I/O card with 48 ports that may function as a DS3 or EC1 interface. This allows users to provision the card at port-level instead of card-level. Each of the DS3 interfaces operate at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75 ohm coaxial span. Each of the EC1 interfaces operate at 51.840 Mbps over a single 75 ohm coaxial span.

For the DS3_EC1_48 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.3.4.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS3_EC1_48 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.4.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-503) allows you to view and update DS3_EC1_48 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-503 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown: The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed: The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service: The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service: The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.4.3  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to view and update DS3_EC1_48 optical line performance monitoring information. The Line tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•PBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•PBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•CPBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•CPBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

C.3.4.3.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-504) allows you to view and change the line settings of the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-504 Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Detected Line Type	Displays the detected line type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the transmission coding type.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown: The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed: The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service: The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service: The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.

C.3.4.3.2  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-505) allows you to view and change the 15-minute threshold settings of the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-505 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line (near-end only).
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line (near-end only).
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only).

C.3.4.3.3  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-506) allows you to view and change the 1-day threshold settings of the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-506 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line (near-end only).
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line (near-end only).
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only).

C.3.4.3.4  PBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The PBit Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-507) allows you to view and change near-end 15-minute PBit path threshold settings of the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-507 Field Descriptions for the PBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.4.3.5  PBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The PBit Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-508) allows you to view and change near-end 1-day PBit path threshold settings of the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-508 Field Descriptions for the PBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.4.3.6  CPBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The CBit Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-509) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 15-minute CBit path threshold settings of the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-509 Field Descriptions for the CPBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.4.3.7  CPBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The CBit Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-510) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 1-day CBit path threshold settings of the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-510 Field Descriptions for the CPBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.4.4  STS Tab

The STS tab allows you to view and update DS3_EC1_48 synchronous transport signal (STS) information. The STS tab contains the following subtabs:

•STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.3.4.4.1  STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The STS Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-511) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 15-minute STS information for the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-511 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.3.4.4.2  STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The STS Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-512) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 1-day STS information for the DS3_EC1_48 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-512 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.3.4.4.3  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-513) displays the customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-513 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.3.4.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-514) allows you to view and update DS3_EC1_48 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-514 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Inhibit FE Loopback	If the Inhibit FE Loopback check box is checked for a DS-3 port, that port will ignore any FEAC Line Loop codes and will not loop back. The port can still be put into loopback manually using the Loopback Type column even if the Inhibit FE Loopback check box is selected. Only DS-3 ports can be configured to inhibit responding to FEAC loopback commands.

C.3.4.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-515) allows you to view and update DS3_EC1_48 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-515 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.4.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-516) allows you to view and update DS3_EC1_48 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-516 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.4.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-517) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-517 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Mem Num	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

C.3.4.9  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-518) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the DS3_EC1_48 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-518 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.5  Slot Properties—DS3E Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 DS3E cards (DS3-12E, DS3N-12E) provide 12 Telcordia-compliant ports per card. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps over a single 75-ohm 728A or equivalent coaxial span. The DS3-12E card provides enhanced performance monitoring functions. Default thresholds are based on recommendations in GR-820-CORE, Section 5.0. The DS3N-12E card supports the same features as the DS3-12E but can also provide 1:N protection (where N is less than or equal to 5).

For the DS3E module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.3.5.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS-3 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.5.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-519) allows you to view and update DS-3 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-519 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.5.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-520) allows you to view and update DS-3 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-520 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal-line; number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal-line; number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects

C.3.5.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-521) allows you to view and update DS-3 synchronous transport signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-521 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
STS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.5.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-522) allows you to view and update DS-3 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-522 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.3.5.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-523) allows you to view and update DS-3 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-523 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.5.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-524) allows you to view and update DS-3 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-524 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.5.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-525) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-525 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC4 Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.6  Slot Properties—DS3i Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS3i-N-12 cards provide twelve DS-3 ports. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps. The DS3i-N-12 uses B3ZS error monitoring and enhanced performance monitoring, including P-Bit and CP-Bit monitoring.

For the DS3I module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-3, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.3.6.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS3I that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.6.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-526) allows you to view and update DS3I identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-526 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.6.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-527) allows you to view and update DS3I line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-527 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Detected Line Type	Displays the detected line type.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. Values are 0 - 225 (default) or 226 - 450.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the DS3I transmission coding type.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
DS3 PBit Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end DS3 PBit threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P/EB-P	Coding violations/errored blocks-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	AIS seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
DS3 PBit Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end DS3 PBit threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P/EB-P	Coding violations/errored blocks-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	AIS seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
DS3 CPBit Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end DS3 CPBit path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path (far-end only)
DS3 CPBit Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end DS3 CPBit threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path (far-end only)

C.3.6.4  VC-3 Tab

The VC-3 tab (see Table C-528) allows you to view and update DS3I VC-3 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-528 Field Descriptions for the VC-3 Tab 

Field	Description
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end VC-3 information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end VC-3 information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.6.5  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-529) allows you to view and update DS3I VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-529 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end VC-4 information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number. Displays as VC4-x, with x = 1,2,3, or 4.
EB-HP/BEC-HP	Errored block/byte errors corrected-high order path
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high order path
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high order path
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high order path
UAS-HP	Unavailable seconds-high order path
Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end VC-4 information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number. Displays as VC4-x, with x = 1,2,3, or 4.
EB-HP/BEC-HP	Errored block/byte errors corrected-high order path
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high order path
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high order path
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high order path
UAS-HP	Unavailable seconds-high order path

C.3.6.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-530) allows you to view and update DS3I loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-530 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Inhibit Loopback	Allows you to prevent loopback functionality.

C.3.6.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-531) allows you to view and update DS3I protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-531 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.6.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-532) allows you to view and update DS3I alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-532 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.6.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-533) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-533 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC4 Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.7  Slot Properties—DS3i-N-12 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS3i-N-12 cards provide twelve DS-3 ports. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps. The DS3i-N-12 uses B3ZS error monitoring and enhanced performance monitoring, including P-Bit and CP-Bit monitoring.

For the DS3I module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.3.7.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS3I that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.7.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-534) allows you to view and update DS3I identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-534 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.7.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-535) allows you to view and update DS3I line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-535 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12).
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Detected Line Type	Displays the detected line type.
Line Length	Displays the length of the line.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the DS3I transmission coding type.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12)
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12)
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
DS3 PBit Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end DS3 PBit threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	AIS seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
DS3 PBit Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end DS3 PBit threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	AIS seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
DS3 CPBit Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end DS3 CPBit path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
DS3 CPBit Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end DS3 CPBit threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path

C.3.7.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-536) allows you to view and update DS3 synchronous transport signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-536 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
STS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.7.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-537) allows you to view and update DS3I loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-537 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12).
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Inhibit Loopback	Allows you to prevent loopback functionality.

C.3.7.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-538) allows you to view and update DS3I protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-538 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.7.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-539) allows you to view and update DS3I alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-539 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.7.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-540) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-540 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.8  Slot Properties—DS3XM-6 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS3XM-6 card provides six Telcordia-compliant GR-499-CORE M13 multiplexing functions. The DS3XM-6 converts six framed DS-3 network connections to 28x6 or 168 VT1.5s. Unlike the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 cards, the DS3XM-6 allows circuit mapping at the VT level.

For the DS3XM-6 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, VT, DS1, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.3.8.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS3XM-6 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.8.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-541) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-541 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.8.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-542) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-542 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6).
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type. Values are: •M13 (default) •C BIT
Line Coding	Allows you to define the DS3XM transmission coding type.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The duration of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the port is set in service by the software. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal seconds-line
PBit Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end PBit Path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AIS-P	Alarm indication signal-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
PBit Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end PBit Path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AIS-P	Alarm indication signal-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
CPBit Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end CPBit Path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
CPBit Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end CPBit Path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path

C.3.8.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-543) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-543 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
STS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.8.5  VT Tab

The VT tab (see Table C-544) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 virtual tributary information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-544 Field Descriptions for the VT Tab 

Field	Description
VT Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays VT threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	Displays the VT number
CV-V	Coding violations-VT path
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT path
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT path
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT path
VT Threshold 1 Day
Displays VT threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	Displays the VT number
CV-V	Coding violations-VT path
ES-V	Errored seconds-VT path
SES-V	Severely errored seconds-VT path
UAS-V	Unavailable seconds-VT path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The VT number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.8.6  DS1 Tab

The DS1 tab (see Table C-545) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 virtual tributary information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-545 DS1 Tab Field Descriptions 

Field	Description
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays 15-minute path threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays 1-day path threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6)
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
SAS-P	Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VT Number	The VT number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.8.7  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-546) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-546 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Subfield	Description
DS1
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 6).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).
Send Code	Allows you to select No Code (the default) or Line Loop Code. Selecting Line Loop Code inserts a line loop activate Far End Action Code (FEAC) in the CBIT overhead transmitting to the connected facility. This code initiates a loopback from the facility to the ONS 15454. Selecting No Code sends a line loop deactivate FEAC code to the connected equipment, which will remove the loopback. You can also insert an FEAC for the 28 individual DS-1 circuits transmuxed into a DS-3 circuit.
Derived State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note The Derived State field is only available for release 3.4.
DS3
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note The State field is only available for release 3.4.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).
Send Code	Allows you to select No Code (the default) or Line Loop Code. Selecting Line Loop Code inserts a line loop activate Far End Action Code (FEAC) in the CBIT overhead transmitting to the connected facility. This code initiates a loopback from the facility to the ONS 15454. Selecting No Code sends a line loop deactivate FEAC code to the connected equipment, which will remove the loopback. You can also insert an FEAC for the 28 individual DS-1 circuits transmuxed into a DS-3 circuit.
Inhibit FE Loopback	If the Inhibit FE Loopback check box is checked for a DS-3 port, that port will ignore any FEAC Line Loop codes and will not loop back. The port can still be put into loopback manually using the Loopback Type column even if the Inhibit FE Loopback check box is selected. Only DS-3 ports can be configured to inhibit responding to FEAC loopback commands.

C.3.8.8  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-547) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-547 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.8.9  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-548) allows you to view and update DS3XM-6 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-548 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.8.10  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-549) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-549 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.9  Slot Properties—DS3XM-12 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The DS3XM-12 card provides twelve Telcordia-compliant GR-499-CORE M13 multiplexing functions. The DS3XM-12 converts twelve framed DS-3 network connections to 28x6 or 168 VT1.5s.

For the DS3XM-12 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, VT, DS1, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace and Info.

C.3.9.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS3XM-12 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.9.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-550) allows you to view and update identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-550 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown: The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed: The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service: The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service: The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.
Backplane Rate	Allows you to select STS12, STS48, STS96, or STS192 as the backplane rate.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.9.3  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to view and update optical line performance monitoring information. The Line tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•PBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•PBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•CPBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•CPBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

C.3.9.3.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-551) allows you to view and change the line settings of the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-551  Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the transmission coding type.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. •0-131 (default) •132-262
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak (H:M)	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown: The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed: The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service: The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service: The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.

C.3.9.3.2  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-552) allows you to view and change the 15-minute threshold settings of the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-552 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line (near-end only).
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line (near-end only).
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only).

C.3.9.3.3  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-553) allows you to view and change the 1-day threshold settings of the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-553 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line (near-end only).
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line.
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line (near-end only).
LOSS-L	Displays the loss of signal seconds-line (near-end only).

C.3.9.3.4  PBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The PBit Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-554) allows you to view and change the near-end 15-minute PBit Path threshold information on the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-554 Field Descriptions for the PBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.9.3.5  PBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The PBit Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-555) allows you to view and change the near-end 1-day PBit Path threshold information on the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-555 Field Descriptions for the PBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.9.3.6  CPBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The CBit Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-556) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 15-minute CBit Path threshold information on the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-556 Field Descriptions for the CPBit Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.9.3.7  CPBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The CBit Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-557) allows you to view and change the near- and far-end 1-day CBit Path threshold information on the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-557 Field Descriptions for the CPBit Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.9.4  STS Tab

The STS tab allows you to view and update DS3XM-12 Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) information. The STS tab contains the following subtabs:

•STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.3.9.4.1  STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The STS Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-558) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 15-minute STS information for the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-558 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.3.9.4.2  STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The STS Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-559) allows you to view and change near- and far-end 1-day STS information for the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-559 Field Descriptions for the STS Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.
Far End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Displays failure count-path information.

C.3.9.4.3  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-560) displays the customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-560 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number.
Customer ID	Displays the customer ID.
Service ID	Displays the service ID.

C.3.9.5  VT Tab

The VT tab allows you to view and update DS3XM-12 virtual tributary information. The VT tab contains the following subtabs:

•VT Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•VT Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.3.9.5.1  VT Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The VT Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-561) displays near- and far-end 15-minute VT threshold information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-561 Field Descriptions for the VT Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
VT Number	Displays VT Number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.
Far End
VT Number	Displays VT Number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.

C.3.9.5.2  VT Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The VT Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-562) displays near- and far-end 1-day VT threshold information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-562 Field Descriptions for the VT Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
VT Number	Displays VT number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.
Far End
VT Number	Displays VT number information.
CV-V	Displays coding violations-VT path information.
ES-V	Displays errored seconds-VT path information.
SES-V	Displays severely errored seconds-VT path information.
UAS-V	Displays unavailable seconds-VT path information.

C.3.9.5.3  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-563) displays the customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-563 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
VT Number	Displays VT number information.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.3.9.6  DS1 Tab

The DS1 tab allows you to view and update DS3XM-12 DS1 information. The DS1 tab contains the following subtabs:

•DS1 Config Subtab

•Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.3.9.6.1  DS1 Config Subtab

The DS1 Config subtab (see Table C-564) allows you to view and change the DS1 configuration settings for the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-564 Field Descriptions for the DS1 Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the port number information.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port. The name can contain up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. By default, the port name is blank.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
FDL Mode	Allows you to select the facility data link mode.
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown: The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed: The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service: The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service: The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.

C.3.9.6.2  Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-565) allows you to view and change the 15-minute path threshold information for the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-565 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the port number information.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.9.6.3  Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-566) allows you to view and change the 1-day path threshold information for the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-566 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the port number information.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
SAS-P	Displays severely errored frame/alarm indication signal-path information.
AISS-P	Displays alarm indication signal seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.

C.3.9.6.4  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-567) displays the customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-567 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
VT Number	Displays VT number information.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.

C.3.9.7  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab allows you to view and update DS3XM-12 loopback information. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•DS3 Subtab

•DS1 Subtab

C.3.9.7.1  DS3 Subtab

The DS3 subtab (see Table C-568) allows you to view and change the DS3 loopback information of the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-568 Field Descriptions for the DS3 Subtab 

Subfield	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).
Send Code	Allows you to select No Code (the default) or Line Loop Code. Selecting Line Loop Code inserts a line loop activate Far End Action Code (FEAC) in the CBIT overhead transmitting to the connected facility. This code initiates a loopback from the facility to the ONS 15454. Selecting No Code sends a line loop deactivate FEAC code to the connected equipment, which will remove the loopback. You can also insert an FEAC for the 28 individual DS-1 circuits transmuxed into a DS-3 circuit.
Inhibit FE Loopback	If the Inhibit FE Loopback check box is checked for a DS-3 port, that port will ignore any FEAC Line Loop codes and will not loop back. The port can still be put into loopback manually using the Loopback Type column even if the Inhibit FE Loopback check box is selected. Only DS-3 ports can be configured to inhibit responding to FEAC loopback commands.

C.3.9.7.2  DS1 Subtab

The DS1 subtab (see Table C-569) allows you to view and change the DS1 loopback information of the DS3XM-12 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-569 Field Descriptions for the DS1 Subtab 

Subfield	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).
Send Code	Allows you to select No Code (the default) or Line Loop Code. Selecting Line Loop Code inserts a line loop activate Far End Action Code (FEAC) in the CBIT overhead transmitting to the connected facility. This code initiates a loopback from the facility to the ONS 15454. Selecting No Code sends a line loop deactivate FEAC code to the connected equipment, which will remove the loopback. You can also insert an FEAC for the 28 individual DS-1 circuits transmuxed into a DS-3 circuit.
Derived State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note The Derived State field is only available for release 3.4.
Service State	Displays the service state of the CLIP or NCB. There are four states: •Unknown: The state cannot be determined. •Not Installed: The CLIP or NCB is not installed. •Out of Service: The CLIP or NCB is installed but is not commissioned and is not carrying traffic. •In Service: The CLIP or NCB is commissioned and carrying traffic.

C.3.9.8  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-570) allows you to view and update DS3XM-12 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-570 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.9.9  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-571) allows you to view and update DS3XM-12 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-571 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.9.10  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-572) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-572 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.3.9.11  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-573) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the DS3XM-12 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-573 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.10  Slot Properties—E1-N-14 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The 14-port ONS 15454 SDH E1-N-14 card provides 14 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. Each port of the card operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm, twisted-pair copper cable (with FMEC-E1) or over a 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable (with FMEC-E1).

For the E1-N-14 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-12, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.3.10.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E1-N-42 card that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphics.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its ports. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the module.

C.3.10.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-574) allows you to view and update E1-N-42 card identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-574 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	Displays the administration state. The state can either be Unlocked or Locked, Maintenance.
Service State	Displays the service state. It can be: •Locked-Disabled •Locked-Enabled •Unlocked-Disabled •Unlocked-Enabled
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.10.3  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to view and update E1-N-14 optical line performance monitoring information. The Line tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•MS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•MS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Elect Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Elect Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

C.3.10.3.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-575) allows you to view and change the line settings of the E1-N-14 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-575 Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Line Type	Sets the line framing type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the transmission coding type.
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Admin State	Displays the administration state. The state can either be Unlocked or Locked, Maintenance.
Service State	Displays the service state. It can be: •Locked-Disabled •Locked-Enabled •Unlocked-Disabled •Unlocked-Enabled

C.3.10.3.2  MS Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The MS Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-576) allows you to view the 15-minute multiplexer section threshold of the E1-N-14 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-576 Field Descriptions for the MS Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number
EB-L	Errored blocks-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal-line

C.3.10.3.3  MS Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The MS Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-577) allows you to view the 1-day multiplexer section threshold of the E1-N-14 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-577 Field Descriptions for the MS Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number
EB-L	Errored blocks-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal-line

C.3.10.3.4  Elect Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Elect Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-578) allows you to view the near- and far-end 15-minute electrical path threshold settings of the E1-N-14 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-578 Field Descriptions for the Elect Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number
EB-P	Errored blocks-path
BBE-P	Background block errors-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds - path
Far End
Port Number	Displays the port number
EB-P	Errored blocks-path
BBE-P	Background block errors-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds - path

C.3.10.3.5  Elect Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Elect Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-579) allows you to view the near- and far-end 1-day electrical path threshold settings of the E1-N-14 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-579 Field Descriptions for the Elect Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number
EB-P	Errored blocks-path
BBE-P	Background block errors-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path
Far End
Port Number	Displays the port number
EB-P	Errored blocks-path
BBE-P	Background block errors-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds-path

C.3.10.4  VC-12 Tab

The VC-12 tab allows you to view and update E1-N-14 VC-12 information. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.3.10.4.1  Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-580) allows you to view the near- and far-end 15-minute path threshold settings of the E1-N-14 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-580 Field Descriptions for the Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
VC Number	Displays the VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Far End
VC Number	Displays the VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path

C.3.10.4.2  Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-581) allows you to view the near- and far-end 1-day path threshold settings of the E1-N-14 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-581 Field Descriptions for the Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
VC Number	Displays the VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Far End
VC Number	Displays the VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path

C.3.10.4.3  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-582) allows you to view customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-582 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
VC Number	Displays the VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.10.5  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab allows you to view and update E1-N-14 VC-4 information. The tab contains the Customer Info subtab.

C.3.10.5.1  Customer Info

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-583) allows you to view customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-583 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab 

Field	Description
VC Number	Displays the VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.10.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-584) allows you to view and update E1-N-14 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-584 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Displays the administration state. The state can either be Unlocked or Locked, Maintenance.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port for terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None).
Service State	Displays the service state. It can be: •Locked-Disabled •Locked-Enabled •Unlocked-Disabled •Unlocked-Enabled

C.3.10.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-585) allows you to view and update E1-N-14 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-585 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays the list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.10.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-586) allows you to view and update E1-N-14 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-586 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force to all ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.10.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-587) allows you to view and update J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-587 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC4 Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents the machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.

C.3.10.10  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-588) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the E1-N-14 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-588 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.11  Slot Properties—E1-42 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120NP (Unprotected) card provides front-mount electrical connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120NP card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common Molex 96-pin LFH connector.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120PROA (1:3 Protect A) card provides front-mount electrical connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120PROA card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common Molex 96-pin LFH connector.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120PROB (1:3 Protect B) card provides front-mount electrical connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120PROB card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common Molex 96-pin LFH connector.

For the FMEC-E1-42 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.3.11.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FMEC-E1-42 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.3.11.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-589) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-589 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.12  Slot Properties—E-1 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH E-1 cards (E-1-N-14) provide fourteen E-1 ports. Each port operates at 2.048 Mbps.

For the E-1 card, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-12, Loopback, Protection, and Alarm Behavior.

C.3.12.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E-1 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.12.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-590) allows you to view and update E-1 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-590 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.12.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-591) allows you to view and update E-1 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-591 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the E1 transmission coding type.
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
State	Places the port in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. The tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-L	Coding violations - line
ES-L	Errored seconds - line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. The tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-L	Coding violations - line
ES-L	Errored seconds - line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds - line
Path Threshold 15 Minutes - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. The tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P/EB-P	Coding violations/errored bits - path
BBE-P	Background block errors - path
ES-P	Errored seconds - path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds - path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds - path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds - path
Path Threshold 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end section threshold information received during the past day. The tab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P/EB-P	Coding violations/errored bits - path
BBE-P	Background block errors - path
ES-P	Errored seconds - path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds - path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds - path
AISS-P	Alarm indication signal seconds - path

C.3.12.4  VC-12 Tab

The VC-12 tab (see Table C-592) allows you to view and update E-1 VC-12 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-592 Field Descriptions for the VC-12 Tab 

Field	Description
Threshold 15 Minutes - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end VC-12 information received during the past 15 minutes. The tab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB	Errored bits
BBE	Background block errors
ES	Errored seconds
SES	Severely errored seconds
UAS	Unavailable seconds
Threshold 1 Day - Near End, Far End
Displays near- and far-end VC-12 information received during the past day. The tab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB	Errored bits
BBE	Background block errors
ES	Errored seconds
SES	Severely errored seconds
UAS	Unavailable seconds
Customer Info
Displays customer information. The tab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.12.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-593) allows you to view and update E-1 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-593 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.3.12.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-594) allows you to view and update E-1 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-594 Field descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.12.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior (see Table C-595) tab allows you to view and update E-1 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-595 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.13  Slot Properties—EC1-12 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds. The EC1-12 provides 12 STS-1 electrical ports. Each port operates at 51.840 Mbps.

For the EC1 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.3.13.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the EC1 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.3.13.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-596) allows you to view and update EC1 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-596 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.3.13.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-597) allows you to view and update EC1 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-597 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Subfield	Description
Line Config
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the EC1 card part number (1 through 12).
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port. The name can contain up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. By default, the port name is blank.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
PJStsMon#	Allows you to set the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to zero, no STS is used.
Line Length	Defines the distance (in feet) from backplane connection to the next termination point. Values are 0 through 225 (default) or 226 through 450.
Rx Equalization	For early EC1 card versions, equalization can be turned off if the line length is short or the environment is extremely cold; Rx Equalization should normally be set to On (checked, default).
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The duration of valid input signal in hh.mm, after which the port is set in service by the software. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically. The range is 0 to 48 hours, in 15-minute increments.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 12)
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count (Near-end only)
PSD	Protection switching duration (Near-end only)
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number (1 to 12)
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count (Near-end only)
PSD	Protection switching duration (Near-end only)
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
Section Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 12)
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number (1 to 12)
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.3.13.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-598) allows you to view and update EC1 synchronous transport signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-598 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config	Displays the STS number, intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM), and XC loopback status.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end STS threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.3.13.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-599) allows you to view and update EC1 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-599 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number (1 to 12).
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.3.13.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-600) allows you to view and update EC1 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-600 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.3.13.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-601) allows you to view and update EC1 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-601 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.3.13.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-602) allows you to view and update J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-602 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.3.14  Slot Properties—FMEC-E3/DS3 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-E3/DS3 card provides front-mount electrical connection for 12 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-3 or DS-3 ports. With the FMEC-E3/DS3 card, each interface of an E3-12 card operates at 34.368 Mbps. Each interface of a DS3i-N-12 card operates at 44.736 Mbps over a 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial 1.0/2.3 miniature coaxial connector.

For the FMEC-E3/DS3 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.3.14.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FMEC-E3/DS3 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.3.14.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-603) allows you to view and update FMEC-E3/DS3 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-603 Field Description for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4  Ethernet Cards

This section describes the following Ethernet cards supported within CTM:

•Slot Properties—CE-100T-8 (ONS 15310)

•Slot Properties—CE-100T-8 (ONS 15454 SONET)

•Slot Properties—DS-N

•Slot Properties—E10/100T-4

•Slot Properties—E1000-2

•Slot Properties—E1000-2-G

•Slot Properties—E100T-12

•Slot Properties—E100T-G

•Slot Properties—E3-12 Card

•Slot Properties—ETH1000

•Slot Properties—G1000-2

•Slot Properties—G1000-4

•Slot Properties—ML-100T-8 Module

•Slot Properties—ML100T-12

•Slot Properties—ML1000-2

C.4.1  Slot Properties—CE-100T-8 (ONS 15310)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15310 CL slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The CE-100T-8 card is a subset of the ML-100T-8 card and provides an L1 mapping mode of operation. The card provides G-series-like behavior, but adds low- and high-order VCAT and LCAS features, as well as GFP. The CE-100T-8 card on the ONS 15310 interface interoperates with the CE-100T-8 card on the ONS 15454 platform. The card supports concatenation functions to construct transport trails (for example, STS-3c) for carrying packet data. The card provides contiguous, low-order, and high-order virtual concatenation. The CE-100T-8 card has its own PID and CLEI, and a port count that ranges from 1 to 8.

For the CE-100T-8 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, Ether Loopback, RMON Thresholds, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.4.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the CE-100T-8 module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.4.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-604) allows you to view and update CE-100T-8 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-604 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	Select the designation that drives whether an entity is in service or out of service. The Admin State is the driver for the Service State.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.1.3  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to view and update line performance monitoring information. The Line tab contains two subtabs:

•Ether Line Subtab

•POS Line Subtab

C.4.1.3.1  Ether Line Subtab

The Ether Line subtab (see Table C-605) allows you to view and change the Ether Line settings of the CE-100T-8 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-605 Field Descriptions for the Ether Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Admin State	Shows the administrative state of the port, In Service (IS), Out of Service-Disabled (OOS, DSBLD), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are Up, Down, or Not Present.
Expected Speed	Displays the expected speed for the Ether ports. Values are Auto, 10 Mbps, and Configurable.
Operating Speed	Displays the operating speed for the Ether ports. Values are Auto, 10 Mbps, and NonConfigurable.
Expected Duplex	Expected setting of the port.
Operating Duplex	Actual setting of the port. Possible values are Auto, Full, or Half.
Enable Flow Control	Check this check box to enable flow control for the selected port.
Flow Control	Displays the negotiated flow control mode. Values are None, Symmetrical, and Asymmetrical.
802.1Q VLAN CoS	Sets the IEEE 802.1Q standard VLAN class of service (CoS) threshold for priority queueing. Possible values are 0 through 7; 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority.
IP ToS	Sets the IP type of service (ToS) byte value for priority queueing. Possible values are 0 through 255.

C.4.1.3.2  POS Line Subtab

The POS Line subtab (see Table C-606) allows you to view and change the POS Line settings of the CE-100T-8 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-606 Field Descriptions for the POS Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Admin State	Shows the administrative state of the port, In Service (IS), Out of Service, Disabled (OOS, DSBLD), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are Up and Down.
Framing Type	Shows the encapsulation type. Possible values are: •HDLC—High-level data link control; does not support VLAN trunking; standard on most Cisco data devices •GFP-F—Frame-mapped generic framing procedure; a protocol data unit (PDU)-oriented adaptation mode that maps a client frame into one GFP frame •None—No framing type
Encap CRC	Sets the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) to verify the integrity of the transmitted data.
MTU	Maximum Transfer Unit. The largest acceptable packet size configured for that port. Default value is 1600.

C.4.1.4  Ether Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-607) allows you to view and update CE-100T-8 Ether loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-607 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service, Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed.

C.4.1.5  RMON Thresholds Tab

The RMON Thresholds tab allows you to view and create RMON thresholds. The RMON Thresholds tab contains two subtabs:

•POS Ports Subtab

•Ether Ports Subtab

C.4.1.5.1  POS Ports Subtab

The POS Ports subtab (see Table C-608) allows you to view the RMON thresholds for the POS ports. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-608 Field Descriptions for the POS Ports Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Displays the selected interface number.
Slot	Displays the selected card.
Port	Displays the port on the selected card.
Variable	Displays the MIB variable that is being monitored.
Alarm Type	Indicates whether the event is triggered by the rising threshold, falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type	Indicates whether the sample type is relative or absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Sample Period	Displays the sample period, in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the rising threshold.
Falling Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
Create	Click the Create button to create a RMON thresholds for the POS ports.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.4.1.5.2  Ether Ports Subtab

The Ether Ports subtab (see Table C-609) allows you to view the RMON thresholds for the Ether ports. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-609 Field Descriptions for the Ether Ports Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Displays the selected interface number.
Slot	Displays the selected card.
Port	Displays the port on the selected card.
Variable	Displays the MIB variable that is being monitored.
Alarm Type	Indicates whether the event is triggered by the rising threshold, falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type	Indicates whether the sample type is relative or absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Sample Period	Displays the sample period, in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the rising threshold.
Falling Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
Create	Click the Create button to create a RMON thresholds for the Ether ports.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.4.1.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The Alarm Behavior tab contains the following subtabs:

•Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab

•POS Alarm Behavior Subtab

C.4.1.6.1  Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Ether Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-610) allows you to view and update Ether alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-610 Field Descriptions for the Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.1.6.2  POS Alarm Behavior Subtab

The POS Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-611) allows you to view and update POS alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-611 Field Descriptions for the POS Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.1.7  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-612) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-612 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Circuit Type	Displays the circuit type.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.

C.4.1.8  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-613) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the CE-100T-8. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-613 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.2  Slot Properties—CE-100T-8 (ONS 15454 SONET)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454SONET module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The CE-100T-8 is a Layer 1 mapper card with eight 10/100 Ethernet ports. It maps each port to a unique SONET circuit in a point-to-point configuration.

The CE-100T-8 cards allow you to provision and manage an Ethernet private line service as if it were a traditional SONET line. CE-100T-8 card applications include providing carrier-grade transparent LAN services (TLS), Ethernet private line services, and high-availability transport.

The CE-100T-8 card is a standard ONS line card and supports ITU-T G.707 and Telcordia GR-253 based standards for SONET. It offers the same carrier-class level of features and reliability as ONS SONET optical cards or electrical line cards.

For the ONS 15454 SONET CE-100T-8 card, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, Ether Loopback, RMON Thresholds, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.4.2.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the Transmitter Transponders PM Table.

C.4.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-614) allows you to view and update CE-100T-8 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-614 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	Select the designation that drives whether an entity is in service or out of service. The Admin State is the driver for the Service State.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.2.3  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to view and update performance monitoring information. The Line tab contains two subtabs:

•Ether Line Subtab

•POS Line Subtab

C.4.2.3.1  Ether Line Subtab

The Ether Line subtab (see Table C-615) allows you to view and change the Ether Line settings of the CE-100T-8 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-615 Field Descriptions for the Ether Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Admin State	Shows the administrative state of the port, In Service (IS), Out of Service-Disabled (OOS, DSBLD), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are Up, Down, or Not Present.
Expected Speed	Displays the expected speed for the Ether ports. Values are Auto, 10 Mbps, and Configurable.
Operating Speed	Displays the operating speed for the Ether ports. Values are Auto, 10 Mbps, and NonConfigurable.
Expected Duplex	Expected setting of the port.
Operating Duplex	Actual setting of the port. Possible values are Auto, Full, or Half.
Enable Flow Control	Check this check box to enable flow control for the selected port.
Flow Control	Displays the negotiated flow control mode. Values are None, Symmetrical, and Asymmetrical.
802.1Q VLAN CoS	Sets the IEEE 802.1Q standard VLAN class of service (CoS) threshold for priority queueing. Possible values are 0 through 7; 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority.
IP ToS	Sets the IP type of service (ToS) byte value for priority queueing. Possible values are 0 through 255.

C.4.2.3.2  POS Line Subtab

The POS Line subtab (see Table C-616) allows you to view and change POS Line settings of the CE-100T-8 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-616 Field Descriptions for the POS Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Admin State	Shows the administrative state of the port, In Service (IS), Out of Service-Disabled (OOS, DSBLD), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are Up and Down.
Framing Type	Shows the encapsulation type. Possible values are: •HDLC—High-level data link control; does not support VLAN trunking; standard on most Cisco data devices •GFP-F—Frame-mapped generic framing procedure; a protocol data unit (PDU)-oriented adaptation mode that maps a client frame into one GFP frame. •None—No framing type.
Encap CRC	Sets the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) to verify the integrity of the transmitted data.
MTU	Maximum Transfer Unit. The largest acceptable packet size configured for that port. Default value is 1600.

C.4.2.4  Ether Loopback Tab

The Ether Loopback tab (see Table C-617) allows you to view and update loopback information. The Loopback tab contains the following fields.

Table C-617 Field Descriptions for the Ether Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be in In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT) state.
Loopback	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed

C.4.2.5  RMON Thresholds Tab

The RMON Thresholds tab allows you to view RMON thresholds and create new RMON thresholds. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•POS Ports Subtab

•Ether Ports Subtab

C.4.2.5.1  POS Ports Subtab

The POS Ports subtab (see Table C-618) allows you to view the RMON thresholds for the POS ports. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-618 Field Descriptions for the POS Ports Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	The index number.
Slot	Select a slot for the new threshold.
Port	Select a port for the selected slot. If you select All, the threshold will be created on all ports for that slot. This operation may take several minutes to complete.
Variable	The MIB variable to monitor. Supported variables are cportQosDropPkts and cportQosDropOctets in the cportQosStatsTable in CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB.
Alarm Type	Select an alarm type for the new FC_MR threshold. Indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type	The sample type (relative or absolute). Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Sample Period	Enter a sample period for the new threshold. The sample period is measured in seconds.
Rising Threshold	The number of occurrences for the rising threshold. Note For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a falling threshold of 400 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Falling Threshold	The number of occurrences for the falling threshold. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold. A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 minutes subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 minutes, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over 1000 per 15 minute period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Create	Click the Create button to create a RMON thresholds for the POS ports.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.4.2.5.2  Ether Ports Subtab

The Ether Ports subtab (see Table C-619) allows you to view the RMON thresholds for the Ether ports. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-619 Field Descriptions for the Ether Ports Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	The index number.
Slot	Select a slot for the new threshold.
Port	Select a port for the selected slot. If you select All, the threshold will be created on all ports for that slot. This operation may take several minutes to complete.
Variable	The MIB variable to monitor. Supported variables are cportQosDropPkts and cportQosDropOctets in the cportQosStatsTable in CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB.
Alarm Type	Select an alarm type for the new FC_MR threshold. Indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type	The sample type (relative or absolute). Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Sample Period	Enter a sample period for the new threshold. The sample period is measured in seconds.
Rising Threshold	The number of occurrences for the rising threshold. Note For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a falling threshold of 400 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Falling Threshold	The number of occurrences for the falling threshold. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold. A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 minutes subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 minutes, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over 1000 per 15 minute period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Create	Click the Create button to create a RMON thresholds for the Ether ports.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.4.2.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The Alarm Behavior tab contains the following subtabs:

•Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab

•POS Alarm Behavior Subtab

C.4.2.6.1  Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Ether Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-620) allows you to view and update Ether alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-620 Field Descriptions for the Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.2.6.2  POS Alarm Behavior Subtab

The POS Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-621) allows you to view and update POS alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-621 Field Descriptions for the POS Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.2.7  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-622) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-622 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Circuit Type	Displays the circuit type.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.

C.4.2.8  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-623) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the CE-100T-8. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-623 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.3  Slot Properties—DS-N

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

For the DS-N module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, and Protection.

C.4.3.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the DS-N that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-624) allows you to view and update DS-N identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-624 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the card revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.3.3  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-625) allows you to view and update protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-625 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
State of Slot x	Displays the state of the selected slot and of the companion DS-N slot.
Switch	Click to switch the selected slot from its current state to the other states.
Lock	Click to lock the selected slot into its current state.
Unlock	Click to unlock the current slot from its current state.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.4  Slot Properties—E10/100T-4

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SONET and ONS 15454 SDH E10/100T-4 cards incorporate Layer 2 switching, while the G-series card is a straight mapper card. The ONS 15454 E-series cards include the E100T-12/E100T-G and E1000-2/E1000-2-G. E-series cards support VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q, spanning tree, and IEEE 802.1D. An ONS 15454 holds a maximum of ten Ethernet cards, which can be inserted in any multipurpose slot.

For the E10/100T-4 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Line, VLAN, and Alarm Behavior.

C.4.4.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E10/100T-4 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.4.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-626) allows you to view and update E10/100T-4 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-626 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.4.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-627) allows you to view and update E10/100T-4 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-627 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Enabled	If checked, the corresponding port is enabled.
Queue Priority	Allows you to select the priority queue for the port.
STP Enabled	If checked, indicates that Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled for the card.
STP State	Displays the current STP state.

C.4.4.4  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-628) allows you to view and update E10/100T-4 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-628 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
Mode	Allows you to select the appropriate mode for each Ethernet port. Valid choices for the E100T-12/E100T-G card are Auto, 10 Half, 10 Full, 100 Half, or 100 Full. Valid choices for the E1000-2/E1000-2-G card are 1000 Full or Auto.
Status	Displays the current optical line status.

C.4.4.5  VLAN Tab

The VLAN tab (see Table C-629) allows you to view and update E10/100T-4 VLAN information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-629 Field Descriptions for the VLAN Tab 

Field	Description
VLAN	Displays the name of the VLAN.
Port x	If a port is a member of only one VLAN, select Untag from the Port column. The VLAN with Untag selected can connect to the port, but other VLANs cannot access that port. If a port is a trunk port, it connects multiple VLANs to an external device, such as a switch, which also supports trunking. A trunk port must have tagging (802.1Q) enabled for all VLANs that connect to that external device. Select Tagged at all VLAN rows that need to be trunked. Select Untag at one or more VLAN rows in the trunk port column that do not need to be trunked, for example, the default VLAN. Each Ethernet port must attached to at least one untagged VLAN.

C.4.4.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-630) allows you to view and update E10/100T-4 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-630 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the ETH100 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all ETH100 ports.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.5  Slot Properties—E1000-2

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 SDH E1000-2 cards incorporate Layer 2 switching, while the G-series card is a straight mapper card. The ONS 15454 E-series cards include the E100T-12/E100T-G and E1000-2/E1000-2-G. E-series cards support VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q, spanning tree, and IEEE 802.1D. An ONS 15454 holds a maximum of ten Ethernet cards, which can be inserted in any multipurpose slot.

For the E1000-2 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Line, VLAN, and Alarm Behavior.

C.4.5.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E1000-2 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.5.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-631) allows you to view and update E1000-2 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-631 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.5.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-632) allows you to view and update E1000-2 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-632 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Enabled	If checked, the corresponding port is enabled.
Queue Priority	Allows you to select the priority queue for the port.
STP Enabled	If checked, indicates that Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled for the card.
STP State	Displays the current STP state.

C.4.5.4  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-633) allows you to view and update E1000-2 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-633 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
Mode	Allows you to select the appropriate mode for each Ethernet port. Valid choices for the E100T-12/E100T-G card are Auto, 10 Half, 10 Full, 100 Half, or 100 Full. Valid choices for the E1000-2/E1000-2-G card are 1000 Full or Auto.
Status	Displays the current optical line status.

C.4.5.5  VLAN Tab

The VLAN tab (see Table C-634) allows you to view and update E1000-2 VLAN information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-634 Field Descriptions for the VLAN Tab 

Field	Description
VLAN	Displays the name of the VLAN.
Port x	If a port is a member of only one VLAN, select Untag from the Port column. The VLAN with Untag selected can connect to the port, but other VLANs cannot access that port. If a port is a trunk port, it connects multiple VLANs to an external device, such as a switch, which also supports trunking. A trunk port must have tagging (802.1Q) enabled for all VLANs that connect to that external device. Select Tagged at all VLAN rows that need to be trunked. Select Untag at one or more VLAN rows in the trunk port column that do not need to be trunked, for example, the default VLAN. Each Ethernet port must attached to at least one untagged VLAN.

C.4.5.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-635) allows you to view and update E1000-2 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-635 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the ETH100 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all ETH100 ports.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.6  Slot Properties—E1000-2-G

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 SDH E1000-2-G cards incorporate Layer 2 switching, while the G-series card is a straight mapper card. The ONS 15454 E-series cards include the E100T-12/E100T-G and E1000-2/E1000-2-G. E-series cards support VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q, spanning tree, and IEEE 802.1D. An ONS 15454 holds a maximum of ten Ethernet cards, which can be inserted in any multipurpose slot.

For the E1000-2-G module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Line, VLAN, and Alarm Behavior.

C.4.6.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E1000-2-G that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.6.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-636) allows you to view and update E1000-2-G identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-636 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.6.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-637) allows you to view and update E1000-2-G port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-637 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Enabled	If checked, the corresponding port is enabled.
Queue Priority	Allows you to select the priority queue for the port.
STP Enabled	If checked, indicates that Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled for the card.
STP State	Displays the current STP state.

C.4.6.4  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-638) allows you to view and update E1000-2-G line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-638 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
Mode	Allows you to select the appropriate mode for each Ethernet port. Valid choices for the E100T-12/E100T-G card are Auto, 10 Half, 10 Full, 100 Half, or 100 Full. Valid choices for the E1000-2/E1000-2-G card are 1000 Full or Auto.
Status	Displays the current optical line status.

C.4.6.5  VLAN Tab

The VLAN tab (see Table C-639) allows you to view and update E1000-2-G VLAN information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-639 Field Descriptions for the VLAN Tab 

Field	Description
VLAN	Displays the name of the VLAN.
Port x	If a port is a member of only one VLAN, select Untag from the Port column. The VLAN with Untag selected can connect to the port, but other VLANs cannot access that port. If a port is a trunk port, it connects multiple VLANs to an external device, such as a switch, which also supports trunking. A trunk port must have tagging (802.1Q) enabled for all VLANs that connect to that external device. Select Tagged at all VLAN rows that need to be trunked. Select Untag at one or more VLAN rows in the trunk port column that do not need to be trunked, for example, the default VLAN. Each Ethernet port must attached to at least one untagged VLAN.

C.4.6.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-640) allows you to view and update E1000-2-G alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-640 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the ETH100 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all ETH100 ports.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.7  Slot Properties—E100T-12

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 SDH E100T-12 cards incorporate Layer 2 switching, while the G-series card is a straight mapper card. The ONS 15454 E-series cards include the E100T-12/E100T-G and E1000-2/E1000-2-G. E-series cards support VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q, spanning tree, and IEEE 802.1D. An ONS 15454 holds a maximum of ten Ethernet cards, which can be inserted in any multipurpose slot.

For the E100T-12 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Line, VLAN, and Alarm Behavior.

C.4.7.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E100T-12 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.7.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-641) allows you to view and update E100T-12 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-641 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.7.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-642) allows you to view and update E100T-12 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-642 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Enabled	If checked, the corresponding port is enabled.
Queue Priority	Allows you to select the priority queue for the port.
STP Enabled	If checked, indicates that Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled for the card.
STP State	Displays the current STP state.

C.4.7.4  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-643) allows you to view and update E100T-12 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-643 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
Mode	Allows you to select the appropriate mode for each Ethernet port. Valid choices for the E100T-12/E100T-G card are Auto, 10 Half, 10 Full, 100 Half, or 100 Full. Valid choices for the E1000-2/E1000-2-G card are 1000 Full or Auto.
Status	Displays the current optical line status.

C.4.7.5  VLAN Tab

The VLAN tab (see Table C-644) allows you to view and update E100T-12 VLAN information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-644 Field Descriptions for the VLAN Tab 

Field	Description
VLAN	Displays the name of the VLAN.
Port x	If a port is a member of only one VLAN, select Untag from the Port column. The VLAN with Untag selected can connect to the port, but other VLANs cannot access that port. If a port is a trunk port, it connects multiple VLANs to an external device, such as a switch, which also supports trunking. A trunk port must have tagging (802.1Q) enabled for all VLANs that connect to that external device. Select Tagged at all VLAN rows that need to be trunked. Select Untag at one or more VLAN rows in the trunk port column that do not need to be trunked, for example, the default VLAN. Each Ethernet port must attached to at least one untagged VLAN.

C.4.7.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-645) allows you to view and update E100T-12 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-645 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the ETH100 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all ETH100 ports.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.8  Slot Properties—E100T-G

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 SDH E100T-G cards incorporate Layer 2 switching, while the G-series card is a straight mapper card. The ONS 15454 E-series cards include the E100T-12/E100T-G and E1000-2/E1000-2-G. E-series cards support VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q, spanning tree, and IEEE 802.1D. An ONS 15454 holds a maximum of ten Ethernet cards, which can be inserted in any multipurpose slot.

For the E100T-G module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Line, VLAN, and Alarm Behavior.

C.4.8.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E100T-G that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.8.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-646) allows you to view and update E100T-G identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-646 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.8.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-647) allows you to view and update E100T-G port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-647 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Enabled	If checked, the corresponding port is enabled.
Queue Priority	Allows you to select the priority queue for the port.
STP Enabled	If checked, indicates that Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled for the card.
STP State	Displays the current STP state.

C.4.8.4  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-648) allows you to view and update E100T-G line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-648 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
Mode	Allows you to select the appropriate mode for each Ethernet port. Valid choices for the E100T-12/E100T-G card are Auto, 10 Half, 10 Full, 100 Half, or 100 Full. Valid choices for the E1000-2/E1000-2-G card are 1000 Full or Auto.
Status	Displays the current optical line status.

C.4.8.5  VLAN Tab

The VLAN tab (see Table C-649) allows you to view and update E100T-G VLAN information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-649 Field Descriptions for the VLAN Tab 

Field	Description
VLAN	Displays the name of the VLAN.
Port x	If a port is a member of only one VLAN, select Untag from the Port column. The VLAN with Untag selected can connect to the port, but other VLANs cannot access that port. If a port is a trunk port, it connects multiple VLANs to an external device, such as a switch, which also supports trunking. A trunk port must have tagging (802.1Q) enabled for all VLANs that connect to that external device. Select Tagged at all VLAN rows that need to be trunked. Select Untag at one or more VLAN rows in the trunk port column that do not need to be trunked, for example, the default VLAN. Each Ethernet port must attached to at least one untagged VLAN.

C.4.8.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-650) allows you to view and update E100T-G alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-650 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the ETH100 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all ETH100 ports.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.9  Slot Properties—E3-12 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH E3-12 cards provides twelve E3 ports. Each port operates at 34.368 Mbps.

For the E3-12 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-3, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.4.9.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the E3-12 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.4.9.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-651) allows you to view and update E3-12 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-651 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.9.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-652) allows you to view and update E3-12 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-652 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal-line; number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-L	Coding violations-line
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
LOSS-L	Loss of signal-line; number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path

C.4.9.4  VC-3 Tab

The VC-3 tab (see Table C-653) allows you to view and update E3-12 VC-3 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-653 Field Descriptions for the VC-3 Tab 

Field	Description
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end VC-3 information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end VC-3 information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. The tab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.4.9.5  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-654) allows you to view and update E3-12 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-654 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end VC-4 information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number. Displays as VC4-x, with x = 1,2,3, or 4.
EB-HP	Errored block-higher order path
BBE-HP	Background block errors-higher order path
ES-HP	Errored seconds-higher order path
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-higher order path
UAS-HP	Unavailable seconds-higher order path
Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end VC-4 information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number. Displays as VC4-x, with x = 1,2,3, or 4.
EB-HP	Errored block-higher order path
BBE-HP	Background block errors-higher order path
ES-HP	Errored seconds-higher order path
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-higher order path
UAS-HP	Unavailable seconds-higher order path

C.4.9.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-655) allows you to view and update E3-12 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-655 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.4.9.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-656) allows you to view and update E3-12 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-656 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.4.9.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-657) allows you to view and update E3-12 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-657 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.4.9.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-658) allows you to view and retrieve E3-12 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-658 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Mem Num	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.10  Slot Properties—ETH1000

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 SDH ETH1000 cards incorporate Layer 2 switching, while the G-series card is a straight mapper card. The ONS 15454 E-series cards include the E100T-12/E100T-G and E1000-2/E1000-2-G. E-series cards support VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q, spanning tree, and IEEE 802.1D. An ONS 15454 holds a maximum of ten Ethernet cards, which can be inserted in any multipurpose slot.

For the ETH1000 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Line, VLAN, and Alarm Behavior.

C.4.10.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the ETH1000 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.10.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-659) allows you to view and update ETH1000 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-659 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the hardware revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard Ether Switch group, a single-card Ether Switch group, or the Port Mapped mode for E-series cards.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.10.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-660) allows you to view and update ETH1000 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-660 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Enabled	If checked, the corresponding port is enabled.
Queue Priority	Allows you to select the priority queue for the port.
STP Enabled	If checked, indicates that Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled for the port.
STP State	Displays the current STP state.

C.4.10.4  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-661) allows you to view and update ETH1000 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-661 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
Mode	Allows you to select the appropriate mode for each Ethernet port. Valid choices for the E1000-2/E1000-2-G card are 1000 Full or Auto.
Status	Displays the current optical line status.

C.4.10.5  VLAN Tab

The VLAN tab (see Table C-662) allows you to view and update ETH1000 VLAN information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-662 Field Descriptions for the VLAN Tab 

Field	Description
VLAN	Displays the name of the VLAN.
Port x	If a port is a member of only one VLAN, select Untag from the Port column. Select-- for all the other VLAN rows in that Port column. The VLAN with Untag selected can connect to the port, but other VLANs cannot access that port. If a port is a trunk port, it connects multiple VLANs to an external device, such as a switch, which also supports trunking. A trunk port must have tagging (802.1Q) enabled for all VLANs that connect to that external device. Select Tagged at all VLAN rows that need to be trunked. Select Untag at one or more VLAN rows in the trunk port column that do not need to be trunked, for example, the default VLAN. Each Ethernet port must attached to exactly one untagged VLAN.

C.4.10.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-663) allows you to view and update ETH1000 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-663 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the ETH1000 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all ETH1000 ports.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.11  Slot Properties—G1000-2

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15327 G1000-2 card reliably transports Ethernet and IP data across a SONET backbone. The G1000-2 card maps up to two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces onto a SONET transport network. A single card provides scalable and provisionable transport bandwidth at the signal levels up to STS-48c per card. The card provides line rate forwarding for all Ethernet frames (unicast, multicast, and broadcast) and can be configured to support Jumbo frames (defined as a maximum of 10,000 bytes).

For the G1000-2 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Loopback, Thresholds, and Alarm Behavior.

C.4.11.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the G1000-2 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.4.11.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-664) allows you to view and update G1000-2 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-664 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.11.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-665) allows you to view and update G1000-2 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-665 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Max Frame	To permit the acceptance of jumbo size Ethernet frames, select Jumbo (default). If you do not want to permit jumbo size Ethernet frames, select 1548.
Flow Control Negotiated	Click this check box to enable flow control negotiation on the port (default). If you do not want to enable flow control, uncheck the box. To activate flow control, the Ethernet device attached to the G1000-2 card must be set to autonegotiation. If flow control is enabled but the negotiation status indicates no flow control, check the autonegotiation settings on the attached Ethernet device.
Negotiation Status	Displays the result of the most-recent autonegotiation. The type of flow control that was negotiated will be displayed.
Media Type	Indicates the type of SFP installed.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Water Marks	Watermarks can either be Custom, Low Latency, or Default.
Flow Control Low	Displays the minimum flow control.
Flow Control High	Displays the maximum flow control

C.4.11.4  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-666) allows you to view and update G1000-2 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-666 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the state of the port.
Loopback	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.4.11.5  Thresholds Tab

The Thresholds tab (see Table C-667) allows you to create, view, and delete G1000-2 thresholds. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-667 Field Descriptions for the Threshold Tabs 

Field	Description
Index #	A unique value that identifies the different thresholds currently existing on the NE.
Slot	Select a slot for the new Ether threshold.
Port	Select a port for the selected slot. If you select All, the threshold will be created on all ports for that slot. This operation may take several minutes to complete.
Variable	Select a variable for the new Ether threshold. Available variables will differ based on the type of card selected in the Slot field.
Alarm Type	Select an alarm type for the new Ether threshold. Available alarm types are Rising, Falling, and Rising and Falling.
Sample Type	Select a sample type for the new Ether threshold. Available sample types are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of any time period.
Sample Period	Enter a sample period for the new Ether threshold. The sample period is measured in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Enter a rising threshold for the new Ether threshold. The value must be equal to or greater than the Falling Threshold value.
Falling Threshold	Enter a falling threshold for the new Ether threshold. The value must be equal to or less than the rising threshold value.
Create	Click the Create button to create a G1000-2 thresholds.
Delete	Select a G1000-2 threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.4.11.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-668) allows you to view and update G1000-2 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-668 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the G1000-2 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all G1000-2 ports.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.12  Slot Properties—G1000-4

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327, ONS 15454 SONET, or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this property sheet to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SONET G1000-4 card reliably transports Ethernet and IP data across a SONET backbone. The G1000-4 card maps up to four Gigabit Ethernet interfaces onto a SONET transport network. A single card provides scalable and provisionable transport bandwidth at the signal levels up to STS-48c per card. The card provides line rate forwarding for all Ethernet frames (unicast, multicast, and broadcast) and can be configured to support Jumbo frames (defined as a maximum of 10,000 bytes).

For ONS 15454 SDH NEs, the G1000-4 card provides four ports of IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each interface supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps bidirectional per port, and 2.5 Gbps or 5 Gbps bidirectional per card. Each port autonegotiates for full duplex and 802.3x flow control. The G1000-4 card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces.

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-48.

Figure C-48 G1000-4 Module Graphic

For the G1000-4 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Port, Loopback, Thresholds, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.4.12.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the G1000-4 that is installed in the slot. In the module graphic the small arrows indicate the transponder mode. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to add, delete, change, or reset the module.

C.4.12.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-669) allows you to view and update G1000-4 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-669 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Card Mode	Allows you to select a multicard or single-card EtherSwitch modes for E-series cards.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.12.3  Port Tab

The Port tab (see Table C-670) allows you to view and update G1000-4 port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-670 Field Descriptions for the Port Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the card port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
Max Frame	To permit the acceptance of jumbo-size Ethernet frames, select Jumbo (default). If you do not want to permit jumbo-size Ethernet frames, select 1548.
Flow Control Negotiated	Click this check box to enable flow control negotiation on the port (default). If you do not want to enable flow control, uncheck the box. To activate flow control, the Ethernet device attached to the G1000-4 card must be set to autonegotiation. If flow control is enabled but the negotiation status indicates no flow control, check the autonegotiation settings on the attached Ethernet device.
Negotiation Status	Displays the result of the most-recent autonegotiation. The type of flow control that was negotiated will be displayed.
Media Type	Indicates the type of SFP installed.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Transponder Port	Ports in the transponding mode.
Transponder Mode	The GigE Ethernet Transponder can be set for 3 different operation modes: •Two ports bidirectional transponder mode (Tx and Rx of one port can be mapped into Rx and Tx of another port) •One port bidirectional transponding mode (Ethernet frames received at port Rx will be transmitted out at the same port Tx) •Two ports unidirectional transponding mode (Ethernet frames received at one port Rx will be transmitted out at another port Tx). In the module view the small arrows indicate the transponder mode (see the module graphic in the Module View tab description).
Water Marks	Adjustable buffers for flow control.
Flow Control Low	Flow control low value.
Flow Control High	Flow control high value.

C.4.12.4  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-671) allows you to view and update G1000-4 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-671 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the state of the port.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.4.12.5  Thresholds Tab

The Thresholds tab (see Table C-672) allows you to create, view, and delete G1000-4 thresholds. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-672 Field Descriptions for the Thresholds Tab 

Field	Description
Index #	A unique value that identifies the different thresholds currently existing on the NE.
Slot	Select a slot for the new Ether threshold.
Port	Select a port for the selected slot. If you select All, the threshold will be created on all ports for that slot. This operation may take several minutes to complete.
Variable	Select a variable for the new Ether threshold. Available variables will differ based on the type of card selected in the Slot field.
Alarm Type	Select an alarm type for the new Ether threshold. Available alarm types are Rising, Falling, and Rising and Falling.
Sample Type	Select a sample type for the new Ether threshold. Available sample types are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of any time period.
Sample Period	Enter a sample period for the new Ether threshold. The sample period is measured in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Enter a rising threshold for the new Ether threshold. The value must be equal or greater than the Falling Threshold value.
Falling Threshold	Enter a falling threshold for the new Ether threshold. The value must be equal or less than the rising threshold value.

C.4.12.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-673) allows you to view and update G1000-4 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-673 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the G1000-4 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarms profile to all G1000-4 ports.

C.4.12.7  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-674) allows you to view and retrieve G1000-4 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-674 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Column	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.13  Slot Properties—ML-100T-8 Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15310 CL slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ML-100T-8 card provides feature parity with the ONS 15454 ML card features. The ML-100T-8 card interoperates with ML-series cards as a hub node, and also interoperates with other ML cards on an RPR ring. The card also supports concatenation functions to construct transport trails (for example, VC-4-4c) for carrying packet data. The card provides contiguous, low-order, and high-order virtual concatenation. The ML-100T-8 card has its own PID and CLEI, and a port count that ranges from 0 to 7.

For the ML-100T-8 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Configuration, Line, Card Parameters, L2 Service Drops, POS PM, Ether PM, RMON Thresholds, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.4.13.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the ML-100T-8 module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset or delete the card.

C.4.13.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-675) allows you to view and update ML-100T-8 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-675 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	Select the designation that drives whether an entity is in service or out of service. The Admin State is the driver for the Service State.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.13.3  Configuration Tab

The Configuration tab (see Table C-676) allows you to upload or download a configuration file for the ML-100T-8 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-676 Field Descriptions for the Configuration Tab 

Field	Description
Source	Displays the source of the configuration file.
Host	Displays the host machine where the configuration file is stored, or the location where the file will be downloaded.
File Name	Displays the name of the configuration file.
Directory	Displays the directory on the host machine for the configuration file.
Time Stamp	Displays the date and time of the file upload or download. The time stamp shows the time on the NE, not the time on the CTM server. Note You can update the time stamp on the NE in the node-level NE Explorer > Identification tab.
CTX >> File	Click this button to download the file from the CTX card to the host machine. Select Local or Server in the CTX >> File dialog box to designate a location for the file.
File >> CTX	Click this button to upload the file from the host machine to the CTX card. Select Local or Server in the File >> CTX dialog box to designate a location for the file.
Launch CLI	Click this button to launch the command line interface (CLI).

C.4.13.4  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to view and update performance monitoring information. The Line tab contains two subtabs:

•Ether Line Subtab

•POS Line Subtab

C.4.13.4.1  Ether Line Subtab

The Ether Line subtab (see Table C-677) allows you to view and change the Ether Line settings of the ML-100T-8 module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-677 Field Descriptions for the Ether Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
State	Displays the state of the port. Possible values are Up and Down.
Link State	Displays the link state. Possible values are Up and Down.
Operating Speed	Displays the operating speed of the Ether interface. Possible values are Auto, 10 Mbps, or 100 Mbps.
Operating Duplex	The setting of the port. Possible values are Auto, Full, or Half.
Flow Control	Displays the negotiated flow control mode. Values are None, Symmetrical, and Asymmetrical.

C.4.13.4.2  POS Line Subtab

The POS Line subtab (see Table C-678) allows you to view and change the POS Line settings of the ML-100T-8 module. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-678 Field Descriptions for the POS Line Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
State	Displays the state of the port. Possible values are Up and Down.
Link State	Displays the link state. Possible values are Up and Down.
MTU	Maximum Transfer Unit. The largest acceptable packet size configured for that port. Default value is 1600.

C.4.13.5  Card Parameters Tab

The Card Parameters tab (see Table C-679) allows you to view card parameter settings. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-679 Field Descriptions for the Card Parameters Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	The port number.
Port Sub Interface	The port subinterface.
Bridge Group	The bridge group.
CIR	The committed information rate. The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second.
CIR Burst	The maximum CIR burst. The default is 8000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes.
PIR	The peak information rate. The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second. PIR should be greater than or equal to CIR.
PIR Burst	The maximum PIR burst. The default is 64000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes. PIR burst should be greater than or equal to CIR burst.
CCOSTRANSMIT	This keyword comes from the grammar file for the police command. For confirm action, the set-cos-transmit keyword specifies the set cos value. This value is used to determine the QoS configured on the front port of the ML card. A CCOSTRANSMIT value of 0 means a best effort policy has been configured for this port (FE/GE_IN). Other values are: 1: Best Effort (for Policy_Qos_Out) 2: CIR 3: CONTROL 4: VOICE 5: VIDEO 6: VOICE_VIDEO 7: MISSION_CRITICAL 8: SP_MANAGEMENT The card parameters shown on the NE Explorer are only for Policy_FE/GE_IN, meaning CCOSTRANSMIT is 0 or 2 (what VLAN provisioning supports).

C.4.13.6  L2 Service Drops Tab

The L2 Service Drops tab (see Table C-680) allows you to view L2 service drop configuration settings. Click the Show QoS Parameters button to open the QoS for L2 Service Drop Port table, which shows the QoS for the selected drop. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-680 Field Descriptions for the L2 Service Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	The port number.
Port Sub Interface	The port subinterface.
Topology Name	The topology name.
SP VLAN ID	The service provider VLAN ID.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.
Bridge Group	The bridge group.
Port Type	The port type (UNI or NNI).
Connection Type	The connection type (Dot1Q, Untagged, or QinQ).
Policing	The QoS policy configured on the selected front port interface or subinterface. Supported values are CIR/PIR and Best Effort.

C.4.13.7  POS PM Tab

The POS PM tab (see Table C-681) allows you to enable IOS PM on the POS port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-681 Field Descriptions for the POS PM Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number.
Accounting	Indicates whether PM is enabled on the POS or not.

C.4.13.8  Ether PM Tab

The Ether PM Tab (see Table C-682) allows you to enable IOS PM on the Ether port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-682 Field Descriptions for the Ether PM Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number.
Accounting	Indicates whether or not the PM is enabled on the Ether port.

C.4.13.9  RMON Thresholds Tab

The RMON Thresholds tab allows you to view and create RMON thresholds. The RMON Thresholds tab contains two subtabs:

•POS Ports Subtab

•Ether Ports Subtab

C.4.13.9.1  POS Ports Subtab

The POS Ports subtab (see Table C-683) allows you to view the RMON thresholds for the POS ports. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-683 Field Descriptions for the POS Ports Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Displays the selected interface number.
Slot	Displays the selected card.
Port	Displays the port on the selected card.
Variable	Displays the MIB variable that is being monitored.
Alarm Type	Indicates whether the event is triggered by the rising threshold, falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type	Indicates whether the sample type is relative or absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Sample Period	Displays the sample period, in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the rising threshold.
Falling Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
Create	Click the Create button to create a RMON thresholds for the POS ports.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.4.13.9.2  Ether Ports Subtab

The Ether Ports subtab (see Table C-684) allows you to view the RMON thresholds for the Ether ports. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-684 Field Descriptions for the Ether Ports Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Displays the selected interface number.
Slot	Displays the selected card.
Port	Displays the port on the selected card.
Variable	Displays the MIB variable that is being monitored.
Alarm Type	Indicates whether the event is triggered by the rising threshold, falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type	Indicates whether the sample type is relative or absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Sample Period	Displays the sample period, in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the rising threshold.
Falling Threshold	Displays the number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
Create	Click the Create button to create a RMON thresholds for the Ether ports.
Delete	Select an RMON threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.4.13.10  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab allows you to view and update card alarm profile information. The Alarm Behavior tab contains the following subtabs:

•Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab

•POS Alarm Behavior Subtab

C.4.13.10.1  Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Ether Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-685) allows you to view and update Ether alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-685 Field Descriptions for the Ether Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.13.10.2  POS Alarm Behavior Subtab

The POS Alarm Behavior subtab (see Table C-686) allows you to view and update POS alarm profile information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-686 Field Descriptions for the POS Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Select the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Alarm Profile	Displays the alarm profile for the port.
Suppress Alarms	Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.13.11  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-687) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-687 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Circuit Type	Displays the circuit type.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.

C.4.13.12  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-688) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the ML-100T-8 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-688 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.14  Slot Properties—ML100T-12

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ML-series cards are Gigabit Ethernet (ML1000-2) and Fast Ethernet (ML100T-12) multilayer switches integrated into the ONS 15454 platform. An ML-series card fits in the standard card slot of an ONS 15454 chassis.

For the ML100T module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Configuration, POS Ports, Ether Ports, Ether Port Name, POS Port Name, Alarm Behavior Ether Port, Alarm Behavior POS Port, L2 Service Drops, Card Parameters, Thresholds, POS PM, Ether PM, J1 Path Trace, and Info. The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

C.4.14.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the ML100T that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.4.14.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-689) allows you to view and update ML100T identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-689 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	Select the designation that drives whether an entity is in service or out of service. The Admin State is the driver for the Service State.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
Card Mode	Select the card mode. It can be either of the following: •HDLC—High-level data link control; does not support VLAN trunking; standard on most Cisco data devices •GFP-F—Frame-mapped generic framing procedure; a protocol data unit (PDU)-oriented adaptation mode; maps a client frame into one GFP frame
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.14.3  Configuration Tab

The Configuration tab (see Table C-690) allows you to upload or download a configuration file for the ML100T card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-690 Field Descriptions for the Configuration Tab 

Field	Description
Source	Displays the source of the configuration file.
Host	Displays the host machine where the configuration file is stored, or the location where the file will be downloaded.
File Name	Displays the name of the configuration file.
Directory	Displays the directory on the host machine for the configuration file.
Time Stamp	Displays the date and time of the file upload or download. The time stamp shows the time on the NE, not the time on the CTM server. Note You can update the time stamp on the NE in the node-level NE Explorer > Identification tab.
TCC >> File	Click this button to download the file from the TCC card to the host machine. Select Local or Server in the TCC >> File dialog box to designate a location for the file.
File >> TCC	Click this button to upload the file from the host machine to the TCC card. Select Local or Server in the File >> TCC dialog box to designate a location for the file.
Launch CLI	Click this button to launch the command line interface (CLI).

C.4.14.4  POS Ports Tab

The POS Ports tab (see Table C-691) allows you to view and update ML100T POS port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-691 Field Descriptions for the POS Ports Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Admin State	Displays the configured administrative port state, which is Active or Inactive. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
MTU	Maximum transfer unit. The largest acceptable packet size configured for that port. Maximum setting is 9000 and default size is 1500. The MTU value will display 0 until the POS port is used in creating a circuit.

C.4.14.5  Ether Ports Tab

The Ether Ports tab (see Table C-692) allows you to view and update ML100T Ether port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-692 Field Descriptions for the Ether Ports Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Admin State	Displays the configured port state, which is administratively Active or Inactive. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
MTU	Maximum transfer unit. The largest acceptable packet size configured for that port. Default value is 1500.
Speed	ML100T-12 possible values are Auto, 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Duplex	ML100T-12 possible values are Auto, Full, or Half.
Flow Control	Displays the negotiated flow control mode. Possible values are None, Symmetrical, and Asymmetrical.
Media Type	Displays the SFP physical media type. Possible values are Unplugged, 1000 SX, or 1000 LX. (This information does not apply to the ML100T-12 card.)

C.4.14.6  Ether Port Name Tab

The Ether Port Name tab (see Table C-693) allows you to view and update ML100T Ether port name information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-693 Field Descriptions for the Ether Port Name Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Port Name	Displays the port name.

C.4.14.7  POS Port Name Tab

The POS Port Name tab (see Table C-694) allows you to view and update ML100T POS port name information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-694 Field Descriptions for the POS Port Name Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Port Name	Displays the port name.

C.4.14.8  Alarm Behavior Ether Port Tab

The Alarm Behavior Ether Port tab (see Table C-695) allows you to view and update ML100T alarm profile information for the Ethernet port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-695 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Ether Port 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.4.14.9  Alarm Behavior POS Port Tab

The Alarm Behavior POS Port tab (see Table C-696) allows you to view and update ML100T alarm profile information for the POS port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-696 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior POS Port 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.4.14.10  L2 Service Drops Tab

The L2 Service Drops tab (see Table C-697) allows you to view L2 service drop configuration settings. Click the Show QoS Parameters button to open the QoS for L2 Service Drop Port table, which shows the QoS for the selected drop. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-697 Field Descriptions for the L2 Service Drops Tab 

Field	Description
Port	The port number.
Port Sub Interface	The port subinterface.
Topology Name	The topology name.
SP VLAN ID	The service provider VLAN ID.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.
Bridge Group	The bridge group.
Port Type	The port type (UNI or NNI).
Connection Type	The connection type (Dot1Q, Untagged, or QinQ).
Policing	The QoS policy configured on the selected front port interface or subinterface. Supported values are CIR/PIR and Best Effort.
CIR	The committed information rate (CIR) range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second.
CIR Burst	The CIR burst default is 8000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes.
PIR	The peak information rate (PIR) range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second. PIR should be greater than or equal to CIR.
PIR Burst	The PIR burst default is 64000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes. PRI burst should be greater than or equal to CIR burst.
Best Effort Max Value	The best effort maximum value default is 96000 bits per second.
Best Effort Burst	Max CIR burst value. The default is 8000 bytes.

C.4.14.11  Card Parameters Tab

The Card Parameters tab (see Table C-698) allows you to view card parameter settings. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-698 Field Descriptions for the Card Parameters Tab 

Field	Description
Port	The port number.
Port Sub Interface	The port subinterface.
Bridge Group	The bridge group.
CIR	The committed information rate. The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second.
CIR Burst	The maximum CIR burst. The default is 8000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes.
PIR	The peak information rate. The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second. PIR should be greater than or equal to CIR.
PIR Burst	The maximum PIR burst. The default is 64000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes. PIR burst should be greater than or equal to CIR burst.
CCOSTRANSMIT	This keyword comes from the grammar file for the police command. For confirm action, the set-cos-transmit keyword specifies the set cos value. This value is used to determine the QoS configured on the front port of the ML card. A CCOSTRANSMIT value of 0 means a best effort policy has been configured for this port (FE/GE_IN). Other values are: •1: Best Effort (for Policy_Qos_Out) •2: CIR •3: CONTROL •4: VOICE •5: VIDEO •6: VOICE_VIDEO •7: MISSION_CRITICAL •8: SP_MANAGEMENT The card parameters shown on the NE Explorer are only for Policy_FE/GE_IN, meaning CCOSTRANSMIT is 0 or 2 (what VLAN provisioning supports).

C.4.14.12  Thresholds Tab

The Thresholds tab (see Table C-699) allows you to view remote monitoring (RMON) thresholds and create new RMON thresholds to allow CTM to monitor ML POS counts. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-699 Field Descriptions for the Thresholds Tab 

Field	Description
Index Number	The index number.
Interface Name	The interface name. Currently, only POS0 and POS1 are supported.
Direction	The direction of the reported statistics. Currently, only output is supported.
COS	The class of service (COS) level. Supported levels are 0 to 7.
Sample Period	The sample period, in seconds.
Variable	The MIB variable to monitor. Supported variables are cportQosDropPkts and cportQosDropOctets in the cportQosStatsTable in CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB.
Sample Type	The sample type (relative or absolute). Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Rising Threshold	The number of occurrences for the rising threshold. Note For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a falling threshold of 400 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Falling Threshold	The number of occurrences for the falling threshold. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold. A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 minutes subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 minutes, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over 1000 per 15 minute period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).

C.4.14.13  POS PM Tab

The POS PM tab (see Table C-700) allows you to enable IOS PM on the POS port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-700 Field Descriptions for the POS PM Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number.
Accounting	Indicates whether PM is enabled on the POS or not.

C.4.14.14  Ether PM Tab

The Ether PM Tab (see Table C-701) allows you to enable IOS PM on the Ether port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-701 Field Descriptions for the Ether PM Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number.
Accounting	Indicates whether or not the PM is enabled on the Ether port.

C.4.14.15  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-702) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-702 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS/VC Number	Displays the STS or VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.

C.4.14.16  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-703) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the ML100T. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-703 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.4.15  Slot Properties—ML1000-2

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ML-series cards are Gigabit Ethernet (ML1000-2) and Fast Ethernet (ML100T-12) multilayer switches integrated into the ONS 15454 platform. An ML-series card fits in the standard card slot of an ONS 15454 chassis.

For the ML1000-2 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Configuration, POS Ports, Ether Ports, Ether Port Name, POS Port Name, Alarm Behavior Ether Port, Alarm Behavior POS Port, L2 Service Drops, Card Parameters, and Thresholds.

C.4.15.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the ML1000 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.4.15.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-704) allows you to view and update ML1000 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-704 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.4.15.3  Configuration Tab

The Configuration tab (see Table C-705) allows you to upload or download a configuration file for the card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-705 Field Descriptions for the Configuration Tab 

Field	Description
Source	Displays the source of the configuration file.
Host	Displays the host machine where the configuration file is stored, or the location where the file will be downloaded.
File Name	Displays the name of the configuration file.
Directory	Displays the directory on the host machine for the configuration file.
Time Stamp	Displays the date and time of the file upload or download. The time stamp shows the time on the NE, not the time on the CTM server. Note You can update the time stamp on the NE in the node-level NE Explorer > Identification tab.
TCC >> File	Click this button to download the file from the TCC card to the host machine. Select Local or Server in the TCC >> File dialog box to designate a location for the file.
File >> TCC	Click this button to upload the file from the host machine to the TCC card. Select Local or Server in the File >> TCC dialog box to designate a location for the file.
Launch CLI	Click this button to launch the command line interface (CLI).

C.4.15.4  POS Ports Tab

The POS Ports tab (see Table C-706) allows you to view and update card POS Port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-706 Filed Descriptions for the POS Ports Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Admin State	Displays the configured administrative port state, which is Active or Inactive. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
MTU	Maximum Transfer Unit. The largest acceptable packet size configured for that port. Maximum setting is 9000 and default size is 1500. The MTU value will display 0 until the POS port is used in creating a circuit.

C.4.15.5  Ether Ports Tab

The Ether Ports tab (see Table C-707) allows you to view and update card Ethernet port information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-707 Field Descriptions for the Ether Ports Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Admin State	Displays the configured port state, which is administratively Active or Inactive. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are UP and DOWN.
MTU	Maximum Transfer Unit. The largest acceptable packet size configured for that port. Default value is 1500.
Speed	Possible values are Auto, 10 Mbps, or 100 Mbps.
Duplex	The setting of the port. Possible values are Auto, Full, or Half.
Flow Control	Displays the negotiated flow control mode. Values are None, Symmetrical, and Asymmetrical.
Optics	Displays the SFP physical media type. Possible values are Unplugged, 1000 SX, or 1000 LX. (This information does not apply to the ML100T-12 card.)

C.4.15.6  Ether Port Name Tab

The Ether Port Name tab (see Table C-708) allows you to view and update card Ethernet port name information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-708 Field Descriptions for the Ether Port Name Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Port Name	Displays the port name.

C.4.15.7  POS Port Name Tab

The POS Port Name tab (see Table C-709) allows you to view and update card POS port name information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-709 Filed Descriptions for the POS Port Name Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the configurable identifier for the port.
Port Name	Displays the port name.

C.4.15.8  Alarm Behavior Ether Port Tab

The Alarm Behavior Ether Port tab (see Table C-710) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information for the Ethernet port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-710 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Ether Port 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.4.15.9  Alarm Behavior POS Port Tab

The Alarm Behavior POS Port tab (see Table C-711) allows you to view and update card alarm profile information for the POS port. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-711 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior POS Port Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.4.15.10  L2 Service Drops Tab

The L2 Service Drops tab (see Table C-712) allows you to view L2 service drop configuration settings. Click the Show QoS Parameters button to open the QoS for L2 Service Drop Port table, which shows the QoS for the selected drop. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-712 Field Descriptions for the L2 Service Drops Tab 

Field	Description
Port	The port number.
Port Sub Interface	The port subinterface.
Topology Name	The topology name.
SP VLAN ID	The service provider VLAN ID.
Customer ID	The customer ID.
Service ID	The service ID.
Bridge Group	The bridge group.
Port Type	The port type (UNI or NNI).
Connection Type	The connection type (Dot1Q, Untagged, or QinQ).
Policing	The QoS policy configured on the selected front port interface or subinterface. Supported values are CIR/PIR and Best Effort.
CIR	The committed information rate (CIR). The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second.
CIR Burst	The CIR burst. The default is 8000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes.
PIR	The peak information rate (PIR). The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second. PIR should be greater than or equal to CIR.
PIR Burst	The PIR burst. The default is 64000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes. PIR burst should be greater than or equal to CIR burst.
Best Effort Max Value	The best effort maximum value. The default is 96000 bits per second; the range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second.
Best Effort Burst	The maximum best effort burst value. The default is 8000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes.

C.4.15.11  Card Parameters Tab

The Card Parameters tab (see Table C-713) allows you to view card parameter settings. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-713 Field Descriptions for the Card Parameters Tab 

Field	Description
Port	The port number.
Port Sub Interface	The port subinterface.
Bridge Group	The bridge group.
CIR	The committed information rate. The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second.
CIR Burst	The maximum CIR burst. The default is 8000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes.
PIR	The peak information rate. The range is 96000 to 800000000 bits per second. PIR should be greater than or equal to CIR.
PIR Burst	The maximum PIR burst. The default is 64000 bytes; the range is 8000 to 64000 bytes. PIR burst should be greater than or equal to CIR burst.
CCOSTRANSMIT	This keyword comes from the grammar file for the police command. For confirm action, the set-cos-transmit keyword specifies the set cos value. This value is used to determine the QoS configured on the front port of the ML card. A CCOSTRANSMIT value of 0 means a best effort policy has been configured for this port (FE/GE_IN). Other values are: 1: Best Effort (for Policy_Qos_Out) 2: CIR 3: CONTROL 4: VOICE 5: VIDEO 6: VOICE_VIDEO 7: MISSION_CRITICAL 8: SP_MANAGEMENT The card parameters shown on the NE Explorer are only for Policy_FE/GE_IN, meaning CCOSTRANSMIT is 0 or 2 (what VLAN provisioning supports).

C.4.15.12  Thresholds Tab

The Thresholds tab (see Table C-714) allows you to view RMON thresholds and create new RMON thresholds to allow CTM to monitor ML POS counts. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-714 Field Descriptions for the Thresholds Tab 

Field	Description
Index Number	The index number.
Interface Name	The interface name. Currently, only POS0 and POS1 are supported.
Direction	The direction of the reported statistics. Currently, only output is supported.
COS	The class of service (COS) level. Supported levels are 0 to 7.
Sample Period	The sample period, in seconds.
Variable	The MIB variable to monitor. Supported variables are cportQosDropPkts and cportQosDropOctets in the cportQosStatsTable in CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB.
Sample Type	The sample type (relative or absolute). Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Rising Threshold	The number of occurrences for the rising threshold. Note For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a falling threshold of 400 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Falling Threshold	The number of occurrences for the falling threshold. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold. A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 minutes subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 minutes, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over 1000 per 15 minute period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.5  FC_MR-4 Card

This section describes the FC_MR-4 card supported within CTM.

C.5.1  Slot Properties—FC_MR-4 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SONET or ONS 15454 SDH card slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this property sheet to change the card properties.

The Fiber Channel 4-port (FC_MR-4) card is a 1.0625- or 2.125-Gbps Fiber Channel/Fiber Connectivity (FICON) card that integrates non-SONET or non-SDH framed protocols into a SONET or SDH time-division multiplexing (TDM) platform through virtually concatenated payloads.

The FC_MR-4 card uses pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters (GBICs) to transport non-SONET/SDH-framed, block-coded protocols over SONET/SDH in virtually concatenated or contiguously concatenated payloads. The FC_MR-4 can transport fiber channel over SONET/SDH using fiber-channel client interfaces and allows transport of one of the following at a time:

•Two contiguously concatenated (CCAT) STS-24c/VC4-8c circuits

•One STS-48c/VC4-16c CCAT

•Two virtually concatenated (VCAT) circuits (STC3c-8V/VC4-8v) compliant with ITU-T G.7041 GFP-T and Telcordia GR-253-CORE

•One STS-24c/VC4-8c CCAT and one STS-24c/VC4-8c VCAT

For the FC_MR module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Card, Port, Alarm Behavior, RMON Thresholds, J1 Path Trace, GBIC Inventory, and Info.

C.5.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FC_MR that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.5.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-715) allows you to view and update FC_MR identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-715 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.5.1.3  Card Tab

The Card tab (see Table C-716) allows you to view and update card information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-716 Field Descriptions for the Card Tab 

Field	Description
Card Mode	Select the card mode. It can be either of the following: •Distance Extension (default) •Line Rate Only
Current Bandwidth Usage	Displays the current bandwidth utilization in terms of STS or VC-4 usage.

C.5.1.4  Port Tab

The Port tab allows you to view and update FC_MR port information. The tab contains the following subtabs:

•General Subtab

•Distance Extension Subtab

•Enhanced FC/FICON Subtab

C.5.1.4.1  General Subtab

The General subtab (see Table C-717) allows you to view and update general port information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-717 Field Descriptions for the General Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number. Values are 1 to 4.
Port Name	Allows you to assign the specified port a name. The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters. The name is blank by default.
Admin State	Displays the administration state. The state can either be Unlocked or Locked, Maintenance.
Media Type	Set the media type for each port. Options are: •FICON - 2 Gbps—Available when Distance Extension card mode is selected or distance extension is enabled on the port. •FICON - 1 Gbps—Available when Distance Extension card mode is selected or distance extension is enabled on the port. •Fibre Channel - 1 Gbps—Fiber channel interface. •Fibre Channel - 2 Gbps—Fiber channel interface. •Undefined—This is the default media type when the card is inserted.
Link Rate	Displays the actual rate of the port.
Max GBIC Rate	Displays the maximum GBIC rate. Cisco supports two GBICs for the FC_MR-4 card (ONS-GX-2FC-SML and ONS-GX-2FC-MMI). If used with another GBIC, "See GBIC vendor" displays.
Enable Link Recovery	Enables or disables link recovery if a local port is inoperable. If enabled, a link reset occurs when there is a loss of transport from a cross-connect switch, a protection switch, or an upgrade.
State	Places the port in service (IS), out of service (OOS), or out of service-maintenance (OOS_MT).

C.5.1.4.2  Distance Extension Subtab

The Distance Extension subtab (see Table C-718) allows you to enable the buffer-to-buffer extension between the client and the FC_MR-4 card in order to increase the DWDM distance without affecting the throughput. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-718 Field Description for the Distance Extension Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No	(Read-only) Displays the port number.
Enable Distance Extension	Check to enable end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for 1 GFC and up to 800 km for 2 GFC. When enabled, all the fields for the port are enabled.
Auto Detect Credits	Check to enable automatic detection of buffer credits for flow control.
Credits Available	Displays the number of credits available. You can set the credits available only if the Auto Detect Credits field is disabled on the port. Values should be in multiples of 2. The minimum value is 2 and the maximum value is 256.
Autoadjust GFP Buffer Threshold	Check to automatically adjust the threshold of the GFP buffer.
GFP Buffers Available	Displays the number of GFP buffers. You can set the GFP buffers available only if the Autoadjust GFP Buffer Threshold field is disabled. Values should be in multiples of 16. The minimum value is 16 and the maximum value is 1200.

C.5.1.4.3  Enhanced FC/FICON Subtab

The Enhanced FC/FICON ISL subtab (see Table C-719) allows you to enable FPGA to drop duplicate frames. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-719 Field Descriptions for the Enhanced FC/FICON Subtab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
Ingress Idle Filtering	Enable or disable ingress idle filtering.
Maximum Frame Size	Allows you to select the maximum frame size supported by the FICON/FC. Valid range is from 2148 to 2172.

C.5.1.5  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-720) allows you to view and update FC_MR alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-720 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Card Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the FC_MR port number (1 to 4).
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Force to All Ports	Forces the selected alarm profile to all FC_MR ports.

C.5.1.6  RMON Thresholds Tab

The RMON Thresholds tab (see Table C-721) allows you to create, view, and delete FC_MR-4 thresholds. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-721 Field Descriptions for the RMON Thresholds Tab 

Field	Description
Index Number	A unique value that identifies the different thresholds currently existing on the NE.
Slot	Select a slot for the new FC_MR threshold.
Port	Select a port for the selected slot. If you select All, the threshold will be created on all ports for that slot. This operation may take several minutes to complete.
Variable	Select a variable for the new FC_MR threshold. Available variables will differ based on the type of card selected in the Slot field.
Alarm Type	Select an alarm type for the new FC_MR threshold. Indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type	Select a sample type for the new FC_MR threshold. Available sample types are Relative and Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to using the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Sample Period	Enter a sample period for the new FC_MR threshold. The sample period is measured in seconds.
Rising Threshold	Enter a rising threshold for the new FC_MR threshold. The value must be equal to or greater than the Falling Threshold value.
Falling Threshold	Enter a falling threshold for the new FC_MR threshold. The value must be equal to or less than the rising threshold value.
Create	Click the Create button to create a FC_MR thresholds.
Delete	Select a FC_MR threshold from the list displayed and click the Delete button.

C.5.1.7  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-722) allows you to view and retrieve FC_MR-4 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-722 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Column	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number/VC4 Number	Displays the STS or VC4 number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Mem Num	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

C.5.1.8  GBIC Inventory Tab

The GBIC Inventory tab (see Table C-723) allows you to view GBIC inventory information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-723 Field Descriptions for the GBIC Inventory Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the GBIC card port number.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot. Values are single mode or multimode.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the manufacturer's part number.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the GBIC serial number that is unique to each GBIC.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Application Filename	The application filename is not supported; therefore, this field displays "unknown."

C.5.1.9  Info

The Info tab (see Table C-724) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the FC_MR-4 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-724 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.6  FMEC Cards

This section describes the following FMEC cards supported within CTM:

•Slot Properties—FMEC-DS1/E1 Card

•Slot Properties—FMEC-DS3/E3 Card

•Slot Properties—FMEC-E1 Card

•Slot Properties—FMEC-E1-120NP Card

•Slot Properties—FMEC-STM1E Card

•Slot Properties—MIC-A/P Card

•Slot Properties—MIC-C/T/P Card

C.6.1  Slot Properties—FMEC-DS1/E1 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-DS1/E1 card provides front-mount electrical connection for 14 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC-DS1/E1 card, each E1-N-14 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced cable through two 37-pin DB connectors.

For the FMEC DS1/E1 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.6.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FMEC DS1/E1 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.6.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-725) allows you to view and update FMEC DS1/E1 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-725 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.6.2  Slot Properties—FMEC-DS3/E3 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-DS3/E3 card provides front-mount electrical connection for 14 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC-DS3/E3 card, each E1-N-14 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced cable through two 37-pin DB connectors.

For the FMEC DS3/E3 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.6.2.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FMEC DS3/E3 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.6.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-726) allows you to view and update FMEC DS3/E3 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-726 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.6.3  Slot Properties—FMEC-E1 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-E1 card provides front-mount electrical connection for fourteen ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC-E1 card, each E1-N-14 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial 1.0/2.3 miniature coaxial connector.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120NP card provides front-mount electrical connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120NP card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common Molex 96-pin LFH connector.

For the FMEC-E1 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.6.3.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FMEC-E1 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.6.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-727) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-727 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.6.4  Slot Properties—FMEC-E1-120NP Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC-E1-120NP (Unprotected) card provides front-mount electrical connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120NP card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common Molex 96-pin LFH connector.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120PROA (1:3 Protect A) card provides front-mount electrical connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120PROA card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common Molex 96-pin LFH connector.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC E1-120PROB (1:3 Protect B) card provides front-mount electrical connection for 42 ITU-compliant, G.703 E-1 ports. With the FMEC E1-120PROB card, each E1-42 port operates at 2.048 Mbps over a 120-ohm balanced interface. Twenty-one interfaces are led through one common Molex 96-pin LFH connector.

For the FMEC-E1-42 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-12, VC-4, J1 Path Trace, Loopback, Protection, and Alarm Behavior.

C.6.4.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FMEC-E1-42 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.6.4.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-728) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-728 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.6.4.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-729) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following subtabs and fields.

Table C-729 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the port.
SD BER	Sets the signal deterioration bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal failure bit error rate.
Line Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.
Line Coding	Allows you to define the transmission coding type.
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P/EB-P	Coding violations/errored bits-path
BBE-P	Background block errors-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the port number
CV-P/EB-P	Coding violations/errored bits-path
BBE-P	Background block errors-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path

C.6.4.4  VC-12 Tab

The VC-12 tab (see Table C-730) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 VC-12 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-730 Field Descriptions for the VC-12 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-12 Config
Displays VC-12 configuration information for the FMEC-E1-42 card. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number.
SF BER	The signal deterioration bit error rate.
SD BER	The signal failure bit error rate.
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end VC-12 information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end VC-12 information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-LP	Errored blocks-low order path
BBE-LP	Background block errors-low order path
ES-LP	Errored seconds-low order path
SES-LP	Severely errored seconds-low order path
UAS-LP	Unavailable seconds-low order path
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.6.4.5  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-731) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-731 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4 Config
Displays VC-4 configuration information for the FMEC-E1-42 card. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number.
SF BER	The signal deterioration bit error rate.
SD BER	The signal failure bit error rate.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number.
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number.
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number.

C.6.4.6  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-732) allows you to view and retrieve FMEC-E1-42 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-732 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Mismatch: Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.

C.6.4.7  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-733) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-733 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT). Note The State field is only available for release 3.4 and higher.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.6.4.8  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-734) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-734 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.6.4.9  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-735) allows you to view and update FMEC-E1-42 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-735 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.6.5  Slot Properties—FMEC-STM1E Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 SDH FMEC STM1E NP card provides front-mount electrical connection for 12 ITU-compliant, G.703 STM1E ports. Ports 9 to 12 can be switched to E-4 instead of STM-1 (through CTC on the STM1E-12 card). With FMEC STM1E NP, each interface of an STM1E-12 card operates at 155.52 Mbps for STM-1 or 139.264 Mbps for E-4 over a 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial 1.0/2.3 miniature coaxial connector.

There are three types of FMEC-STM1E cards: Unprotect, 1:1, and 1:3.

For the FMEC-STM1E card, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.6.5.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the FMEC STM1E that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.6.5.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-736) allows you to view and update FMEC STM1E identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-736 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.6.6  Slot Properties—MIC-A/P Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The MIC-A/P card provides connection for the BATTERY B input, one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2 card), sixteen alarm inputs, and four configurable alarm inputs/outputs. Its position is in slot 23 in the center of the ONS 15454 SDH subrack EFCA area.

For the MIC-A/P module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.6.6.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the MIC-A/P that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.6.6.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-737) allows you to view and update MIC-A/P identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-737 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.6.7  Slot Properties—MIC-C/T/P Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The MIC-C/T/P card provides connection for the BATTERY A input, one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for system management serial port, system management LAN port, modem port (for future use), and system timing inputs and outputs.

For the MIC-C/T/P module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View and Identification.

C.6.7.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the MIC-C/T/P that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.6.7.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-738) allows you to view and update MIC-C/T/P identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-738 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.7  Multirate Cards

This section describes the ASAP_4 card supported within CTM.

C.7.1  Slot Properties—ASAP_4 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15600 SONET slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15600 SONET Any Service Any Port (ASAP_4) card provides 16 optical network interface ports; each port can be provisioned as any one of the following port types: OC3/STM-1, OC12/STM-4, OC48/STM-16, or LX GE. The card can be installed in any I/O module card slot. The card provides 16 optical interfaces on the front panel. When configured for Ethernet, an ASAP port forwards Ethernet frames by encapsulating them in Cisco HDLC or GFP and transports them over SONET to the far-end GE port, where the unencapsulation is performed.

The ASAP_4 card consists of a motherboard with four pluggable daughterboards; each daughterboard has four pluggable SFPs and each SFP can have one or more ports.

The Slot Properties pane for the ASAP_4 card displays the following tabs: Module View, Card Identification, Pluggable Provisioning, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, Info, Ether Line, Ether Loopback, Ether Alarm Behavior, POS Alarm Behavior, and POS Line.

C.7.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the Transmitter Transponders PM Table.

C.7.1.2  Card Identification Tab

The Card Identification tab (see Table C-739) allows you to view and update identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-739 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.7.1.3  Pluggable Provisioning Tab

The Pluggable Provisioning tab (see Table C-740) allows you to view and provision pluggable entities; for example, pluggable port module (PPM) and the ports inside these entities. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-740 Field Descriptions for the Pluggable Provisioning Tab 

Field	Description
Pluggable IO Module
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the pluggable slot is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each pluggable I/O module.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual pluggable I/O module that is installed in the pluggable slot.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the pluggable I/O module.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the pluggable I/O module. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the pluggable I/O module does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the pluggable I/O module.
Pluggable Port Module
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the pluggable slot is provisioned for.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each pluggable port module.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual pluggable port module that is installed in the pluggable slot.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the pluggable port module.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the pluggable port module. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the pluggable port module does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the pluggable port module.
Optical Ports
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the optical port is provisioned for.
Ether Ports
Pluggable Number	Displays the identifier of the plugin module.
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the Ether port is provisioned for.

C.7.1.3.1  Provision Pluggable Dialog Box

Click the Create button to launch the Provision Pluggable dialog box. The Provision Pluggable dialog box allows you to provision pluggable entities; for example, the PPM and PIM, and to create the ports inside these entities. See Provision Pluggable Dialog Box for more information.

C.7.1.4  Line Tab

The Line tab allows you to view and update optical line performance monitoring information. The Line tab contains the following subtabs:

•Line Config Subtab

•Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Physical Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Physical Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Section Thresh 15 Min

•Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

C.7.1.4.1  Line Config Subtab

The Line Config subtab (see Table C-741) allows you to view and change the line settings of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-741 Field Descriptions for the Line Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Port Name	Allows you to add a name for the optical port.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
Send Do Not Use	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Provide Sync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	When checked, enables synchronization status messages, which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Synchronization Status Message	Allows you to view the incoming synchronization status message.
BLSR Ext. Byte	Select an alternate BLSR byte.
Type	Defines the port.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance

C.7.1.4.2  Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Line Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-742) allows you to view and change the 15-minute near- and far-end line thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-742 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line
UAS-L	Displays the unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Displays the failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count-line
PSD	Protection switching duration-line
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line
UAS-L	Displays the unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Displays the failure count-line

C.7.1.4.3  Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Line Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-743) allows you to view and change the 1-day near- and far-end line thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-743 Field Descriptions for the Line Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
CV-L	Displays the coding violations-line
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line
UAS-L	Displays the unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Displays the failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count-line
PSD	Protection switching duration-line
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
Far End
Port Number	Displays the optical port number
ES-L	Displays the errored seconds-line
SES-L	Displays the severely errored seconds-line
UAS-L	Displays the unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Displays the failure count-line

C.7.1.4.4  Physical Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Physical Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-744) allows you to view and change the 15-minute near-end physical thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-744 Field Descriptions for the Physical Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
LBC-HIGH	Laser bias current maximum. Default is (15 min): 150 percent.
LBC-LOW	Laser bias current minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
OPT-HIGH	Optical power transmitted maximum. Default is (15 min): 120 percent.
OPT-LOW	Optical power transmitted minimum. Default is (15 min): 80 percent.
OPR-HIGH	Optical power received maximum. Default is (15 min): 200 percent.
OPR-LOW	Optical power received minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
Set OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR) establishes the received power level as 100 percent. If the receiver power decreases, then the OPR percentage decreases to reflect the loss in receiver power. For example, if the receiver power decreases 3 dBm, the OPR decreases 50 percent.

C.7.1.4.5  Physical Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Physical Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-745) allows you to view and change the 1-day near-end physical thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-745 Field Descriptions for the Physical Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
LBC-HIGH	Laser bias current maximum.
LBC-LOW	Laser bias current minimum.
OPT-HIGH	Optical power transmitted maximum.
OPT-LOW	Optical power transmitted minimum.
OPR-HIGH	Optical power received maximum.
OPR-LOW	Optical power received minimum.
Set OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR) establishes the received power level as 100 percent. If the receiver power decreases, then the OPR percentage decreases to reflect the loss in receiver power. For example, if the receiver power decreases 3 dBm, the OPR decreases 50 percent.

C.7.1.4.6  Section Thresh 15 Min

The Section Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-746) allows you to view and change the 15-minute near-end section thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-746 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.7.1.4.7  Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Section Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-747) allows you to view and change the 1-day near-end section thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-747 Field Descriptions for the Section Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
Port Number	Displays the port number.
CV-S	Displays the coding violations-section.
ES-S	Displays the errored seconds-section.
SES-S	Displays the severely errored seconds-section.
SEFS-S	Displays the severely errored framing seconds-section.

C.7.1.5  STS Tab

The STS tab allows you to view and update ASAP_4 STS information. The STS tab contains the following subtabs:

•STS Config Subtab

•Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

•Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

•Customer Info Subtab

C.7.1.5.1  STS Config Subtab

The STS Config subtab (see Table C-748) allows you to view and change the STS settings of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following files:

Table C-748 Field Descriptions for the STS Config Subtab 

Field	Description
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number information.
IPPM Enabled	Check to enable IPPM and uncheck to disable IPPM.
XC Loopback	Displays the cross-connect loopback status.

C.7.1.5.2  Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab

The Path Thresh 15 Min subtab (see Table C-749) allows you to view and change the 15-minute path thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-749 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 15 Min Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number information.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Failure count-path.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected.
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated.
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated.

C.7.1.5.3  Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab

The Path Thresh 1 Day subtab (see Table C-750) allows you to view and change the 1-day path thresholds of the ASAP_4 card. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-750 Field Descriptions for the Path Thresh 1 Day Subtab 

Field	Description
Near End
STS Number	Displays the synchronous transport signal number information.
CV-P	Displays coding violations-path information.
ES-P	Displays errored seconds-path information.
SES-P	Displays severely errored seconds-path information.
UAS-P	Displays unavailable seconds-path information.
FC-P	Failure count-path.
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected.
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated.
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated.
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated.

C.7.1.5.4  Customer Info Subtab

The Customer Info subtab (see Table C-751) allows you to view the customer information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-751 Field Descriptions for the Customer Info Subtab

Field	Description
STS No.	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.7.1.6  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-752) allows you to view and update loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-752 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance

C.7.1.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-753) allows you to view and update ASAP_4 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-753 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.7.1.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-754) allows you to view and update alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-754 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.7.1.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-755) allows you to view and update J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-755 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

C.7.1.10  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-756) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the ASAP_4 card. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-756 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

C.7.1.11  Ether Line Tab

The Ether Line tab (see Table C-757) allows you to configure Ether line information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-757 Field Descriptions for the Ether Line Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter a port name.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Link State	Displays the physical port state. Possible values are Up, Down, or Not Present.
Flow Control	Displays the negotiated flow control mode. Values are None, Symmetrical, and Asymmetrical.
Negotiation Status	Displays the result of the most-recent auto-negotiation. The type of flow control that was negotiated will be displayed.
Auto Negotiation	Allows you to enable the card to match the speed and duplex mode of a partner node.
Max Frame	Sets the maximum frame size
Flow Control Low	Sets the low flow control buffer level.
Flow Control High	Sets the high flow control buffer level.

C.7.1.12  Ether Loopback Tab

The Ether Loopback tab allows loopback to be configured in the Ether port. The Ether Loopback tab contains the following subtabs:

•Ether Loopback Port Subtab

•SONET STS (Ether) Subtab

C.7.1.12.1  Ether Loopback Port Subtab

The Ether Loopback Port subtab (see Table C-758) allows you to configure Ethernet loopback port information. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-758 Field Descriptions for the Ether Loopback Subtab 

Field	Description
Port Number	The port number.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance

C.7.1.12.2  SONET STS (Ether) Subtab

The SONET STS (Ether) subtab (see Table C-759) allows you to configure loopback on cross-connects. The subtab contains the following fields.

Table C-759 Field Descriptions for the SONET STS (Ether) Subtab 

Field	Description
STS	Displays the STS number
XC Loopback	Displays the cross-connect loopback status.

C.7.1.13  Ether Alarm Behavior Tab

The Ether Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-760) allows you to view and update Ether alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-760 Field Descriptions for the Ether Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.7.1.14  POS Alarm Behavior Tab

The POS Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-761) allows you to view and update POS alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-761 Field Descriptions for the POS Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.7.1.15  POS Line Tab

The POS Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-762) allows you to view and update alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-762 Field Descriptions for the POS Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter a port name.
Administration State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Encap CRC	Sets the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) to verify the integrity of the transmitted data.
Framing Type	Allows you to select the line framing type.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8  Optical Cards

This section describes the following optical cards supported within CTM:

•Slot Properties—OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card

•Slot Properties—OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card

•Slot Properties—OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card

•Slot Properties—OC3 IR 4 1310 Card

•Slot Properties—OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card

•Slot Properties—OC48 Card

•Slot Properties—OC48 IR 1310 Card

•Slot Properties—OC48 LR 1550 Card

•Slot Properties—OECP-L Modules

•Slot Properties—STM-1 Card

•Slot Properties—STM-16 Card (ONS 15454 SDH)

•Slot Properties—STM-16 Card (ONS 15600 SDH)

•Slot Properties—STM-1E-12 Card

•Slot Properties—STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card

•Slot Properties—STM-64 LH 1550 Card (ONS 15454 SDH)

•Slot Properties—STM-64 LR/LH 4 Card (ONS 15600 SDH)

C.8.1  Slot Properties—OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 Optical Connector (OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310) card provides one intermediate or short range SONET/SDH OC-12 port compliant with the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c signal levels.

For the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and Info.

C.8.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-763) allows you to view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-763 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.1.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-764) allows you to view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-764 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC-3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
AdminSSM	If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU (synchronization traceability unknown). AdminSSM allows you to override the STU value with one of the following: •PRS—Primary reference source (Stratum 1) •STS2—Stratum 2 •TNC—Transit node clock •STS3E—Stratum 3E •STS3—Stratum 3 •SMC—SONET minimum clock •ST4—Stratum 4
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Section Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.8.1.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-765) allows you to view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 synchronous transport signal (STS) information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-765 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and XC loopback status.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.1.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-766) allows you to view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-766 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service, Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed

C.8.1.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-767) allows you to view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-767 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.1.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-768) allows you to view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-768 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.1.8  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-769) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-769 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.2  Slot Properties—OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module's performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Connector (OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4) card provides one intermediate or short range SONET/SDH OC-12 port compliant with the International Telecommunication Union's G.707, G.957, and Telcordia's GR-253. The port operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c signal levels.

For the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.8.2.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms also display when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-770) is where you view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-770 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Part Number	Displays the card part number. This number is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number. This number is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.2.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-771) is where you view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-771 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Displays the port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. 0 (default) - 3 (OC3, per port) 0 (default) - 12 (OC-12) 0 (default) - 48 (OC-48)
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
AdminSSM	If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU (synchronization traceability unknown). AdminSSM allows you to override the STU value with one of the following: •PRS—Primary reference source (Stratum 1) •STS2—Stratum 2 •TNC—Transit node clock •STS3E—Stratum 3E •STS3—Stratum 3 •SMC—SONET minimum clock •ST4—Stratum 4
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
BLSR Ext. Byte	Select an alternate BLSR byte. Choices are Z2, E2, or F1.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near and far-end 15 minute optical line threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
PSC-S	Protection switching count-span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration-span
PSC-R	Protection switching count-ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration-ring
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays near and far-end 1 day optical line threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
PSC-S	Protection switching count-span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration-span
PSC-R	Protection switching count-ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration-ring
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Section Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end 15 minute section threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-S	Coding violations
ES-S	Errored seconds
SES-S	Severely errored seconds
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds
Section Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end 1 day section threshold information. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
CV-S	Coding violations
ES-S	Errored seconds
SES-S	Severely errored seconds
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds

C.8.2.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-772) is where you view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 STS information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-772 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and XC loopback status.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.2.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-773) is where you view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-773 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed

C.8.2.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-774) is where you view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-774 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.2.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-775) is where you view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-775 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.2.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-776) allows you to view and update OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 J1 Path Trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-776 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.8.2.9  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-777) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-777 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.3  Slot Properties—OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327, ONS 15454 or ONS 15600 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 card provides one long-range SONET/SDH OC-192 port compliant with the International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) G.707, ITU-T G.957, Telcordia GR-1377-CORE, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The card port operates at 9.96 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km when using fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. The card supports VT and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads.

For the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, Auto Laser Shutdown, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.3.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-778) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-778 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.3.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-779) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-779 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC-3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
AdminSSM	If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU (synchronization traceability unknown). AdminSSM allows you to override the STU value with one of the following: •PRS—Primary reference source (Stratum 1) •STS2—Stratum 2 •TNC—Transit node clock •STS3E—Stratum 3E •STS3—Stratum 3 •SMC—SONET minimum clock •ST4—Stratum 4
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Displays the ALS mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
PSC-S	Protection switching count—span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration—span
PSC-R	Protection switching count—ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration—ring
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
PSC-S	Protection switching count—span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration—span
PSC-R	Protection switching count—ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration—ring
Section Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.8.3.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-780) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 STS information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-780 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and XC loopback status.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.3.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-781) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-781 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.8.3.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-782) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-782 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.3.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-783) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-783 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.3.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-784) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 ALS parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-784 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the ALS mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.8.3.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-785) allows you to view and update OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-785 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.4  Slot Properties—OC3 IR 4 1310 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Optical Connector (OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310) card provides four intermediate or short range SONET/SDH OC-3 ports compliant with the International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at 155.52 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at the STS-1 or STS-3c signal levels.

For the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.8.4.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.4.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-786) allows you to view and update OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-786 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.4.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-787) allows you to view and update OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-787 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
AdminSSM	If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU (synchronization traceability unknown). AdminSSM allows you to override the STU value with one of the following: •PRS—Primary reference source (Stratum 1) •STS2—Stratum 2 •TNC—Transit node clock •STS3E—Stratum 3E •STS3—Stratum 3 •SMC—SONET minimum clock •ST4—Stratum 4
Send <FF> DoNotUse	When checked, sends a special do not use (DUS) (0xff) message on the S1 byte.
Line Thresh 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
Line Thresh 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
Section Thresh 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Thresh 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.8.4.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-788) allows you to view and update OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 STS information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-788 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and XC loopback status.
Path Thresh 15 Min
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Path Thresh 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.4.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-789) allows you to view and update OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-789 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed

C.8.4.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-790) allows you to view and update OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-790 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.4.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-791) allows you to view and update OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-791 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.4.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-792) allows you to view and update OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-792 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.8.4.9  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-793) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-793 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.5  Slot Properties—OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card provides eight intermediate or short range SONET/SDH OC-3 ports compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at 155.52 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at the STS-1 or STS-3c signal levels.

For the OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, Auto Laser Shutdown, J1 Path Trace, and Info.

C.8.5.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.5.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-794) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-794 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type that the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.5.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-795) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-795 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the ALS mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test). ALS is a laser safety feature defined by ITU G.664.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
AdminSSM	If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU (synchronization traceability unknown). AdminSSM allows you to override the STU value with one of the following: •PRS—Primary reference source (Stratum 1) •STS2—Stratum 2 •TNC—Transit node clock •STS3E—Stratum 3E •STS3—Stratum 3 •SMC—SONET minimum clock •ST4—Stratum 4
Send <FF> DoNotUse	When checked, sends a special do not use (DUS) (0xff) message on the S1 byte.
Line Thresh 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
Line Thresh 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
Section Thresh 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Thresh 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.8.5.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-796) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 STS information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-796 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and XC loopback status.
Path Thresh 15 Min
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Path Thresh 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.5.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-797) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-797 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed

C.8.5.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-798) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-798 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.5.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-799) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-799 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.5.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-800) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 ALS parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-800 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the ALS mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.8.5.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-801) allows you to view and update OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-801 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

C.8.5.10  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-802) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-802 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.6  Slot Properties—OC48 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15600 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

For the OC48 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Transceiver, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.6.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC48 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.6.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-803) allows you to view and update OC48 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-803 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.6.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-804) allows you to view and update OC48 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-804 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Subfield	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Synchronization Status Message	Allows you to view the incoming synchronization status message. Values are: •PRS (Primary reference source Stratum 1) •STU (Sync traceability unknown) •ST2 (Stratum 2) •ST3 (Stratum 3) •ST3E (Stratum 3E) •SMC (SONET minimum clock) •ST4 (Stratum 4) •TNC (Transit node clock) •DUS (Do not use for timing synchronization) •RES (Reserved; quality level set by user)
BLSR Ext. Byte	Select an alternate BLSR byte. Choices are Z2, E2, or F1.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
Section Thresh 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Thresh 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Line Thresh 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical port threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Thresh 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical port threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Physical Thresh 15 Minutes
Displays physical threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	Port number.
LBC-HIGH	Laser bias current maximum. Default is (15 min): 150 percent.
LBC-LOW	Laser bias current minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
OPT-HIGH	Optical power transmitted maximum. Default is (15 min): 120 percent.
OPT-LOW	Optical power transmitted minimum. Default is (15 min): 80 percent.
OPR-HIGH	Optical power received maximum. Default is (15 min): 200 percent.
OPR-LOW	Optical power received minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
Set OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR) establishes the received power level as 100 percent. If the receiver power decreases, then the OPR percentage decreases to reflect the loss in receiver power. For example, if the receiver power decreases 3 dBm, the OPR decreases 50 percent.
Physical Thresh 1 Day
Displays physical threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port No.	Port number.
LBC-HIGH	Laser bias current maximum. Default is (15 min): 150 percent.
LBC-LOW	Laser bias current minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
OPT-HIGH	Optical power transmitted maximum. Default is (15 min): 120 percent.
OPT-LOW	Optical power transmitted minimum. Default is (15 min): 80 percent.
OPR-HIGH	Optical power received maximum. Default is (15 min): 200 percent.
OPR-LOW	Optical power received minimum. Default is (15 min): 50 percent.
Set OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR) establishes the received power level as 100 percent. If the receiver power decreases, then the OPR percentage decreases to reflect the loss in receiver power. For example, if the receiver power decreases 3 dBm, the OPR decreases 50 percent.

C.8.6.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-805) allows you to view and update OC48 STS information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-805 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM), and XC loopback status.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.6.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-806) allows you to view and update OC48 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-806 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current state of the port.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.8.6.6  Transceiver Tab

The Transceiver tab (see Table C-807) allows you to view and update OC48 transceiver information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-807 Field Descriptions for the Transceiver Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	The port number.
Non-normalized LBC (mA)	The actual operating value of laser bias current (mA) for the specified card port.
Non-normalized OPT (dBm)	The actual operating value of optical power transmitted (dbm) for the specified card port.
Non-normalized OPR (dBm)	The actual operating value of optical power received (dBm) for the specified card port.

C.8.6.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-808) allows you to view and update OC48 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-808 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.6.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-809) allows you to view and update OC48 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-809 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the OC48 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.6.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-810) allows you to view the OC48 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-810 Field Description for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.7  Slot Properties—OC48 IR 1310 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The ONS 15454 Optical Connector (OC48 IR 1310) card provides one intermediate-range, Telcordia GR-253-CORE compliant SONET OC-48 port per card. Each port operates at 2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated, or concatenated payloads at STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c signal levels.

For the OC48 IR 1310 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, Auto Laser Shutdown, and J1 Path Trace.

---

Note The OC48 any slot (AS) card supports J1 path trace, but the OC48 card does not.

---

C.8.7.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC48 IR 1310 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.7.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-811) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-811 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Administration State	The port administration state. It can be: •IS—Puts the port in service •IS, AINS—Puts the port in automatic in service •OOS, DSBLD—Removes the port from service and disables it •OOS, MT—Removes the port from service for maintenance
Service State	Overall condition of the port. It can be: •IS_NR—In Service and Normal •OOS_AU, AINS—Out of Service and Autonomous, Automatic In Service •OOS_MA, DSBLD—Out of Service and Management, Disabled •OOS_MA, MT—Out of Service and Management, Maintenance
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.7.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-812) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-812 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Subfield	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
AdminSSM	If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU (synchronization traceability unknown). AdminSSM allows you to override the STU value with one of the following: •PRS—Primary reference source (Stratum 1) •STS2—Stratum 2 •TNC—Transit node clock •STS3E—Stratum 3E •STS3—Stratum 3 •SMC—SONET minimum clock •ST4—Stratum 4
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
BLSR Ext. Byte	Select an alternate BLSR byte. Choices are Z2, E2, or F1.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
PSC-S	Protection switching count—span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration—span
PSC-R	Protection switching count—ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration—ring
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
PSC-S	Protection switching count—span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration—span
PSC-R	Protection switching count—ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration—ring
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Section Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.8.7.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-813) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 STS information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-813 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and XC loopback status.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.7.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-814) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-814 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.8.7.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-815) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-815 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.7.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-816) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-816 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.7.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-817) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 ALS parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-817 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the ALS mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.8.7.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-818) allows you to view and update OC48 IR 1310 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

---

Note The OC48_AS card supports J1 path trace, but the OC48 card does not.

---

Table C-818 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Member Number	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.8  Slot Properties—OC48 LR 1550 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15327 or ONS 15454 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The OC48 LR 1550 card provides one long-range, SONET OC-48 port per card, compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at 2.49 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports VT, nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads at STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-12c, or STS-48c signal levels.

For the OC48 LR 1550 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, STS, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, Auto Laser Shutdown, and Info.

---

Note The OC48 any slot (AS) card supports J1 path trace, but the OC48 card does not.

---

C.8.8.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OC48 LR 1550 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.8.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-819) allows you to view and update OC48 LR 1550 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-819 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service - Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service - Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service - Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service - Autonomous and Management
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.8.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-820) allows you to view and update OC48 LR 1550 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-820 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Subfield	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter the name of the optical port.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port as SONET or SDH.
PJSTSMon#	Sets the STS that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. •0 (default)-3 (OC3, per port) •0 (default)-12 (OC-12) •0 (default)-48 (OC-48)
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
BLSR Ext. Byte	Select an alternate BLSR byte. Choices are Z2, E2, or F1.
ALS Mode	Allows you to select the ALS mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test). ALS is a laser safety feature defined by ITU G.664.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management
AdminSSM	If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU (synchronization traceability unknown). AdminSSM allows you to override the STU value with one of the following: •PRS—Primary reference source (Stratum 1) •STS2—Stratum 2 •TNC—Transit node clock •STS3E—Stratum 3E •STS3—Stratum 3 •SMC—SONET minimum clock •ST4—Stratum 4
Send <FF> DoNotUse	When checked, sends a special do not use (DUS) (0xff) message on the S1 byte.
Line Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
PSC-S	Protection switching count—span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration—span
PSC-R	Protection switching count—ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration—ring
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Line Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end optical line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Near End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
PSC	Protection switching count—Near-end only
PSD	Protection switching duration—Near-end only
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
PSC-S	Protection switching count—span
PSD-S	Protection switching duration—span
PSC-R	Protection switching count—ring
PSD-R	Protection switching duration—ring
Far End
Port Number	The optical port number
ES-L	Errored seconds-line
SES-L	Severely errored seconds-line
CV-L	Coding violations-line
UAS-L	Unavailable seconds-line
FC-L	Failure count-line
Section Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section
Section Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The optical port number
CV-S	Coding violations-section
ES-S	Errored seconds-section
SES-S	Severely errored seconds-section
SEFS-S	Severely errored framing seconds-section

C.8.8.4  STS Tab

The STS tab (see Table C-821) allows you to view and update OC48 LR 1550 STS information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-821 Field Descriptions for the STS Tab 

Field	Description
STS Config
Displays the STS number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and XC loopback status.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The synchronous transport signal number
CV-P	Coding violations-path
ES-P	Errored seconds-path
SES-P	Severely errored seconds-path
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-path
FC-P	Failure count-path
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count, STS path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJCS-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count, STS path detected
PJCS-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count, STS path generated
PJC-Diff	The sum of the absolute values of differences between positive transmitted and received, and negative transmitted and received. The important metric on pointer justification is not the exact counts, but how many were absorbed.
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
STS Number	The STS number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.8.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-822) allows you to view and update OC48 LR 1550 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-822 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (none). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Displays the overall availability of the entity. Values are: •IS_NR—In Service-Normal •OOS_AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS_MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS_AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management

C.8.8.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-823) allows you to view and update OC48 LR 1550 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-823 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.8.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-824) allows you to view and update OC48 LR 1550 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-824 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.8.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-825) allows you to view and update OC48 LR 1550 ALS parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-825 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the ALS mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.8.8.9  Info Tab

The Info tab (see Table C-826) allows you to view nominal operating values set during manufacturing for the OC48 LR 1550 module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-826 Field Descriptions for the Info Tab 

Field	Description
Extended Manufacturing Information
Attribute	(Read-only) Displays the nominal card specification.
Value	(Read-only) Displays the value of the attribute.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.9  Slot Properties—OECP-L Modules

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The Odd/Even Channel Processor-L band-Active (OECP-L) and Odd/Even Channel Processor-L band-Passive (OECP-L-P) modules are bidirectional multiplexer/demultiplexers. On the transmit side, the OECP-L-P module multiplexes the 20 odd-numbered channel signal and the 20 even-numbered channel signal into a composite 40-channel signal. The channels in the 20-channel signal are spaced at 100 GHz. The channels in the 40-channel composite signal are spaced at 50 GHz. On the receive side, the OECP-L module demultiplexes the composite 40-channel signal into two separate 20-channel signals.

---

Note Operating temperature is monitored on the L-band boards only when they are configured as ACTIVE (OECP-L).

---

The card faceplate is shown in Figure C-49.

Figure C-49 Cisco ONS 15808 Odd/Even Channel Processor-L Band

OECP-L modules shown on this sheet include:

•Odd/Even Channel Processor-L band-Active (OECP-L)

•Odd/Even Channel Processor-L band-Passive (OECP-L--P)

For ONS 15808 OECP-L modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, and Input Power.

C.8.9.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the OECP-L module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the OECP PM Table.

C.8.9.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-827) allows you to view and update OECP-L module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-827 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the OECP-L module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the OECP-L module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the OECP-L module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the OECP-L module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the OECP-L module.
State	Allows you to place the OECP-L module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the OECP-L module.

C.8.9.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-828) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the OECP-L module operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-828 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Operating Temperature 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Fail Low	Sets the operating temperature low failure threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade Low	Sets the operating temperature low degrade threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade High	Sets the operating temperature high degrade threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Fail High	Sets the operating temperature high failure threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
Maximum Insertion Loss 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current total optical power loss (in dB) for the OECP-L module. Insertion loss is the total optical power loss caused by insertion of an optical component.

C.8.9.4  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-829) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the OECP-L module lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-829 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current Laser 1 input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the Laser 1 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.10  Slot Properties—STM-1 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The STM-1 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 (STM1_4 and STM1_8) card provides four or eight intermediate or short range, ITU-T G.707-, ITU-T G.957-compliant, SDH STM-1 ports. Each port operates at 155.52 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads at the STM-1 signal level on a per VC-4 basis.

For the STM-1 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, Auto Laser Shutdown, and J1 Path Trace. The tabs shown depend on the NE configuration.

C.8.10.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the STM-1 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.8.10.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-830) allows you to view and update STM-1 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-830 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware version number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.10.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-831) allows you to view and update STM-1 optical line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-831 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port.
PJVC-4 Mon#	Sets the VC that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no VC is monitored. Only one VC can be monitored on each STM port.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
MS-SPRing Ext. Byte	Select an alternate MS-SPRing byte.
RS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
RS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
MS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration
MS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration

C.8.10.4  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-832) allows you to view and update STM-1 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-832 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4
Displays the VC-4 number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and the XC loopback status. The XC Loopback field only appears on ONS 15454 SDH Release 4.0.
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Threshold 1 Day
Displays path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.10.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-833) allows you to view and update STM-1 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-833 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.8.10.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-834) allows you to view and update STM-1 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-834 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.10.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-835) allows you to view and update STM-1 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-835 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.10.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-836) allows you to view and update ALS parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-836 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.8.10.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-837) allows you to view and retrieve J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-837 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.11  Slot Properties—STM-16 Card (ONS 15454 SDH)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card provides one intermediate-range, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957-compliant, SDH STM-16 port per card. The interface operates at 2.488 Gbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads at STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16 signal levels on a per VC-4 basis.

For the STM-16 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, Auto Laser Shutdown, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.11.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the STM-16 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.11.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-838) allows you to view and update STM-16 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-838 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.11.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-839) allows you to view and update STM-16 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-839 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port.
PJVC-4 Mon#	Sets the VC that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no VC is monitored. Only one VC can be monitored on each STM port.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
MS-SPRing Ext. Byte	Select an alternate MS-SPRing byte.
RS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
RS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
MS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration
MS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration

C.8.11.4  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-840) allows you to view and update STM-16 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-840 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4
Displays the VC-4 number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and the XC loopback status.
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Threshold 1 Day
Displays path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.11.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-841) allows you to view and update STM-16 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-841 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.8.11.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-842) allows you to view and update STM-16 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-842 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.11.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-843) allows you to view and update STM-16 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-843 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.11.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-844) allows you to view and update ALS parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-844 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.8.11.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-845) allows you to view and retrieve STM-16 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-845 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Mem Num	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.12  Slot Properties—STM-16 Card (ONS 15600 SDH)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15600 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The STM-16 card provides 16 long-haul STM-16 ITU-T G.957 L-16.2 compliant signals. The ports operate at the ITU-T G.707 compliant 2488.320 Mbps rate over a single-mode fiber span. The card has four physical connector adapters with eight fibers per connector adapter. The card VC4 payloads and concatenated payloads at VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, or VC4-16c signal levels.

For the STM-16 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-4, Loopback, Transceiver, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.12.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the STM16 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.12.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-846) allows you to view and update STM-16 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-846 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Hardware Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.12.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-847) allows you to view and update STM-16 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-847 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Synchronization Status Message	SDH protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source.
MS-SPRing Ext. Byte	Select an alternate MS-SPRing byte.
Type	Defines the port.
MS Thresh 15 Min (Near End)
Displays near-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
MS Thresh 15 Min (Far End)
Displays far-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
MS Thresh 1 Day (Near End)
Displays near-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
MS Thresh 15 Min (Far End)
Displays far-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
RS Thresh 15 Min (Near End)
Displays near-end regenerator threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block-regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors-regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds-regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds-regenerator section
RS Thresh 1 Day (Near End)
Displays near-end regenerator threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block-regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors-regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds-regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds-regenerator section
Physical Thresh 15 Min
Displays near-end physical threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Port number
LBC-HIGH	High laser bias current threshold
LBC-LOW	Low laser bias current threshold
OPT-HIGH	High optical power transmitted threshold
OPT-LOW	Low optical power transmitted threshold
OPR-HIGH	High optical power received threshold
OPR-LOW	Low optical power received threshold
SET-OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR)
Physical Thresh 1 Day
Displays near-end physical threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Port number
LBC-HIGH	High laser bias current threshold
LBC-LOW	Low laser bias current threshold
OPT-HIGH	High optical power transmitted threshold
OPT-LOW	Low optical power transmitted threshold
OPR-HIGH	High optical power received threshold
OPR-LOW	Low optical power received threshold
SET-OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR)

C.8.12.4  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-848) allows you to view and update STM-16 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-848 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4 Config
VC-4 Number	Displays the VC-4 number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and the XC loopback status.
IPPM Enabled	Check to enable IPPM and uncheck to disable IPPM.
XC Loopback	Indicates cross-connect loopback.
Path Thresh 15 Min (Near End)
Displays near-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
Path Thresh 15 Min (Far End)
Displays far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Path Thresh 1 Day (Near End)
Displays near-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
Path Thresh 1 Day (Far End)
Displays far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Customer Info
Displays customer information. The tab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.12.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-849) allows you to view and update STM-16 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-849 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Shows the administrative state of the port, In Service (IS), Out of Service-Disabled (OOS, DSBLD), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed

C.8.12.6  Transceiver Tab

The Transceiver tab (see Table C-850) allows you to view and update STM-16 transceiver information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-850 Field Descriptions for the Transceiver Tab 

Field	Description
Port No	Port No. Port number 1-14.
Non-normalized LBC (mA)	The actual operating value of laser bias current (mA) for the specified card port.
Non-normalized OPT (dBm)	The actual operating value of optical power transmitted (dbm) for the specified card port.
Non-normalized OPR (dBm)	The actual operating value of optical power received (dBm) for the specified card port.

C.8.12.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-851) allows you to view and update STM-16 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-851 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.12.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-852) allows you to view and update STM-16 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-852 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.12.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-853) allows you to view and retrieve STM-16 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-853 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Column	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Mem Num	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.13  Slot Properties—STM-1E-12 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The twelve-port ONS 15454 SDH STM-1E-12 card provides twelve ITU-compliant, G.703 STM-1 ports per card. Ports 9 to 12 can be switched to E-4 instead of STM-1. Each interface operates at 155.52 Mbps for STM-1 or 139.264 Mbps for E-4 over a 75-ohm coaxial cable (with the FMEC STM1E NP card, the FMEC STM1E 1:1 card, or the FMEC STM1E 1:3 card). In E-4 mode, framed or unframed signal operation is possible. The STM1E-12 card operates as a working or protect card in 1:1 and in 1:3 protection schemes.

For the STM-1E-12 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.13.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the STM1E-12 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.13.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-854) allows you to view and update STM-1E-12 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-854 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.13.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-855) allows you to view and update STM-1E-12 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following subtabs:

Table C-855 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port.
PJVC-4 Mon#	Sets the VC that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no VC is monitored. Only one VC can be monitored on each STM port.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
MS-SPRing Ext. Byte	Select an alternate MS-SPRing byte.
Port
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Interface	Displays the SDH interface.
RS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SEFS-RS	Severely errored framing seconds
EB-RS	Errored blocks
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
BBE-RS(FE)	Background block errors
RS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SEFS-RS	Severely errored framing seconds
EB-RS	Errored blocks
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
BBE-RS(FE)	Background block errors
MS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end section multiplex threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS(FE)	Errored blocks
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS(FE)	Errored seconds
SES-MS(FE)	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS(FE)	Unavailable seconds
MS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end section multiplex threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS(FE)	Errored blocks
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS(FE)	Errored seconds
SES-MS(FE)	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS(FE)	Unavailable seconds

C.8.13.4  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-856) allows you to view and update STM-1E-12 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following subtabs:

Table C-856 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4
Displays the VC-4 number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and the XC loopback status.
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Threshold 1 Day
Displays path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	Displays the Customer ID associated to individual time slot
Service ID	Displays the Service ID associated to individual time slot
J1 Path Trace Table
Displays the circuit J1 path trace information. Select a path trace and click Modify to open the J1 Path Trace window. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
STS Number	The STS number
Expected String	The current expected string
Received String	The current received string
Mode	The path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual)
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte
Mismatched	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received

C.8.13.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-857) allows you to view and update STM-1E-12 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-857 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.

C.8.13.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-858) allows you to view and update STM-1E-12 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-858 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.13.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-859) allows you to view and update STM-1E-12 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-859 Field Description for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.13.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-860) allows you to view and retrieve STM-1E-12 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-860 Slot Properties for the J1 Path Trace 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Mem Num	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.14  Slot Properties—STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 (STM4_1 and STM4_4) card provides one or four intermediate or short range, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957-compliant, SDH STM-4 ports per card. The interface operates at 622.08 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports concatenated or nonconcatenated payloads on a per VC-4 basis.

For the STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 card, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.14.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.8.14.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-861) allows you to view and update STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-861 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.14.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-862) allows you to view and update STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-862 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port.
PJVC-4 Mon#	Sets the VC that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no VC is monitored. Only one VC can be monitored on each STM port.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
MS-SPRing Ext. Byte	Select an alternate MS-SPRing byte.
RS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
RS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
MS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working
MS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count—working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration—working

C.8.14.4  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-863) allows you to view and update STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-863 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4
Displays the VC-4 number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and the XC loopback status.
Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Threshold 1 Day
Displays path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Customer Info
Displays customer information. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	Displays the Customer ID associated to individual time slot
Service ID	Displays the Service ID associated to individual time slot

C.8.14.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-864) allows you to view and update STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-864 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.8.14.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-865) allows you to view and update STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-865 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.14.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-866) allows you to view and update STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-866 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Parent Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the card from the drop-down list.
Port Number	Displays the STM-4 port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.14.8  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-867) allows you to view and retrieve STM-4 IR/STM4 SH 1310 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-867 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.15  Slot Properties—STM-64 LH 1550 Card (ONS 15454 SDH)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The STM-64 LH 1550 card provides one long-range SONET/SDH STM64 port compliant with the International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) G.707, ITU-T G.957, Telcordia GR-1377-CORE, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The card port operates at 9.96 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km when using fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. The card supports VT and nonconcatenated or concatenated payloads.

For the STM-64 LH 1550 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-4, Loopback, Protection, Alarm Behavior, Auto Laser Shutdown, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.15.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the STM-64 LH 1550 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s).

C.8.15.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-868) allows you to view and update STM-64 LH 1550 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-868 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number of the card.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.15.3  Line

The Line tab (see Table C-869) allows you to view and update STM-64 LH 1550 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-869 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
Type	Defines the port.
PJVC-4 Mon#	Sets the VC that will be used for pointer justification. If set to 0, no VC is monitored. Only one VC can be monitored on each STM port.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
AINS Soak	Auto-in service soak. The determination of duration left before the traffic/termination transitions to IS state.
AINS Soak Count Down	Automatic in-service soak countdown. Displays the remaining time of valid input signal in hh:mm, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically.
MS-SPRing Ext. Byte	Select an alternate MS-SPRing byte.
RS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
RS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end regenerator section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored blocks
BBE-RS	Background block errors
ES-RS	Errored seconds
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds
MS Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored blocks
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration
MS Threshold 1 Day
Displays near- and far-end multiplex section threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored blocks
BBE-MS	Background block errors
ES-MS	Errored seconds
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds
PPJC-PDET	Positive pointer justification count, path detected
NPJC-PDET	Negative pointer justification count, path detected
PPJC-PGEN	Positive pointer justification count, path generated
NPJC-PGEN	Negative pointer justification count, path generated
PSC	Protection switching counts
PSD	Protection switching duration

C.8.15.4  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-870) allows you to view and update STM-64 LH 1550 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-870 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4
Displays the VC-4 number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and the XC loopback status. The XC Loopback field only appears on ONS 15454 SDH Release 4.0.
Path Threshold 15 Minutes
Displays path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored blocks-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Path Threshold 1 Day
Displays path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored blocks-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority

C.8.15.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-871) allows you to view and update STM-64 LH 1550 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-871 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
State	Displays the current loopback state.
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or clear the current loopback (none).

C.8.15.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-872) allows you to view and update STM-64 LH 1550 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-872 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.15.7  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-873) allows you to view and update STM-64 LH 1550 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-873 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.15.8  Auto Laser Shutdown Tab

The Auto Laser Shutdown tab (see Table C-874) allows you to view and update STM-64 LH 1550 ALS parameters. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-874 Field Descriptions for the Auto Laser Shutdown Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Displays the port number.
ALS Mode	Displays the auto laser shutdown mode (Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, or Manual Restart for Test).
Rec. Pulse Dur. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse duration, in seconds. The range is 2.0 to 100.0 seconds.
Rec. Pulse Int. (sec)	Allows you to set the received laser pulse interval, in seconds. The range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Status	Displays the current laser status. Values are Shutdown or Not Shutdown.
Request Restart	If selected, it allows you to request a laser restart. This parameter is configurable only when the ALS mode is set to Manual Restart or Manual Restart for Test and when the laser status is Shut Down.

C.8.15.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-875) allows you to view and retrieve STM-64 LH 1550 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-875 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
STS Number	Displays the STS number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.8.16  Slot Properties—STM-64 LR/LH 4 Card (ONS 15600 SDH)

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15600 SDH slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The STM-64 LR/LH 4 port 1550 card provides 4 long-haul STM-64 ITU-T G.9691 L-64.2c compliant signals. The ports operate at the ITU-T G.707 compliant 9953.28 Mbps rate over a single-mode fiber span. The card has four physical connector adapters with two fibers per connector adapter. The card VC4 payloads and concatenated payloads at VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, or VC-64c signal levels.

For the STM-64 LR/LH 4 module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Line, VC-4, Loopback, Transceiver, Protection, Alarm Behavior, and J1 Path Trace.

C.8.16.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the STM-64 LR/LH 4 that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Alarms are also displayed when you move the mouse pointer over the graphic.) The Suppress Alarms check box is read-only and indicates whether all alarms are suppressed for the card and its port(s). Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to reset, delete, or change the card.

C.8.16.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-876) allows you to view and update STM-64 LR/LH 4 identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-876 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
Equipment Type	Displays the equipment type the slot is provisioned for.
Actual Equipment Type	Displays the actual card that is installed in the slot.
HW Part Number	Displays the card part number that is printed on the top of the card.
Hardware Revision	Displays the hardware revision number.
Serial Number	Displays the card serial number that is unique to each card.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Firmware Version	Displays the revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card.
User Code	Allows you to enter an ASCII string to identify the card. The user code is stored in nonvolatile memory so that it is not lost when the unit is moved or stored as a spare.
Product ID	Displays a product ID string of 63 characters maximum. If the card does not support the product ID, the field shows N/A.
Version ID	Displays a version ID string in the format "V99_." The version ID always begins with a V and ends with a space. If the card does not support the version ID, the field shows N/A.
Equipment State	Displays the equipment state of the card.
Alarm Profile	Sets the alarm profile for the port. Check the Suppress Alarms check box to suppress all alarms for this card and its port(s).

C.8.16.3  Line Tab

The Line tab (see Table C-877) allows you to view and update STM-64 LR/LH 4 line performance monitoring information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-877 Field Descriptions for the Line Tab 

Field	Description
Line Config
Port Number	Displays the optical port number.
Port Name	Allows you to enter an optical port name.
SD BER	Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
SF BER	Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
ProvidesSync	If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
EnableSyncMsg	Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Send DoNotUse	When checked, sends a DNS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
Admin State	Displays the status of the line. The line can be In Service (IS), In Service-Auto In Service Soak (IS_AINS), Out of Service (OOS), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Synchronization Status Message	SDH protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source.
MS-SPRing Ext. Byte	Select an alternate MS-SPRing byte.
Type	Defines the port.
MS Thresh 15 Min (Near End)
Displays near-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
MS Thresh 15 Min (Far End)
Displays far-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
MS Thresh 1 Day (Near End)
Displays near-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
PSC	Protection switching count
PSD	Protection switching duration
PSC-W	Protection switching count-working
PSD-W	Protection switching duration-working
MS Thresh 15 Min (Far End)
Displays far-end multiplex line threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-MS	Errored block-multiplex section
ES-MS	Errored seconds-multiplex section
SES-MS	Severely errored seconds-multiplex section
BBE-MS	Background block errors-multiplex section
UAS-MS	Unavailable seconds-multiplex section
RS Thresh 15 Min (Near End)
Displays near-end regenerator threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block-regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors-regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds-regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds-regenerator section
RS Thresh 1 Day (Near End)
Displays near-end regenerator threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	The port number
EB-RS	Errored block-regenerator section
BBE-RS	Background block errors-regenerator section
ES-RS	Errored seconds-regenerator section
SES-RS	Severely errored seconds-regenerator section
Physical Thresh 15 Min
Displays near-end physical threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Port number
LBC-HIGH	High laser bias current threshold
LBC-LOW	Low laser bias current threshold
OPT-HIGH	High optical power transmitted threshold
OPT-LOW	Low optical power transmitted threshold
OPR-HIGH	High optical power received threshold
OPR-LOW	Low optical power received threshold
SET-OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR)
Physical Thresh 1 Day
Displays near-end physical threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
Port Number	Port number
LBC-HIGH	High laser bias current threshold
LBC-LOW	Low laser bias current threshold
OPT-HIGH	High optical power transmitted threshold
OPT-LOW	Low optical power transmitted threshold
OPR-HIGH	High optical power received threshold
OPR-LOW	Low optical power received threshold
SET-OPR	Setting the optical power received (OPR)

C.8.16.4  VC-4 Tab

The VC-4 tab (see Table C-878) allows you to view and update STM-64 LR/LH 4 VC-4 information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-878 Field Descriptions for the VC-4 Tab 

Field	Description
VC-4 Config
Displays the VC-4 number, the intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) status, and the XC loopback status.
Path Thresh 15 Min (Near End)
Displays near-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
Path Thresh 15 Min (Far End)
Displays far-end path threshold information received during the past 15 minutes. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Path Thresh 1 Day (Near End)
Displays near-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
PPJC-Pdet	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
NPJC-Pdet	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path detected
PPJC-Pgen	Positive pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
NPJC-Pgen	Negative pointer justification count-VC4 path generated
Path Thresh 1 Day (Far End)
Displays far-end path threshold information received during the past day. This subtab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
EB-HP	Errored block-high priority
BBE-HP	Background block errors-high priority
ES-HP	Errored seconds-high priority
SES-HP	Severely errored seconds-high priority
UAS-P	Unavailable seconds-high priority
Customer Info
Displays customer information. The tab contains the following fields.
VC Number	The VC number
Customer ID	The user-defined customer ID number
Service ID	The user-defined service ID number

C.8.16.5  Loopback Tab

The Loopback tab (see Table C-879) allows you to view and update STM-64 LR/LH 4 loopback information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-879 Field Descriptions for the Loopback Tab 

Field	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
Admin State	Shows the administrative state of the port, In Service (IS), Out of Service-Disabled (OOS, DSBLD), or Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS_MT).
Loopback Type	Allows you to configure a port to terminal loopback (Inward) or Facility (Line), or clear the current loopback (None). Note The line state must be OOS_MT before you can configure the loopback type.
Service State	Shows the service states. It can be: •IS_NR: In Service; able to carry traffic •OOS_MA, DSBLD: Out of Service-Disabled; unable to carry traffic •OOS_MA, MT: Out of Service-Maintenance; alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed

C.8.16.6  Transceiver Tab

The Transceiver tab (see Table C-880) allows you to view and update STM-64 LR/LH 4 transceiver information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-880 Field Descriptions for the Transceiver Tab 

Field	Description
Port No.	Port No. Port number 1-14.
Non-normalized LBC (mA)	The actual operating value of laser bias current (mA) for the specified card port.
Non-normalized OPT (dBm)	The actual operating value of optical power transmitted (dbm) for the specified card port.
Non-normalized OPR (dBm)	The actual operating value of optical power received (dBm) for the specified card port.

C.8.16.7  Protection Tab

The Protection tab (see Table C-881) allows you to view and update STM-64 LR/LH 4 protection group information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-881 Field Descriptions for the Protection Tab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection group.

C.8.16.8  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab (see Table C-882) allows you to view and update STM-64 LR/LH 4 alarm profile information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-882 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	(Read-only) Displays the alarm profile that has been configured for the card.
Suppress Alarms	(Read-only) If checked, indicates that all alarms are suppressed for the card.
Port Number	(Read-only) Displays the card port number.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the port from the drop-down list. Values are Default, Inherited, or a customized alarm profile.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.
Alarm Profile	Choose an alarm profile for all ports.
Force To All Ports	When clicked, forces all the ports to the selected alarm profile.

C.8.16.9  J1 Path Trace Tab

The J1 Path Trace tab (see Table C-883) allows you to view and retrieve STM-64 LR/LH 4 J1 path trace information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-883 Field Descriptions for the J1 Path Trace Tab 

Column	Description
Port Number	Displays the port number.
VC Number	Displays the VC number.
Expected String	Displays the current expected string.
Received String	Displays the current received string.
Mode	Displays the path trace mode (Off/None, Auto, or Manual).
C2	Represents a machine-generated J1/J2 payload label byte.
Mismatch	Indicates whether there is a mismatch in the C2 byte received.
Vcat Mem Num	Displays the virtual concatenation (VCAT) member number.
Display	Click the Display button to view the circuit trace information. See 7.2.19.1  Viewing a J1 Path Trace from the NE Explorer, page 7-80 for more information.
Retrieve	Click the Retrieve button to retrieve J1 path trace information.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9  Transponder Cards

This section describes the following transponder cards supported within CTM:

•Slot Properties—BT10E-LCxx and BT10E-LLxx Cards

•Slot Properties—FEC-LEM Card

•Slot Properties—LEM Card

•Slot Properties—LEM-10-B1 Card

•Slot Properties—LEM-10G-Nxx Card

•Slot Properties—LEM-EM-M Card

•Slot Properties—LT Card

•Slot Properties—RT Card

•Slot Properties—RXT Card

•Slot Properties—RXT-10G-N Card

•Slot Properties—RXT-10H-M Card

•Slot Properties—RXT-B1 Monitoring Card

•Slot Properties—RXT-FEC Card

•Slot Properties—Transmitter Transponder Module

•Slot Properties—WCM

•Slot Properties—WCM-10G-Nxx

•Slot Properties—WCM-FEC

•Slot Properties—WCM-EM-Fxx

•Slot Properties—WCM-EM-Mxx

•Slot Properties—WCM10

C.9.1  Slot Properties—BT10E-LCxx and BT10E-LLxx Cards

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The bidirectional line transponder (BT10E-LCxx and BT10E-LLxx) performs a rate adaptation between the 10 GE client interface (10.312 Gbps) and the FEC payload rate (9.9532 Gbps). The BT10E-LCxx and BT10E-LLxx support a constant flow of maximum Ethernet packet length (1518 bytes) with a minimum average IPG =10.5. BT10E cards can support jumbo frames with a maximum packet length of 12000 bytes.

The Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Transmit Direction, Receive Direction, and Action.

C.9.1.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the BT Transponder PM Table.

C.9.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-884) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-884 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the transponder.

C.9.1.3  Transmit Direction Tab

The Transmit Direction tab allows you to configure the BT10E-LCxx and BT10E-LLxx transmit direction properties. It contains the following subtabs:

•Temperature Subtab

•Current Subtab

•Power Subtab

•Input Power Subtab

•Output Power Subtab

•QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day Subtabs

C.9.1.3.1  Temperature Subtab

The Temperature subtab (seeTable C-885) allows you to assign temperature-related thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-885 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Subtab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.1.3.2  Current Subtab

The Current subtab (see Table C-886) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-886 Field Descriptions for the Current Subtab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.1.3.3  Power Subtab

The Power subtab (see Table C-887) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-887 Field Descriptions for the Power Subtab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 (in mW).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.1.3.4  Input Power Subtab

The Input Power subtab (see Table C-888) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the transponder lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-888 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.1.3.5  Output Power Subtab

The Output Power subtab (see Table C-889) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-889 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Subtab 

Field	Description
Output Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.1.3.6  QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day Subtabs

The QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day subtabs (see Table C-890) allow you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for quality of service (QoS) counters. Click the QoS 15 min tab to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the QoS 1 day tab to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The two tabs have identical fields.

Table C-890 Field Descriptions for the QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day Subtabs 

Field	Description
Runts Packets	Number of transmitted runt frames (packets). Runts are packets less then 64 bytes long but well formed.
Giants Packets	Number of received giants frame (packets). Giants are well formed packets greater then 1518 bytes
Total Errors	Displays the total number of received errors.
Total CRC	Number of transmitted packets (length = 64 -1518) with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS).
Total PCS Errored Block	The number of decoding errored blocks.
Total Oversize Packets	Number of transmitted frames (packets) exceeding the configured buffer size and that will be dropped.

C.9.1.4  Receive Direction Tab

The Receive Direction tab allows you to configure the BT10E-LCxx and BT10E-LLxx receive direction properties. The Receive Direction tab contains the following subtabs:

•Input Power Subtab

•Output Power Subtab

•QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day Subtabs

C.9.1.4.1  Input Power Subtab

The Input Power subtab (see Table C-891) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the transponder lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-891 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.1.4.2  Output Power Subtab

The Output Power subtab (see Table C-892) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-892 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Subtab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power (in dBm).
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.1.4.3  QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day Subtabs

The QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day subtabs (see Table C-893) allow you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for quality of service (QoS) counters. Click the QoS 15 min tab to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the QoS 1 day tab to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The two tabs have identical fields.

Table C-893 Field Descriptions for the QoS 15 Min and QoS 1 Day Subtabs 

Field	Description
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30% errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Error Corrected Rate	Sets the high threshold for the bit error corrected rate (ECR) and the alarm severity level. The ECR is the ratio of FEC bit errors corrected to bits transmitted.
Uncorrected Codewords Rate	Sets the high threshold for the uncorrected codeword rate (UCR) and the alarm severity level. The UCR is the ratio of uncorrected codewords to codewords transmitted. A codeword is a block of N symbols that carry K information symbols and R redundant symbols (N = K+R).

C.9.1.5  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-894) allows you to force the ONS 15808 optical output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-894 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power Setting
Force Optical Output Power	Allows you to activate the output power control mode on the BT transponder and force the transponder to regulate the optical output power. An improper setting of the transponder output power level could either: •Affect the equalization of the channel downstream from the optical line, the optical channel S/N in fiber, and at the end of the optical line. •Affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. Click Execute to activate this feature.
Transparency Configuration	Allows you to activate CDL Transparency Configuration, which allows you to configure the preamble transparency by the BT10E-LCxx module. Click Execute to activate this feature.
Buffer Size Configuration (packets)	Allows you to activate the Buffer Size Configuration action, which allows you to configure the packet buffer size. Click Execute to activate this feature.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.2  Slot Properties—FEC-LEM Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module's performance monitoring thresholds.

Forward error correction (FEC) line extender modules (LEMs) extend transmission distances in ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 regeneration and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-50.

Figure C-50 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 FEC Line Extender Module

The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 transponder modules shown on this sheet include:

•Line Extender Module-Externally Modulated-2.5 Gbps-FEC (LEM-EM-Fxx)

•Line Extender Module-Externally Modulated-10 Gbps-FEC (LEM-10G-Fxx)

For FEC-LEM transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.9.2.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, Equipment Inventory Table, or in the FEC-LEM PM Table.

C.9.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-895) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-895 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the transponder.

C.9.2.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-896) allows you to assign temperature-related thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-896 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.2.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-897) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for forward error correction (FEC) counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-897 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
FEC Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Error Corrected Rate	Sets the high threshold for the bit error corrected rate (ECR) and the alarm severity level. The ECR is the ratio of FEC bit errors corrected to bits transmitted.
Uncorrected Codewords Rate	Sets the high threshold for the uncorrected codeword rate (UCR) and the alarm severity level. The UCR is the ratio of uncorrected codewords to codewords transmitted. A codeword is a block of N symbols that carry K information symbols and R redundant symbols (N = K+R).

C.9.2.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-898) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-898 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the laser current.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.2.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-899) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-899 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.2.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-900) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-900 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.2.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-901) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-901 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the transponder output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the transponder output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the transponder output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.2.9  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-902) allows you to specify the output power setting. The tab contains the following action:

Table C-902 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Action	Description
Output Power Setting	The output power setting action is used to activate the output power control mode on FEC transponders and force the transponder to regulate the optical output power. An incorrect output power setting could affect the equalization of the channel downstream. Click Execute to apply your changes to the setting. Click Update to retrieve the current setting from the NE.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.3  Slot Properties—LEM Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Line extender modules (LEMs) extend transmission distances in ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 regeneration and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-51.

Figure C-51 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Line Extender Module

The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 LEM modules shown on this sheet include:

•Line Extender Module-Externally Modulated-Normal (LEM-EM-Nxx)

•Line Extender Module-622 Mbps-Normal (LEM-622-Nxx)

For these transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.3.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, and minor alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.9.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-903) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-903 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software running on the module.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the transponder.

C.9.3.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-904) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-904 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of the transponder laser.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.3.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-905) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-905 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the laser current.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.3.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-906) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-906 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.3.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-907) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-907 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.3.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-908) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-908 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.4  Slot Properties—LEM-10-B1 Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Line extender modules (LEMs) extend transmission distances in ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 regeneration and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites.

A block diagram is shown is Figure C-52.

Figure C-52 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 10-Gbps B1 Line Extender Module

The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 transponder modules shown on this sheet include:

•Line Extender Module-10 Gbps-B1 Monitoring (LEM-10G-Mxx)

•Line Extender Module-10 Gbps High Output Power-B1 Monitoring (LEM-10H-Mxx)

For these transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.4.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the B1 LEM PM Table.

C.9.4.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-909) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-909 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the transponder.

C.9.4.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-910) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-910 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.4.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-911) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-911 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.4.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-912) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-912 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the transponder laser current.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.4.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-913) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-913 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.4.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-914) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-914 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.4.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-915) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-915 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.5  Slot Properties—LEM-10G-Nxx Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Line Extender Module-10 Gbps-Normal (LEM-10G-Nxx) that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Line extender modules (LEMs) extend transmission distances in Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 regeneration and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-53.

Figure C-53 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Line Extender Module

For the LEM-10G-Nxx module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.5.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table or in the Alarm Browser.

C.9.5.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-916) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-916 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the transponder.

C.9.5.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-917) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-917 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.5.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-918) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-918 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the laser current.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.5.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-919) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-919 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.5.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-920) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-920 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.5.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-921) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-921 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.6  Slot Properties—LEM-EM-M Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Line Extender Module-Externally Modulated-B1 Monitoring (LEM-EM-M) that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Line extender modules (LEMs) extend transmission distances in Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 regeneration and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-54.

Figure C-54 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 2.5-Gbps B1 Line Extender Module

For the B1 LEM transponder, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.6.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.9.6.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-922) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-922 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the transponder.

C.9.6.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-923) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-923 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.6.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-924) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-924 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.6.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-925) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-925 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the transponder laser current.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the laser current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.6.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-926) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-926 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.6.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-927) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-927 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.6.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-928) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-928 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.7  Slot Properties—LT Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The line transponder performs 3R regeneration of 2.5 Gbps and 10 Gbps optical signals and provides performance and quality parameters based on forward error correction (FEC) overhead. Line transponders are used in regeneration sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate low output signals. Line transponders decode out-of-band (OOB) FEC information, perform error correction, and add OOB-FEC encoding to transport signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-55.

Figure C-55 Cisco ONS 15808 Line Transponder

Line transponders shown on this sheet include:

•Line Transponder-2.5 Gbps-C band (LT-25G-Cxx)

•Line Transponder-10 Gbps-C band (LT-10G-Cxx)

•Line Transponder-10 Gbps-C band-Single Slot (LT-10G-SCxx)

•Line Transponder-10 Gbps-L band-Single Slot (LT-10G-SLxx)

For ONS 15808 line transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.9.7.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the Line Transponders PM Table.

C.9.7.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-929) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-929 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the transponder.

C.9.7.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-930) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-930 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.7.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-931) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for forward error correction (FEC) counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments.

Table C-931 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
FEC Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30% errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Error Corrected Rate	Sets the high threshold for the bit error corrected rate (ECR) and the alarm severity level. The ECR is the ratio of FEC bit errors corrected to bits transmitted.
Uncorrected Codewords Rate	Sets the high threshold for the uncorrected codeword rate (UCR) and the alarm severity level. The UCR is the ratio of uncorrected codewords to codewords transmitted. A codeword is a block of N symbols that carry K information symbols and R redundant symbols (N = K+R).

C.9.7.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-932) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-932 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.7.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-933) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-933 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 (in mW).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.7.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-934) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the transponder lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-934 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.7.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-935) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-935 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.7.9  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-936) allows you to force the ONS 15808 optical output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-936 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power Setting
Force Optical Output Power	Allows you to activate the output power control mode on the FEC transponder and force the transponder to regulate the optical output power. An improper setting of the transponder output power level could either: •Affect the equalization of the channel downstream from the optical line, the optical channel S/N in fiber, and at the end of the optical line. •Affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.8  Slot Properties—RT Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The receiver transponder is used in terminal sites (receive direction) and in OADM sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate 2.5 Gbps and 10 Gbps low-input signals. Receiver transponders perform 3R regeneration of optical signals and provide quality parameters based on forward error correction (FEC) overhead and client signal validation parameters. Receiver transponders perform out-of-band (OOB) FEC decoding and error correction for transport signals, which are transmitted to SONET- or SDH-compliant client equipment. The interface complies with Bellcore GR-253 and ITU-T G.957 SONET and SDH physical interface specifications.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-56.

Figure C-56 Cisco ONS 15808 Receiver Transponder

Receiver transponders shown on this sheet include:

•Receive Transponder-2.5 Gbps-C band-FEC Coding (RT-25G-Cxx)

•Receive Transponder-10 Gbps-C band-FEC Coding (RT-10G-Cxx)

•Receive Transponder-10 Gbps-C band-Single Slot 1300 nm (RT-10G-13Cxx)

•Receive Transponder-10 Gbps-L band-Single Slot 1300 nm (RT-10G-13Lxx)

•Receive Transponder-10 Gbps-C band-Single Slot-FEC Coding (RT-10G-SCxx)

•Receive Transponder-10 Gbps-L band-Single Slot-FEC Coding (RT-10G-SLxx)

For ONS 15808 receiver transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.8.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the Receiver Transponders PM Table.

C.9.8.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-937) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-937 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the transponder.

C.9.8.3  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-938) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 and forward error correction (FEC) counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-938 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30% errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Bit Error Rate	Sets the high threshold for the B1 bit error rate and the alarm severity level. The BER is the ratio of received bits that contain errors.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
FEC Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Error Corrected Rate	Sets the high threshold for the bit error corrected rate (ECR) and the alarm severity level. The ECR is the ratio of FEC bit errors corrected to bits transmitted.
Uncorrected Codewords Rate	Sets the high threshold for the uncorrected codeword rate (UCR) and the alarm severity level. The UCR is the ratio of uncorrected codewords to codewords transmitted. A codeword is a block of N symbols that carry K information symbols and R redundant symbols (N = K+R).

C.9.8.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-939) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-939 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.8.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-940) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-940 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 (in mW).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.8.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-941) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the transponder lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-941 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.8.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-942) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-942 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.9  Slot Properties—RXT Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Cisco ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 Receive Transponder (RXT) modules are used in Cisco ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 terminal sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate low input demultiplexed signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-57.

Figure C-57 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Receive Transponder

RXT modules shown on this sheet include:

•Receive Transponder-Directly Modulated-Normal module (RXT-DM-N)

•Receive Transponder-622 Mbps-Normal module (RXT-622-N)

For these RXT modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.9.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse cursor over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the RXT PM Table.

C.9.9.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-943) allows you to view and update receive transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-943 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the receive transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (Cisco ONS 15800 or Cisco ONS 15801) where the receive transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the receive transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the receive transponder.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the receive transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the receive transponder.
State	Allows you to place the receive transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the receive transponder.

C.9.9.3  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-944) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-944 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current of the receive transponder.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.9.4  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-945) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-945 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.9.5  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-946) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power entering the receive transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-946 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.9.6  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-947) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-947 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.10  Slot Properties—RXT-10G-N Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the directly modulated Receive Transponder-10 Gbps-Normal (RXT-10G-N) module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-58.

Figure C-58 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Receive Transponder

For the RXT-10G-N module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power. Fields on these tabs are described in the following sections.

C.9.10.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.9.10.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-948) allows you to view and update receive transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-948 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the receive transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (Cisco ONS 15800 or Cisco ONS 15801) where the receive transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the receive transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the receive transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the receive transponder.
State	Allows you to place the receive transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the receive transponder.

C.9.10.3  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-949) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-949 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the receive transponder.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.10.4  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-950) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-950 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.10.5  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-951) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the receive transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-951 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder input power.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the receive transponder input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the receive transponder input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.10.6  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-952) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-952 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.11  Slot Properties—RXT-10H-M Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Receive Transponder-10 Gbps High Sensitivity-B1 Monitoring (RXT-10H-M) module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-59.

Figure C-59 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 B1 Receive Transponder

For the RXT-10H-M module, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power. Fields on these tabs are described in the following sections.

C.9.11.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse cursor over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the B1 RXT PM Table.

C.9.11.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-953) allows you to view and update receive transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-953 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the receive transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (Cisco ONS 15800 or Cisco ONS 15801) where the receive transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the receive transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the receive transponder.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the receive transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the receive transponder.
State	Allows you to place the receive transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection State	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the receive transponder.

C.9.11.3  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-954) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-954 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.11.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-955) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-955 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the receive transponder.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.11.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-956) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-956 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.11.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-957) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the receive transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-957 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder input power.
Fail	Sets the fail threshold for the receive transponder input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the receive transponder input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.11.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-958) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-958 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.12  Slot Properties—RXT-B1 Monitoring Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 receive transponder (RXT) modules are used in ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 terminal sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate low input demultiplexed signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-60.

Figure C-60 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 B1 Receive Transponder

RXTs shown on this sheet include:

•Receive Transponder-Directly Modulated-B1 Monitoring module (RXT-DM-M)

•Receive Transponder-Directly Modulated Long Haul-B1 Monitoring module (RXT-DMLH-M)

For these RXT modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.12.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the B1 RXT PM Table.

C.9.12.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-959) allows you to view and update receive transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-959 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the receive transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the receive transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the receive transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the receive transponder.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the receive transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the SCC number.
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the receive transponder.
State	Allows you to place the receive transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the receive transponder.

C.9.12.3  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-960) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-960 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.12.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-961) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-961 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the receive transponder.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.12.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-962) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-962 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.12.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-963) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the receive transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-963 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.12.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-964) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-964 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.13  Slot Properties—RXT-FEC Card

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

Receive transponder-forward error correction (RXT-FEC) modules are used in ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 terminal sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate low input demultiplexed signals.

RXT modules shown on this sheet include:

•Receive Transponder-Directly Modulated-Forward Error Correction (RXT-DM-F) 2.5 Gbps module

•Receive Transponder-10 Gbps-Forward Error Correction (RXT-10G-F) module

For FEC RXT modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.13.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the FEC RXT PM Table.

C.9.13.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-965) allows you to view and update receive transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-965 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the receive transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the receive transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the receive transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the receive transponder.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the receive transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the receive transponder.
State	Allows you to place the receive transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the receive transponder.

C.9.13.3  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-966) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 and forward error correction (FEC) counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-966 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Bit Error Rate	Sets the high threshold for the B1 bit error rate (BER) and the alarm severity level. The BER is the ratio of received bits that contain errors.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
FEC Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC ES and the alarm severity level.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC SES and the alarm severity level.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC BBE and the alarm severity level.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC UAS and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Error Corrected Rate	Sets the high threshold for the bit error corrected rate (ECR) and the alarm severity level. The ECR is the ratio of FEC bit errors corrected to bits transmitted.
Uncorrected Codewords Rate	Sets the high threshold for the uncorrected codeword rate (UCR) and the alarm severity level. The UCR is the ratio of uncorrected codewords to codewords transmitted. A codeword is a block of N symbols that carry K information symbols and R redundant symbols (N = K+R).

C.9.13.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-967) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-967 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the receive transponder.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.13.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-968) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-968 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.13.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-969) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the receive transponder. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-969 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the receive transponder input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.13.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-970) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the receive transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-970 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current receive transponder output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the receive transponder output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.14  Slot Properties—Transmitter Transponder Module

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15808 module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

The transmitter transponder performs 3R regeneration of the 2.5 Gbps and 10 Gbps optical signal and provides client signal validation parameters. The module transposes input client signals to appropriate wavelengths and transmits them to the multiplexing section of the ONS 15808 system. Transmitter transponder modules add out-of-band forward error correction (OOB-FEC) signal encoding to the client signal to improve signal quality and transport distance.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-61.

Figure C-61 Cisco ONS 15808 Transmitter Transponder

Transmitter transponders shown on this sheet include:

•Transmit Transponder-2.5 Gbps-C band-FEC Coding (TT-25G-Cxx)

•Transmit Transponder-10 Gbps-C band-FEC Coding (TT-10G-Cxx)

•Transmit Transponder-10 Gbps-C band-Single Slot-FEC Coding (TT-10G-SCxx)

•Transmit Transponder-10 Gbps-L band-Single Slot-FEC Coding (TT-10G-SLxx)

For ONS 15808 transmitter transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality Of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.9.14.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Equipment Inventory Table, in the Alarm Browser, or in the Transmitter Transponders PM Table.

C.9.14.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-971) allows you to view and update transponder identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-971 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the transponder is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808) where the transponder is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the transponder is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the transponder.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays Not Available if TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the transponder.
State	Allows you to place the transponder in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable PM collection for the transponder.

C.9.14.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-972) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the transponder operating temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-972 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius).
Low	Sets the operating temperature low threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the operating temperature high threshold, in degrees Celsius, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.14.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-973) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-973 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30% errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Bit Error Rate	Sets the high threshold for the B1 bit error rate and the alarm severity level. The BER is the ratio of received bits that contain errors.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.14.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-974) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-974 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current, in mA, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.14.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-975) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder laser power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-975 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1 (in mW).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the Laser 1 power, in mW, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.14.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-976) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the power coming into the transponder lasers. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-976 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder input power (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the input power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.14.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-977) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for the transponder output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-977 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current transponder output power (in dBm).
Low	Sets the low threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the output power, in dBm, and the alarm severity level.

C.9.14.9  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-978) allows you to force the ONS 15808 optical output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-978 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power Setting
Force Optical Output Power	Allows you to activate the output power control mode on the transponder and force the transponder to regulate the optical output power. An improper setting of the transponder output power level could either: •Affect the equalization of the channel downstream from the optical line, the optical channel S/N in fiber, and at the end of the optical line. •Affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.15  Slot Properties—WCM

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module.

Wavelength Converter Modules (WCMs) are used at terminal (transmit direction) and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate SONET and SDH signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-62.

Figure C-62 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Wavelength Converter Module

WCMs shown on this sheet include:

•Wavelength Converter Module-Externally Modulated-Normal (WCM-EM-Nxx)

•Wavelength Converter Module-622 Mbps-Normal (WCM-622-Nxx)

For WCM transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.15.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser or in the Equipment Inventory Table.

C.9.15.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-979) allows you to view and update wavelength converter module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-979 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the wavelength converter module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the wavelength converter module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the wavelength converter module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the wavelength converter module.
State	Allows you to place the wavelength converter module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the wavelength converter module.

C.9.15.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-980) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-980 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.15.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-981) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-981 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the module.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.15.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-982) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-982 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.15.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-983) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the wavelength converter module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-983 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.15.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-984) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-984 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.16  Slot Properties—WCM-10G-Nxx

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the module that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module. Wavelength converter modules (WCMs) are used at terminal (transmit direction) and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate SONET and SDH signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-63.

Figure C-63 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 Wavelength Converter Module

For the Wavelength Converter Module-10 Gbps-Normal (WCM-10G-Nxx), the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.16.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the LEM PM Table.

C.9.16.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-985) allows you to view and update module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-985 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (Cisco ONS 15800 or Cisco ONS 15801) where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the wavelength converter module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the wavelength converter module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the wavelength converter module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the wavelength converter module.
State	Allows you to place the wavelength converter module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the wavelength converter module.

C.9.16.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-986) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-986 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.16.4  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-987) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-987 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current of the module.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.16.5  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-988) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-988 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.16.6  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-989) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the wavelength converter module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-989 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module input power.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.16.7  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-990) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-990 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.17  Slot Properties—WCM-FEC

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module.

Forward error correction (FEC) wavelength converter modules (WCMs) are used at terminal (transmit direction) and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate SONET and SDH signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-64.

Figure C-64 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 FEC Wavelength Converter Module

WCMs shown on this sheet include:

•Wavelength Converter Module-Externally Modulated-Forward Error Correction (WCM-EM-Fxx)

•Wavelength Converter Module-10 Gbps-Forward Error Correction (WCM-10G-Fxx)

For FEC WCMs, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.9.17.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the FEC WCM PM Table.

C.9.17.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-991) allows you to view and update wavelength converter module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-991 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the wavelength converter module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the wavelength converter module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the wavelength converter module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the wavelength converter module.
State	Allows you to place the wavelength converter module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the wavelength converter module.

C.9.17.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-992) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-992 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.17.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-993) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 and FEC counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-993 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Bit Error Rate	Sets the high threshold for the B1 bit error rate (BER) and the alarm severity level. The BER is the ratio of received bits that contain errors.
FEC Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC ES and the alarm severity level.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC SES and the alarm severity level.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC BBE and the alarm severity level.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Error Corrected Rate	Sets the high threshold for the bit error corrected rate (ECR) and the alarm severity level. The ECR is the ratio of FEC bit errors corrected to bits transmitted.
Uncorrected Codewords Rate	Sets the high threshold for the uncorrected codeword rate (UCR) and the alarm severity level. The UCR is the ratio of uncorrected codewords to codewords transmitted. A codeword is a block of N symbols that carry K information symbols and R redundant symbols (N = K+R).
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.17.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-994) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-994 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the module.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.17.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-995) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-995 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.17.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-996) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the wavelength converter module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-996 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.17.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-997) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-997 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.17.9  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-998) allows you to specify the output power setting. The tab contains the following action:

Table C-998 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Field

Description

Output Power Setting

The output power setting is used to activate the output power control mode on FEC transponders and force the transponder to regulate the optical output power. An improper setting of the transponder output power level could either: •Affect the equalization of the channel downstream from the optical line, the optical channel S/N in fiber, and at the end of the optical line. •Affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. Click Execute to apply your changes to the setting. Click Update to retrieve the current setting from the NE.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.18  Slot Properties—WCM-EM-Fxx

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module.

Forward error correction (FEC) wavelength converter modules (WCMs) are used at terminal (transmit direction) and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate SONET and SDH signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-65.

Figure C-65 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 FEC Wavelength Converter Module

For Wavelength Converter Modules-Externally Modulated-Forward Error Correction (WCM-EM-Fxx), the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, Output Power, and Action.

C.9.18.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the FEC WCM PM Table.

C.9.18.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-999) allows you to view and update wavelength converter module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-999 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the wavelength converter module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the wavelength converter module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the wavelength converter module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the wavelength converter module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the wavelength converter module.
State	Allows you to place the wavelength converter module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the wavelength converter module.

C.9.18.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-1000) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1000 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.18.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-1001) allows you to assign thresholds and alarm severities for B1 and FEC counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1001 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Bit Error Rate	Sets the high threshold for the B1 bit error rate (BER) and the alarm severity level. The BER is the ratio of received bits that contain errors.
FEC Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC ES and the alarm severity level.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC SES and the alarm severity level.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC BBE and the alarm severity level.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of FEC unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Error Corrected Rate	Sets the high threshold for the bit error corrected rate (ECR) and the alarm severity level. The ECR is the ratio of FEC bit errors corrected to bits transmitted.
Uncorrected Codewords Rate	Sets the high threshold for the uncorrected codeword rate (UCR) and the alarm severity level. The UCR is the ratio of uncorrected codewords to codewords transmitted. A codeword is a block of N symbols that carry K information symbols and R redundant symbols (N = K+R).
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 UAS and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.18.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-1002) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1002 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the module.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.18.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-1003) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1003 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.18.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-1004) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the wavelength converter module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1004 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.18.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-1005) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1005 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module Laser 1 output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dB) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.18.9  Action Tab

The Action tab (see Table C-1006) allows you to specify the output power setting. The tab contains the following action:

Table C-1006 Field Descriptions for the Action Tab 

Field

Description

Output Power Setting

The output power setting is used to activate the output power control mode on FEC transponders and force the transponder to regulate the optical output power. An improper setting of the transponder output power level could either: •Affect the equalization of the channel downstream from the optical line, the optical channel S/N in fiber, and at the end of the optical line. •Affect the optical channel power at the level at the end of the optical line. Click Update to retrieve the current setting from the NE.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.19  Slot Properties—WCM-EM-Mxx

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the 2.5-Gbps Wavelength Converter Module-Externally Modulated-B1 Monitoring (WCM-EM-Mxx) that is installed in the slot selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module.

Wavelength converter modules (WCMs) are used at terminal (transmit direction) and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate SONET and SDH signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-66.

Figure C-66 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 B1 Wavelength Converter Module

For 2.5-Gbps, B1-monitoring WCM modules, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.19.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the module that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the B1 LEM PM Table.

C.9.19.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-1007) allows you to view and update wavelength converter module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1007 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (Cisco ONS 15800 or Cisco ONS 15801) where the module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the module.
State	Allows you to place the module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection State	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the module.

C.9.19.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-1008) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1008 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.19.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-1009) allows you to assign high alarm thresholds and severities for B1 counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1009 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.19.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-1010) allows you to assign alarm thresholds and severities for the wavelength converter module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1010 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current value of the Laser 1 current (in mA).
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.19.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-1011) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1011 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.19.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-1012) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1012 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module input power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.19.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-1013) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1013 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current wavelength converter module output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

C.9.20  Slot Properties—WCM10

The Slot Properties pane displays information about the Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to set performance monitoring thresholds for the module.

Wavelength converter modules (WCMs) are used at terminal (transmit direction) and optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) sites to retime, reshape, and regenerate SONET and SDH signals.

A block diagram is shown in Figure C-67.

Figure C-67 Cisco ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 B1 Wavelength Converter Module

WCMs shown on this sheet include:

•Wavelength Converter Module-10 Gbps-B1 Monitoring (WCM-10G-Mxx)

•Wavelength Converter Module-10 Gbps High Output Power-B1 Monitoring (WCM-10H-Mxx)

For these transponders, the Slot Properties pane displays the following tabs: Module View, Identification, Temperature, Quality of Service, Current, Power, Input Power, and Output Power.

C.9.20.1  Module View Tab

The Module View tab displays a graphic of the transponder that is installed in the slot. The number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the module is displayed under Alarm Status. (Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic also displays the alarm counts.) The module status is displayed under Operational State. Right-clicking the graphic opens a shortcut menu that you can use to display the module in the Alarm Browser, in the Equipment Inventory Table, or in the B1 LEM PM Table.

C.9.20.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab (see Table C-1014) allows you to view and update wavelength converter module identification information. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1014 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the module is installed.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801) where the module is installed.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack containing the module is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack containing the module.
Slot ID	Displays the identification number of the slot containing the module.
Software Version	Displays the version of the software.
BIOS Version	Displays the version number of the BIOS.
Board Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the board.
SCC Number	Displays the version of the module serial communication controller (SCC).
Product Option	Displays the product option. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Hardware Version	Displays the version of the hardware. Displays "Not Available" if the TL1 Agent version is earlier than version 2.1.
Line Direction	Shows the line direction for the module.
State	Allows you to place the module in one of two states: In Service or Under Maintenance.
PM Collection Status	Allows you to enable or disable performance monitoring (PM) collection for the module.

C.9.20.3  Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab (see Table C-1015) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser temperature. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1015 Field Descriptions for the Temperature Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Temperature
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current temperature of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high temperature threshold for Laser 1 (in degrees Celsius) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.20.4  Quality of Service Tab

The Quality of Service tab (see Table C-1016) allows you to assign high alarm thresholds and severities for B1 counters. Click the 15 min radio button to assign thresholds for 15-minute collection increments. Click the 1 day radio button to assign thresholds for 24-hour collection increments. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1016 Field Descriptions for the Quality of Service Tab 

Field	Description
B1 Counters
Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 errored seconds (ES) and the alarm severity level. An errored second is a one-second period with one or more error blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 severely errored seconds (SES) and the alarm severity level. A severely errored second is a one-second period that contains at least 30 percent of errored blocks or at least one defect.
Background Block Errors	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 background block errors (BBE) and the alarm severity level. An errored block is a block in which one or more bits are in error. A background block error is an errored block that does not occur as part of a severely errored second.
Unavailable Seconds	Sets the high threshold for the number of B1 unavailable seconds (UAS) and the alarm severity level. The detection of 10 consecutive SES begins a period of UAS. The 10 SES detected are part of the UAS. The ES and SES counters decrement by 10 seconds and the UAS counter increments by an equivalent number of seconds. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.

C.9.20.5  Current Tab

The Current tab (see Table C-1017) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module laser current levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1017 Field Descriptions for the Current Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Current
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the Laser 1 current of the module.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for Laser 1 current (in mA) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.20.6  Power Tab

The Power tab (see Table C-1018) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module Laser 1 power levels. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1018 Field Descriptions for the Power Tab 

Field	Description
Laser 1 Power
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current power of Laser 1.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the laser power (in mW) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.20.7  Input Power Tab

The Input Power tab (see Table C-1019) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the power coming into the wavelength converter module. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1019 Field Descriptions for the Input Power Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current module input power.
Degrade	Sets the degrade threshold for the module input power in dBm and the alarm severity level.
Fail	Sets the failure threshold for the module input power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

C.9.20.8  Output Power Tab

The Output Power tab (see Table C-1020) allows you to assign performance monitoring thresholds for the wavelength converter module output power. The tab contains the following fields.

Table C-1020 Field Descriptions for the Output Power Tab 

Field	Description
Output Power 1
Value	When the Update button is clicked, displays the current module output power.
Low	Sets the low threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.
High	Sets the high threshold for the module Laser 1 output power (in dBm) and the alarm severity level.

---

Note See Table 1-19 on page 1-38 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the buttons at the bottom of the window.

---